With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet
Date: 2000-03-20T10:17:18+00:00
Keywords: Tibet; Buddhism; mystics; shamanism
Description: Tibet, Buddhism, mystics, shamanism

Magic and Mystery in Tibet
Alexandra David-Neel
With an Introduction by Dr. A. D'Arsonval

Penguin Books
London
English edition, first published 1931
First published in Penguin Books 1936
Reprinted March 1937
Reprinted September 1937
Made and Printed in Great Britain for Penguin Books Limited
by Furnell and Sons, Ltd., Paultron (Somerset) and London

Contents
Introduction  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   1
Author's Preface  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Tibet and the Lamas  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
A Guest of the Lamas  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
A Famous Tibetan Monastery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Dealing with Ghosts and Demons   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Disciples of Yore and their Contemporary Emulators  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Psychic Sports   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Mystic Theories and Spiritual Training  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Psychic Phenomena in Tibet – How Tibetans Explain them   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Contents
•  -1
•••

•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Contents
•  0
•••

Introduction
For many Westerners Tibet is wrapped in an atmosphere of mystery. The "Land of
Snows" is for them the country of the unknown, the fantastic and the impossible.
What super-human powers have not been ascribed to the various kinds of lames,
magicians, sorcerers, necromancers and practitioners of the occult who inhabit
those high tablelands, and whom both nature and their own deliberate purpose
have so splendidly isolated from the rest of the world? And how readily are the
strangest legends about them accepted as indisputable truths! In that country
plants, animals and human beings seem to divert to their own purposes the best
established laws of physics chemistry, physiology and even plain common sense.
It is therefore quite natural that scholars accustomed to the strict discipline of exper-
imental method should have paid to these stories merely the condescending and
amused attention that is usually given to fairy tales.
Such was my own state of mind up to the day when I had the good fortune to make
the acquaintance of Madame Alexandra David-Neel.
This well-known and courageous explorer of Tibet unites in herself all the physical,
moral and intellectual qualities that could be desired in one who is to observe and
examine a subject of this kind. I must insist on saying this, however much her mod-
esty may suffer.
Madame David-Neel understands, writes and speaks fluently all the dialects of
Tibet. She has spent fourteen consecutive years in the country and the neighbour-
ing regions. She is a professed Buddhist, and so has been able to gain the confi-
dence of the most important Lamas. Her adopted son is an ordained lame; and she
herself has undergone the psychic exercises of which she speaks. Madame David-
Neel has in fact become, as she herself says, a complete Asiatic, and, what is still
more important for an explorer of a country hitherto inaccessible to foreign travel-
ers, she is recognized as such by those among whom she has lived.
This Easterner, this complete Tibetan, has nevertheless remained a Westerner, a
disciple of Descartes and of Claude Bernard, practicing the philosophic scepticism
of the former which, according to the latter, should be the constant ally of the scien-
tific observer. Unencumbered by any preconceived theory, and unbiased by any
doctrine or dogma, Madame David-Neel has observed everything in Tibet in a free
and impartial spirit.
In the lectures which, in my capacity as professor of the College de France, suc-
ceeding my master Claude Bernard, I asked her to deliver, Madame David-Neel
sums up her conclusions in these words:
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Introduction
•  1
•••

“Everything that relates, whether closely or more distantly, to psychic
phenomena and to the action of psychic forces in general, should be studied just
like any other science. There is nothing miraculous or supernatural in them,
nothing that should engender or keep alive superstition. Psychic training,
rationally and scientifically conducted, can lead to desirable results. That is why
the information gained about such training – even though it is practiced
empirically and based on theories to which we cannot always give assent –
constitutes useful documentary evidence worthy of our attention."
Here, it is clear, is a true scientific determinism, as far removed from scepticism as
from blind credulity.
The studies of Madame David-Neel will be of interest to Orientalists, psychologists
and physiologists alike.
DOCTEUR A. D'ARSONVAL
Member of the Académie des Sciences and of the Académie de Médecine.
Professor of the College de France.
President of the Institut Général Psychologique.
•
•
2
•

•••

Author's Preface
Immediately after the publication of my account of my journey to Lhasa, many per-
sons expressed a wish, both in articles devoted to my book and in private conversa-
tion, to know how I came to live among the lamas, and also to learn more about the
doctrines and practices of the mystics and magicians of Tibet.
In this book I attempt to satisfy their friendly curiosity. This task is however fraught
with certain difficulties, owing to the limited space at my disposal.
In order to answer these two questions in the order in which they have been put to
me, I have started by describing the events which brought me into contact with the
religious world of the lamas and of the various kinds of magicians who surround
them.
Next I have tried to group together a certain number of salient points concerning the
occult and mystical theories and the psychic training practices of the Tibetans.
Whenever I have discovered in the rich store of my recollections a fact bearing on
these subjects, I have related it as it came. Consequently the book is not a record of
travel, for the subject does no lend itself to that treatment.
In the course of such investigations as I have pursued, the information obtained on
one particular day is sometimes not completed till several months or several yeas
later. It is only by presenting the final results of information gathered in various
places that one can hope to give an adequate idea of the subject I am describing.
It is my intention, later on, to treat the question of Tibetan mysticism and philosophy
in a more technical work.
As in my previous book My Journey to Lhasa, the Tibetan names are generally tran-
scribed phonetically only. The few cases in which the Tibetan orthography has been
indicated will show how the correct pronunciation deviates from the spelling.
; ; ;
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  3
•••

Chapter I: Tibet and the Lamas
"WELL, then, it is understood. I leave Dawasandup with you as interpreter. He
will accompany you to Gangtok."
Is it a man who is speaking to me? This short yellow-skinned being clad in a robe of
orange brocade, a diamond star sparkling on his hat, is he not, rather, a genie come
down from the neighbouring mountains?
They say he is an "incarnated Lama" and heir prince of a Himalayan throne, but I
doubt his reality. Probably he will vanish like a mirage, with his caparisoned little
steed and his party of followers, dressed in all the colours of the rainbow. He is a
part of the enchantment in which I have lived these last fifteen days. This new epi-
sode is of the stuff that dreams are made of. In a few minutes, I shall wake up in a
real bed, in some country not haunted by genii nor by "incarnated Lamas" wrapped
in shimmering silk. A country where men wear ugly dark coats and the horses do
not carry silver inlaid saddles on golden-yellow cloths.
The sound of a kettledrum makes me start, two hautboys intone a melancholy minor
tune. The youthful genie straddles his diminutive courser, knights and squires jump
into their saddles.
"I shall expect you," the lama-prince says, smiling graciously at me.
I hear myself, as if I were listening to some other person, promising him that I will
start the next day for his capital, and the little troop, headed by the musicians, disap-
pears.
As the last murmurs of the plaintive melody die away in the distance, the enchant-
ment that has held me spellbound dissipates.
I have not been dreaming, all this is real. I am at Kalimpong, in the Himalayas, and
the interpreter given me when I arrived stands at my side.
I have already related1 the circumstances which had brought me to the Himalayas.
Political reasons had at that time, led the Dalai Lama to seek refuge in British terri-
tory. It had seemed to me a unique opportunity, while he was stopping at the Indian
frontier, of obtaining an interview and getting information from him about the special
type of Buddhism that prevails in Tibet.
Very few strangers have ever approached the monk-king hidden in his sacred city, in
the Land of Snows. Even in exile, he saw no one. Up to the time of my visit, he had
1. In a previous book, “My Journey to Lhasa.”
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  4
•••

obstinately refused an audience to any woman except Tibetans and I believe, even
to this day that I am the only exception to this rule.
As I left Darjeeling, in the early rosy dawn of a cool spring morning, I little guessed
the far-reaching consequences of my request.
I thought of a short excursion, of an interesting but brief interview; while, actually, I
became involved in wanderings that kept me in Asia for full fourteen years.
At the beginning of that long series of journeys, the Dalai Lama figures, in my dia-
ries, as an obliging host who, seeing a stranger without the walls, invites him to see
over his domain.
This, the Dalai Lama did in a few words: "Learn the Tibetan language," he told me.
If one could believe his subjects who call him the "Omniscient,"2 the sovereign of
Tibet, when giving me this advice, foresaw its consequences, and consciously
directed me, not only towards Lhasa, his forbidden capital, but towards the mystic
masters and unknown magicians, yet more closely hidden in his wonderland.
At Kalimpong, the lama-king lived in a large house belonging to the minister of the
Rajah of Bhutan. To give the place a more majestic appearance, two rows of tall
bamboo poles had been planted in the form of an avenue. Flags flew from every
pole, with the inscription Aum Mani Padme Hum!, or the "horse of the air," sur-
rounded by magic formulas.
The suite of the exiled sovereign was numerous and included more than a hundred
servants. They were for the most part engaged in interminable gossip, and quiet
reigned round the habitation. But on fête days, or when visitors of rank were to be
received, a crowd of busy officials and domestics poured out from all sides, peering
at one from every window, crossing and re-crossing the large plot of ground in front
of the house, hurrying, screaming, agitated, and all so remarkably alike in their dirty,
greasy robes, that a stranger could easily make awkward mistakes about their rank.
The splendour, decorum and etiquette of the Potala were absent in that land of
exile. Those who saw this road-side camp, where the Head of the Tibetan theocracy
waited for his subjects to reconquer his throne, could not imagine what the Court at
Lhasa was like.
The British expedition penetrating into the forbidden territory and parading his capi-
tal, in spite of the sorcery of the most famous magicians, had probably led the Dalai
Lama to understand that foreign barbarians were masters in a material sense, by
right of force. The inventions that he noticed during his trip through India must also
have convinced him of their ability to enslave and mould the material elements of
nature. But his conviction that the white race is mentally inferior remained
unshaken. And, in this, he only shared the opinion of all Asiatics – from Ceylon to
the northern confines of Mongolia.
A Western woman acquainted with Buddhist doctrines seemed to him an inconceiv-
able phenomenon.
If I had vanished into space while talking to him, he would have been less aston-
ished. My reality surprised him most; but, when finally convinced, he politely
inquired after my "Master," assuming that I could only have learned of Buddha from
2. Thamstched mkyenpa.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  5
•••

an Asiatic. It was not easy to convince him that the Tibetan text of one of the most
esteemed Buddhist books3 had been translated into French before I was born.
"Ah well," he murmured at last, "if a few strangers have really learned our
language and read our sacred books, they must have missed the meaning of
them."
This was my chance. I hastened to seize it.
"It is precisely because I suspect that certain religious doctrines of Tibet have
been misunderstood that I have come to you to be enlightened," I said.
My reply pleased the Dalai Lama. He readily answered any questions I put to him,
and a little later gave me a long written explanation of the various subjects we had
discussed.
The prince of Sikkim and his escort having disappeared, it only remained for me to
keep my promise and make ready to start for Gangtok. But there was something to
be seen before moving on.
The evening before, I had witnessed the benediction of the pilgrims by the Dalai
Lama, a widely different scene from the Pontifical benediction at Rome. For the
Pope in a single gesture blesses the multitude, while the Tibetans are far more
exacting and each expect an individual blessing.
Among Lamaists again the manner of the blessing varies with the social rank of the
blessed. The Lama places both hands on the heads of those he most respects. In
other cases only one hand, two fingers or even only one finger. Lastly comes the
blessing given by slightly touching the head with coloured ribbons, attached to a
short stick.
In every case, however, there is contact, direct or indirect, between the lama and the
devotee. This contact, according to Lamaists, is indispensable because the bene-
diction, whether of people or of things, is not meant to call down upon them the
benediction of God but to infuse into them some beneficial power that emanates
from the lama.
The large number of people who came to Kalimpong to be touched by the Dalai
Lama gave me some idea of his widespread prestige.
The procession took several hours to pass before him, and I noticed that not only
Lamaists but many people from Nepal and from Bengal, belonging to Hindu sects,
had joined the crowd.
I saw some, who had come only to look on, suddenly seized by an occult fervour,
hurrying to join the pious flock.
As I was watching this scene, my eyes fell on a man seated on the ground, a little to
one side. His matted hair was wound around his head like a turban, in the style com-
mon to Hindu ascetics. Yet, his features were not those of an Indian and he was
wearing dirty and much-torn lamaist monastic garments.
This tramp had placed a small bag beside him and seemed to observe the crowd
with a cynical expression.
3. The Gyacher rolpa, translated by Ed. Poucaux, Professor at the College de France.
•
•
6
•

•••

I pointed him out to Dawasandup, asking him if he had any idea who this Himalayan
Diogenes might be.
"It must be a travelling naljorpa,”4 he answered; and, seeing my curiosity, my
obliging interpreter went to the man and entered into conversation with him.
He returned to me with a serious face and said:
"This lama is a peripatetic ascetic from Bhutan. He lives here and there in caves,
empty houses or under the trees. He has been stopping for several days in a
small monastery near here."
My thoughts returned to the vagabond when the prince and his escort had disap-
peared. I had no definite plan for the afternoon, why should I not go to the gom-pa5
where he was staying, and persuade him to talk? Was he really mocking, as he
seemed to be, at the Dalai Lama and the faithful? And if so, why? There might be
interesting reasons.
I communicated my desire to Dawasandup, who agreed to accompany me.
We went on horseback and soon reached the gompa which was only a large-sized
country-house.
In the lha khang6 we found the naljorpa seated upon a cushion in front of a low
table, finishing his meal. Cushions were brought and we were offered tea.
It was difficult to begin a conversation with the ascetic, as his mouth appeared to be
full of rice; he had only answered our polite greetings by a kind of grunt.
I was trying to find a phrase to break the ice, when the strange fellow began to laugh
and muttered a few words. Dawasandup seemed embarrassed.
"What does he say?" I asked.
"Excuse me" answered the interpreter, "these naljorpas sometimes speak
roughly. I do not know if I should translate."
"Please do," I replied. "I am here to take notes; especially of anything at all
curious and original."
"Well, then-excuse me-he said, 'What is this idiot here for’?"
Such rudeness did not greatly astonish me as, in India also, certain yogins make a
habit of insulting anyone who approaches them.
"Tell him I have come to ask why he mocked at the crowd seeking the
benediction of the Dalai Lama."
"Puffed up with a sense of their own importance and the importance of what they
are doing. Insects fluttering in the dung," muttered the naljorpa between his
teeth.
This was vague, but the kind of language one expects from such men.
"And you," I replied, "are you free from all defilement?"
4. Naljorpa (written rnal hoyorpa) literally: "He who has attained perfect serenity," but usually interpreted: an
ascetic possessing magic powers.
5. Monastery
6. The room containing the holy images (thankas)
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  7
•••

He laughed noisily.
"He who tries to get out only sinks in deeper. I roll in it like a pig. I digest it and
turn it into golden dust, into a brook of pure water. To fashion stars out of dog
dung, that is the Great Work!"
Evidently my friend was enjoying himself. This was his way of posing as a super-
man.
"Are these pilgrims not right, to profit by the presence of the Dalai Lama and
obtain his blessing? They are simple folk incapable of aspiring to the knowledge
of the higher doctrines (...)"
But the naljorpa interrupted me.
For a blessing to be efficacious, he who gives it must possess the power that he pro-
fesses to communicate.
"Would the Precious Protector7 need soldiers to fight the Chinese or other
enemies if he possessed such a power? Could he not drive anyone he liked out
of the country and surround Tibet with an invisible barrier that none could pass?
"The Guru who is born in a lotus8 had such a power and his blessing still reaches
those who worship him, even though he lives in the distant land of the Rakshasas.
"I am only a humble disciple, and yet (...)"
It appeared to me that the "humble disciple" was maybe a little mad and certainly
very conceited, for his "and yet" had been accompanied by a glance that suggested
many things.
My interpreter meanwhile was visibly uneasy. He profoundly respected the Dalai
Lama and disliked to hear him criticized. On the other hand, the man who could
"create stars out of dog dung" inspired him with a superstitious fear.
I proposed to leave, but as I understood that the lama was going away the next
morning, I handed Dawasandup a few rupees for the traveller to help him on his
way.
This present displeased the naljorpa. He refused it, saying he had already received
more provisions than he could carry.
Dawasandup thought it right to insist. He took a few steps forward, intending to
place the money on a table near the lama. Then I saw him stagger, fall backward
and strike his back against the wall as if he had been violently pushed. He uttered a
cry and clutched at his stomach. The naljorpa got up and, sneering, left the room.
"I feel as if I had received a terrible blow," said Dawasandup. "The lama is
irritated. How shall we appease him?"
"Let us go," I answered. "The lama has probably nothing to do with it. You,
perhaps, have heart trouble and had better consult a doctor."
Pale and troubled, the interpreter answered nothing. Indeed there was nothing to be
said. We returned, but I was not able to reassure him.
7. The Dalai Lama
8. Padmasambhâva (Guru Rinpoche), who preached in Tibet in the eighth century.
•
•
8
•

•••

The next day Dawasandup and I left for Gangtok.
The mule path that we followed dives right into the Himalayas, the sacred land
which ancient Indian traditions people with famous sagas, stern magicians, ascet-
ics and deities.
The summer resorts established by foreigners on the border of these impressive
highlands have not yet modified their aspect. A few miles away from the hotels
where the Western world enjoys dancing and jazz bands, the primeval forest reigns.
Shrouded in the moving fogs, a fantastic army of trees, draped in livid green moss,
seems to keep watch along the narrow tracks, warning or threatening the traveller
with enigmatic gestures. From the low valleys buried under the exuberant jungle to
the mountain summits covered with eternal snow, the whole country is bathed in
occult influences.
In such scenery it is fitting that sorcery should hold sway. The so-called Buddhist
population is practically Shamanist and a large number of mediums: Bön-pos,
Pawos, Bunting and Yabas of both sexes, even in the smallest hamlets transmit the
messages of gods, demons and the dead.
I slept on the way at Pakyong, and the next day I reached Gangtok.
As I neared this village-capital, I was greeted by a sudden and formidable hail-
storm.
Tibetans think that meteorological phenomena are the work of demons or magi-
cians. A hail-storm is one of their favourite weapons. The former use it to hinder pil-
grims on their journey to holy places and the latter by this means, defend their
hermitages against intruders and keep off faint-hearted candidates for discipleship.
A few weeks after my arrival, the superstitious Dawasandup confessed that he had
consulted a mpa9 about the unexpected attack of hail upon the otherwise gloriously
sunny day of my arrival.
The oracle declared that the local gods and the holy lamas were not hostile to me,
but that, nevertheless, I should meet with many difficulties if I attempted to live in the
"Land of the Religion," as Tibetans call their country.
A prediction very generously fulfilled!
His Highness Sidkeong Namgyal, hereditary prince of Sikkim, was a veritable lama:
abbot of a monastery of the Karma-Khagyud sect and a Tulku 10 (See “A Famous
Tibetan Monastery” on page 58.) believed to be the reincarnation of his uncle, a
lama of saintly memory.
As usual, he had donned the monastic garb while still a child, and spent a part of his
youth in the monastery of which he was now the head.
The British Government having chosen him, in preference to his elder brother, as
successor to the maharajah his father, he was put in charge of an anglicized Indian
as guardian and teacher.
A short stay at Oxford and a trip round the world completed his heterogeneous edu-
cation.
9. Diviner
10.Tulku, a lama of high rank whom foreigners call a "living Buddha”
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  9
•••

Sidkeong Tulku11 knew English better than his mother tongue: Tibetan. He spoke
Hindustani fluently and, also, a little Chinese. The private villa he had built in his
father's gardens resembled an English country house Unposed on a Tibetan tem-
ple. The same contrasts were repeated within. The ground floor was furnished
according to English taste, while upstairs there was an oratory with Lamaist images
and a Tibetan sitting-room.
The young prince was very open-minded. He immediately became interested in my
researches and facilitated my task with great zeal.
The first part of my stay in Sikkim was devoted to visiting the monasteries scattered
through the forests. Picturesquely situated, usually on the spur of a mountain, their
aspect impressed me deeply. I liked to imagine these rustic dwellings inhabited by
thinkers liberated from worldly ambitions and struggles, who passed their days in
peace and deep meditations.
I did not, however, find the monasteries quite what I expected. The monks of Sikkim
are for the most part illiterate and have no desire to be enlightened, even about the
Buddhism which they profess. Nor, indeed, have they the necessary leisure. The
gompas of Sikkim are poor, they have but a very small income and no rich benefac-
tors. Their trapas are compelled to work for their living.
Foreign authors call all members of the Lamaist clergy indiscriminately lamas, but
this is not the custom in Tibet. The only monks who have a right to the title of lama12
are the ecclesiastical dignitaries such as the Tulkus, the abbots of large monaster-
ies, the heads of the great monastic colleges and monks who hold high university
degrees. All other monks, even those who have been ordained as gelong, are called
trapas.13 Nevertheless, it is usual to give the courtesy title of lama to aged and
learned monks when addressing them.
In Sikkim, a number of trapas whom their colleagues held to be learned men were
capable of celebrating a few religious rites.
They taught the novices to recite the liturgy and received as fees gifts in kind, more
rarely a little money and, often, merely the domestic service of their pupils. How-
ever, the exercise of their priestly functions was the main source of their income.
Orthodox Buddhism strictly forbids religious rites, and the learned lamas acknowl-
edge that they cannot bestow spiritual enlightenment, which can only be acquired
by personal intellectual effort. Yet the majority believe in the efficacy of certain ritual-
istic methods of the healing of the sick, securing material prosperity, the conquest of
evil beings and the guidance of the spirits of the dead in the other world.
The funeral ceremonies were the principal duty of the Himalayan monks. They cele-
brated these rites with zeal, even with pleasure; for they include one or two ban-
quets offered by the family of the dead to the monks of the monastery to which he
had been attached. The officiating trapas also receive presents of money and in
kind at the house of the dead man.
11.In Tibetan language, titles or other honours follow the name.
12.Written: blama, which means "superior" – "excellent."
13.Students)
•
•
10
•

•••

Now, the peasant clergy of these forests are generally poor and ill-fed, and it is diffi-
cult for them to suppress a thrill of delight when the death of a rich villager promises
them several days' feast.
Grown-up men usually dissimulate their feelings, but the child-novices who guard
the cattle in the woods are amusingly frank.
One day, while I was sitting not far from some of these youthful herdsmen, a far-off
sound of wind instruments reached us.
In an instant the boys who had been playing stopped listening attentively. Again, we
heard the same sound. The children had understood.
"The conches!" said one of them.
"Some one is dead!" another answered.
Then they kept silent, looking at each other, their eyes sparkling with pleasure.
"We shall have meat to eat," one of the boys whispered.
In many villages, the lamaist priest comes into competition with the sorcerer, though
as a rule this leads to no animosity.
Generally, each has more or less faith in the worth of his rival's methods. Although
the lama is held in higher esteem than the Boil sorcerer, a follower of the ancient
religion of the aborigines, or than the ngagspa – magician, assimilated to the official
clergy-these latter are, nevertheless, believed to be more skilful in dealing with the
demons who harm living beings or the spirits of the dead.
An unforeseen incident led me to discover how the spirit of a dead man is drawn out
of his body by the officiating lama and directed on the right road in the next world.
I was returning, that day, from an excursion in the forest when I heard a sharp brief
cry, unlike that of any animal known to me. A few minutes later, the same cry was
twice repeated. I advanced slowly and noiselessly in the direction of the sound and
discovered a cabin which had been hidden by a slight rise in the ground.
Lying flat between the bushes, I could observe what was going on without being
seen. Two monks were seated under the trees, their gaze lowered in an attitude of
meditation.
Hik! cried one upon a peculiar abnormal shrill note. Hik! repeated the other after a
few minutes. And so they continued, with long intervals of silence, during which they
remained motionless between the shrieks.
I noticed that a great effort seemed required to produce this sound, which appar-
ently came up from their very entrails. After having watched them for some time, I
saw one of the trapas put his hands upon his throat. His face expressed suffering,
he turned his head to one side and spat out a stream of blood.
His companion said a few words that I could not hear. Without answering the monk
rose and went towards the cabin.
I then noticed a long straw standing straight up on the top of his head. What did this
ornament signify?
While the traps entered the hut and his friend had his back to me, I escaped.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  11
•••

As soon as I saw Dawasandup, I questioned him. What were these men doing; why
did they utter this strange cry?
That, he said, is the ritualistic cry that the officiating lama shouts beside a man who
has just died, in order to free the "spirit" and cause it to leave the body through a
hole that this magic syllable opens on the summit of the skull.
Only a lama who has received, from a competent master, the power of uttering that
hik! with the right intonation and required force, is capable of success. After hik! he
shouts phat! But he must be careful not to articulate phat when he is only practicing,
like the monks you overheard. The combination of these two sounds invariably
leads to the separation of body and spirit, so that the lama who pronounced them
correctly over himself would immediately die.
This danger does not exist when he is officiating, because he acts by proxy, in place
of the dead-lending him his voice, so that the effect of the magic words is felt by the
dead man, not by the lama.
Once the psychic power of drawing the spirit out of its corporeal envelope has been
conferred, by a competent master, upon a disciple, the latter must practice the utter-
ing of hik! in the right tone. It is known that this has been attained when a straw stuck
in the skull stands up straight as long as desired. For by shouting hik! a slight open-
ing in the skull is produced and the straw is placed in it. In the case of a dead man,
the opening is much larger. It is sometimes large enough to introduce the little fin-
ger.
Dawasandup was much interested in all questions concerning death and the spirit-
world. Five or six years after I knew him, he translated a classic Tibetan work on the
peregrinations of the dead in the next world.14
Several foreigners, Orientalist scholars or British officials have employed
Dawasandup and acknowledged his ability.
However, I have good reasons to think that none of them knew the real peculiarities
of hi character as I did.
Dawasandup was an occultist and even, in a certain way, a mystic. He sought for
secret intercourse with the Dâkinîs15 and the dreadful gods hoping to gain super-
normal powers. Everything that concerned the mysterious world of beings gener-
ally invisible strongly attracted him, but the necessity of earning his living made it
impossible for him to devote much time to his favourite study.
Born at Kalimpong, his ancestors were hillmen: Bhutanis or Sikkimeeses from the
Tibetan stock of the invaders. He got a scholarship and was educated at the High
School of Darjeeling, established for young men of Tibetan origin.
He entered the British Government service in India and became interpreter at Baxe
Duar, on the southern frontier of Bhutan.
I got some idea of this teacher from the accounts of Dawasandup, who venerated
him deeply. He must have resembled many lamas whom I have met later on har-
14.The "Bardo Tôd Tol."
15.Feminine deities. Dâkinî is their Sanskrit name used also in Tibetan mystic literature. Their Tibetan name
is mkah hgroma, pronounced Kandoma. They are often styled "mothers" and are said to impart esoteric
profound doctrines to their devotees.
•
•
12
•

•••

bouringin his mind a mixture of learning and superstitions, but, above all, a good
and charitable man.
He was distinguished from all his colleagues, however by having had as master a
veritable saint whose death is worth relating.
This holy lama was an anchorite who practiced mystic contemplation in a secluded
spot in Bhutan. As is often the case, one of his disciples shared his hermitage and
served him.
One day a pious benefactor came to see the ascetic and left him a sum of money to
purchase winter provisions. His disciple, urged on by covetousness, stabbed him
and ran off with the silver. The aged lama was still alive, and came to his senses
soon after the murderer had gone. His wounds caused him excruciating suffering,
and to escape this torture he sank into meditation.
Concentration of thought is carried so far by Tibetan mystics that it becomes anaes-
thetic and they do not feel anything; or at a lower degree of power they can thus
greatly lessen their pains.
When another disciple of the lama went to visit him a few days later he found him
rolled up in a blanket and motionless. The smell from the festering wounds and the
blood-stained blanket caught his attention. He questioned his master. The hermit
then told him what had happened, but when the man wished to get a doctor from the
nearest monastery he was forbidden to do so.
"If the lamas and villagers happen to hear about my condition they will search for the
culprit," said the ascetic.
"He cannot have got far. They would find him and, probably, condemn him to
death. I cannot permit this. I wish to give him more time to escape. One day he
will, perhaps, return to the right path, and n any case, I shall not have been the
cause of his death. So do not tell anyone what you have seen here. Now go,
leave me alone. While I meditate, I do not suffer, but when I become conscious
of my body my pain is unbearable."
An Oriental disciple does not discuss an order of this kind. The man prostrated him-
self at his guru's16 feet and left. A few days later the hermit, all alone in his hut,
passed away.
Although Dawasandup greatly admired the conduct of the holy lama, such moral
summits were not for him. He humbly confessed it.
Drink, a failing frequent among his countrymen, had been the curse of his life. This
increased his natural tendency to anger and led him, one day, within an ace of mur-
der. I had some influence over him while I lived at Gangtok. I persuaded him to
promise the total abstinence from fermented beverages that is enjoined on all Bud-
dhists. But it needed more energy than he possessed to persevere. It was impossi-
ble for him to resist his surroundings; where men say that to drink, and leave one's
reason at the bottom of the cup, is the proper thing for a faithful disciple of Pad-
masambhava.17
16.Guru, in Sanskrit, the spiritual father and guide. This word is used by Tibetan mystics, especially in book
language.
17.Padmasambhava belonged to the degenerate sect of tantric Buddhism. Yet, nothing proves he was natu-
rally intemperate, as some of his followers wish to make us believe, to justify their drunkenness.)
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  13
•••

When I met Dawasandup he had left the Government service to become head mas-
ter of the Tibetan school at Gangtok. He was too extraordinary for words in this rôle.
His passion for reading literally tyrannized the man. Wherever he went he carried a
book with him and, absorbed in it, he lost himself in a kind of ecstasy. For hours he
would forget where he was. His learned translations, his long conversations with
lamas and the celebrating of occult rites constantly distracted him from attending to
his school Indeed, he often seemed to have forgotten its very existence.
Sometimes for a whole month he did not set foot in the schoolroom, abandoning his
scholars to the care of an under master, who followed his example in neglecting
them, as far as he dared without risking his job.
Left to themselves, the boys played and wandered in the woods, forgetting the little
they had learned. However, the day would come when Dawasandup, severe as a
Judge of the Dead, suddenly appeared before his pupils, who trembled in every
limb, knowing full well what they had to expect.
First, they had to stand in a line in front of their examiner, who then questioned a boy
at one or the other end of the line.
If the child gave an incorrect answer, or none at all, his comrade next in line might
answer, and if his solution was right, he was ordered to slap the ignorant in the face
and take his place.
The victim was again questioned. If he did not show more learning than the first
time, the third in line was called up, and if successful, would be told to slap his com-
rade and take his place.
An unlucky urchin, stupefied by these repeated brutalities, reached the end of the
row, having received a dozen blows.
Not infrequently it happened that several boys standing side by side, were incapa-
ble of reciting their lessons. In that case, the most "erudite" of the group distributed
all the slaps, and if all the children showed themselves equally ignorant,
Dawasandup himself chastised them all.
Certain pupils hesitated to give a friend a hard blow and only made a presence of
striking him, but Dawasandup was on the look out.
"Come up here!" he would say, with a little ferocious laugh. "You do not know
how it is done, my boy. I'll teach you."
And bang! his large hand would strike the poor lad in the face. Then the boy had to
demonstrate, on his friend's cheek, that he had learned the lesson given by his terri-
ble teacher.
Sometimes the faults to be punished were not connected with the pupil's work. In
that strange school, devoid of all discipline, the inventive mind of Dawasandup dis-
covered transgressions to rules which had never been made. In these cases, he
used a specially long and heavy stick, ordering the culprit to stretch out his arm and
keep his hand open. Then the boy received on his palm the number of strokes fixed
by his master.
As he maneuvered his weapon, Dawasandup executed a kind of savage war dance,
marking each stroke with a leap and a wild exclamation of "ban!" So, with the active
•
•
14
•

•••

though unwilling co-operation of the victim, whose pain caused him to stamp, writhe
and yell, the punishment looked like a devilish ballet.
Arriving unexpectedly at the school one day, I witnessed one of these scenes, and
the children, who became familiar with me, frankly described their teacher's educa-
tional methods.
After a few days of this active professorship, Dawasandup would again abandon his
pupils.
I could tell many other stories about my good interpreter, some quite amusing, in
the style of Boccaccio. He played other parts than those of occultist, schoolmaster
and writer. But, peace to his memory. I do not wish to belittle him. Having acquired
real erudition by persevering efforts, he was sympathetic and interesting. I congrat-
ulate myself on having met him and gratefully acknowledge my debt to him.
I may add that Dawasandup is the author of the first, and up to now, only English-
Tibetan dictionary, and that he ended his days as professor of Tibetan at the univer-
sity of Calcutta.
My joy was intense when the prince Tulku announced that a real Tibetan doctor of
philosophy from the famous university of Trashilhumpo18 was coming to live at the
Enche monastery, near Gangtok, and that he also expected another lama – a native
from Sikkim, who had studied in Tibet – to return shortly to his country.
I soon was able to meet these two men and found them learned and distinguished
scholars.
The doctor of philosophy's name was Kushog19 Chösdzed, and he belonged to the
family of the ancient kings of Tibet. He had been some years in prison for some
political offense, and attributed his delicate state of health to poisoned food
absorbed during his incarceration.
The prince of Sikkim held men of learning in high esteem. He was glad to receive
the refugee and appointed him abbot of the Enche gompa, with the further duty of
teaching grammar and sacred literature to about twenty novices.
Kushog Chösdzed was a Gelugspa, that is to say a follower of the reformed sect
founded by Tsong Khapa about A.D. 1400, familiarly known as the sect of the "Yel-
low hats."
Foreign writers who describe the doctrines and religious practices of the "Yellow
hats" as completely opposed to those of the "Red hats" would have recognized their
error on finding, at Enche Monastery, a Gelugspa abbot presiding over monks of the
Red sect and chanting the liturgy with them.
I do not know whether this lama gave himself assiduously to meditation and should
be classed as a mystic, but he certainly possessed extraordinary erudition. His
memory resembled a miraculous library, where each book was ready at the asking,
to open at the desired page. Without the slightest effort he could quote texts by the
dozen, on any matter connected with Lamaism, Buddhist philosophy and Tibetan
history or secular literature.
18.Near Shigatze, the capital of the Tsang province.
19.Kushog, Tibetan equivalent of Sir.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  15
•••

This is, however, not an unusual feat in Tibet, but his perfect understanding and
subtle comprehension of shades of meaning was quite uncommon.
Whether from fear of being thought obtrusive or from pride of birth20, the lama sel-
dom visited the prince at his villa, and only to consult with him about affairs concern-
ing the monastery.
Sometimes he came to see me, but I generally went up to his gompa, which stood
on a spur of the mountain that dominated Gangtok.
After several conversations, the lama, suspicious as are most Orientals, devised an
amusing stratagem to test my knowledge of Buddhism and the extent of my under-
standing of its doctrines. One day when I was seated in his room, he took out of a
drawer a long list of questions and with exquisite politeness asked me to answer
them at once. The subjects treated were abstruse and had certainly been chosen
with the intention of embarrassing me.
I passed the trial honourably, my examiner seemed content. He then confessed that
up to this moment he had not believed me to be a Buddhist and that, not being able
to discover my reasons for questioning the lamas about their religion, he had feared
that my designs were evil.
After this he seemed quite reassured and manifested great confidence in me.
The second lama who arrived shortly after this at Gangtok came from the monas-
tery of Tolung Tserphug, situated in the region of Lhasa. He had studied there in his
youth, and returned later as secretary to the Head of the sect of the Karmapas, one
of the most important "Red hat" sects.
He was called Bermiag Kushog21 because he was the son of the Lord of that place,
one of the rare members of the Sikkimeese nobility who belonged to the aboriginal
race called the Lepchas.
Like Kushog Chösdzed, he had received the higher ordination of gelong and was a
celibate. He was chaplain to the maharajah and, as such, occupied an apartment in
the palace.
Nearly every afternoon he crossed the gardens and went to the villa where the
crown-prince lived. There in the sitting-room furnished according to English taste,
we had long conversations on topics quite foreign to Westerners.
I like to recall these talks which gradually enabled me to lift the veil that hides the
real Tibet and its religious world.
Sidkeong Tulku, always wearing his brocade robes, presided, seated on a couch. A
table was placed in front of him, and I sat opposite, in an arm-chair. We were each
provided with a little bowl of fine Chinese porcelain, with a silver saucer and a cover
shaped like a pagoda roof, studded with coral and turquoises.
At a short distance from the prince, the Honourable of Bermiag, majestically draped
in his garnet-coloured toga, had an arm-chair and a bowl with a silver saucer, but
without a cover. As for Dawasandup, who was often present, he squatted tailor fash-
ion22 at our feet and his bowl, placed upon the rug, had neither cover nor saucer.
20.his rank being higher than that of his protector
21.The Honourable of Bermiag
22.In the East they say "like a lotus"
•
•
16
•

•••

The complicated and very strict Tibetan etiquette was thus obeyed.
While that learned and fluent orator, Bermiag Kushog, talked, we were lavishly sup-
plied with Tibetan tea, the colour of faded roses and flavoured with butter and salt.
Rich Tibetans always have a bowl of this tea near at hand. A popular expression to
describe wealthy people is: "Their lips are always moistened with tea or beer." How-
ever, tea only appeared in these reunions, out of respect for my orthodox Buddhist
principles.
A young attendant brought in a large silver teapot. He carried it around shoulder
high and lowered it to the level of our cups with studied gestures, as if he was per-
forming some religious rite. A few sticks of incense burning in a corner of the room,
spread a penetrating fragrance unlike any I had ever smelt in India or in China.
Sometimes, a slow solemn melody, at once melancholy and subdued, reached us
from the distant palace temple. And Bermiag lama continued talking, describing the
lives and thoughts of some sages or magicians who had lived or were living to-day,
in the forbidden land, whose frontier was so near. (...)
To Kushog Chösdzed and to Bermiag Kushog I owe my first initiation into the creeds
held by the Lamaists regarding death and the beyond: creeds unknown to most for-
eigners.
As one of these lamas was "Red hat," and the other belonged to the "Yellow hat"
sect, by listening to both, I was sure of acquiring information that represented the
general opinion and not that of any one particular sect or creed.
Moreover, in the years that followed, I had numerous occasions, in different parts of
Tibet, of questioning other lamas on this subject. For the convenience of the reader,
I will put together some of this information in the following summary.
Death and the Beyond. The profane generally imagine that Buddhists believe in the
reincarnation of the soul and even in metempsychosis. This is erroneous. Bud-
dhism teaches that the energy produced by the mental and physical activities of a
being brings about the apparition of new mental and physical phenomena when
once this being has been dissolved by death.
There exist a number of subtle theories upon this subject and the Tibetan mystics
seem to have attained a deeper insight into the question than most other Buddhists.
However, in Tibet, as elsewhere, the views of the philosophers are only understood
by the elite. The masses, although they repeat the orthodox creed: "all aggregates
are impermanent; no 'ego' exists in the person, nor in anything," remain attached to
the more simple belief in an undefined entity travelling from world to world, assum-
ing various forms.
The ideas of the Lamaists regarding the condition of man immediately after death
differ from those held by the Buddhists of the southern countries: Ceylon, Burma,
Siam. They affirm that a certain time elapses between his death and his rebirth
among one or other of the six kinds of recognized sentient beings.
According to popular belief, the class of beings in which one is reborn and the more
or less happy conditions in which one is placed among them, depend upon the good
and evil actions one has accomplished during one's previous existence.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  17
•••

The more enlightened lamas teach that man – or any other being – by his thoughts
and actions, creates affinities which, quite naturally, lead him to a kind of existence
in keeping with the nature of these affinities.
Others say that, by his actions, and above all, by his mental activity, he modifies his
very substance and so acquires the characteristics of a god, an animal, or of any
kind of being.
So far, these views differ very little from those expressed among Buddhists. The fol-
lowing lamaist theories are more original.
In the first place, the great importance given to cleverness by certain Mahâyâna
Buddhist sects is still more emphasized by Lamaists.
"He who knows how to go about it could live comfortably even in hell," is a very pop-
ular saying in Tibet. This explains more clearly than any definition or description all
that the lamas mean by thabs, i.e. "method."
Thus, while most of their co-religionists believe that the fate of the dead is mathe-
matically fixed in accordance with their moral character, the Lamaists declare that
he who knows the proper "method" is capable of modifying for the better his post-
mortem fate. In other words, he may cause himself to be reborn in the most agree-
able conditions possible.
They say: "as agreeable as possible," because in spite of cleverness, the weight of
past actions has considerable force. In fact, it is often so powerful that all the efforts
of a dead being, or of an initiate devoted to his welfare, are unable to stop the "spirit"
from precipitating itself into a miserable rebirth. We shall have an illustration of this
difficulty a little later.
Starting with the idea that "method," the "savoir-faire," is of an essential importance,
the Lamaists think that after having learned the art of living well one must learn the
art of dying well and of "doing well" in other worlds.
Initiates acquainted with mystic lore, are supposed to know what awaits them when
they die, and contemplative lamas have foreseen and experienced, in this life, the
sensations that accompany death. They will, therefore, neither be surprised nor
troubled when their present personality disintegrates. That which is to continue,
entering conscious into the next world will be already familiar with the roads and
bypaths and the places to which they lead.
What is this "that" which continues its way after the body has become a corpse? It is
a special "consciousness" among the several distinguished by Lamaists. The "con-
sciousness" of the "I," or according to another definition "the will to live."
I shall use the term "spirit" for the traveller whose peregrinations in the next world
we are to follow. This term is far from conveying exactly the idea which earned Tibet-
ans embody in the words Yid kyi rnampar shespa. But it has the advantage of being
familiar to Westerners and, indeed, there is none more suitable in any European
language.
I said that – according to Tibetans – a mystic initiate is capable of keeping his mind
lucid during the disintegration of his personality, and that it is possible to him to pass
from this world to the next fully conscious of what is happening. It follows that such a
man does not need the help of anyone in his last hours, nor any religious rites after
his death.
•
•
18
•

•••

But this is not the case for ordinary mortals.
By ordinary mortals, we must understand anyone, monk or layman, who has not
mastered the "science of death," and these are, naturally, the great majority.
Lamaism does not abandon these ignorants to themselves. While they are dying,
and after they are dead a lama teaches them that which they have not learned while
they were alive. He explains to them the nature of the beings and things which
appear on their way; he reassures them, and, above all, he never ceases guiding
them in the right direction.
The lama who is assisting a dying man is careful to prevent him from falling asleep,
or from fainting or falling into a coma. He points out the successive departure of the
special "consciousness" attached to each sense, viz. consciousness of the eye,
consciousness of the nose, of the tongue, of the body, of the ear. That is to say, he
calls attention to the gradual loss of sight, smell, taste, touch and hearing.
Then, the task of the lama is to make the "spirit" spring out of its envelope through
the top of the head; for if it leaves by any other road, the future well-being of the man
will be greatly jeopardized.
This extraction of the "spirit" is produced by the ritualistic cry of Hik! followed by
Phat! Before uttering the cry, the lama must concentrate his thoughts and identify
himself with the man who has just died.
He must make the effort which the man himself ought to have made, to cause the
"spirit" to ascend to the summit of the skull with sufficient force to produce the fis-
sure through which it can escape.
Initiates who are capable of making the "spirit" rise for themselves, utter the liberat-
ing cries of Hik! and Phat! when they feel their end approaching, and so free them-
selves without help.
They are also able to commit suicide in this way and it is said that certain mystics
have done so.
The disembodied "spirit" then begins a strange pilgrimage. The popular belief is
that a journey really takes place through lands that really exist and are peopled with
real beings. But the more learned Lamaists consider the journey as a series of sub-
jective visions, a dream that the "spirit" himself weaves under the influence of his
character and his past actions.
Certain Lamaists assert that, immediately after the "spirit" has been disincarnated,
it has an intuition, fugitive as a streak of lightning, of the Supreme Reality. If it can
seize this light, it is definitely set free from the "round" of successive births and
deaths. It has reached the state of nirvâna.
This is rarely the case. Generally the "spirit" is dazzled by this sudden light. He
shrinks from it pulled backward by his false conceptions, his attachment to individ-
ual existence and to the pleasure of the senses. Or, else, the significance of what he
has seen escapes him, just as a man, absorbed by his preoccupations, will fail to
notice what is going on around him.
The ordinary man who has died while in a faint, does not immediately understand
what has happened when he becomes conscious again. For several days he will
"talk" to people living in his former dwelling-place and he will be astonished that no
one answers him or seems to be aware of his presence.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  19
•••

A lama of the monastery of Litang, in Eastern Tibet, told me that some dead men
had communicated through the intermediary of pawos23 the fact that they had tried
to use objects belonging to them. They wanted to take a plough to work their fields
or to reach their clothes which were hanging on a hook and put them on. They were
irritated at not being able to carry on the life to which they were accustomed.
In such cases, the "spirit" of the dead is disoriented. What can have happened to
him? He notices an inert body similar to his own and sees the lamas chanting
around him. Is it possible that he is dead?
Simple people believe that the disincarnated "spirit" must go to a sandy spot and
observe his footprints on the ground. If these footprints are reversed, that is to say if
the heels are in front and the toes turned backwards, he can no longer doubt that he
is dead.
We may as well ask how a "spirit" can possess feet? – It is not really the "spirit"
which is provided with limbs, but the "ethereal double" to which he is still attached.
For Tibetans, like Egyptians, believe in the "double."
During life, in a normal state, this "double" is closely united with the material body.
Nevertheless, certain circumstances may cause their separation. The "double" can,
then, leave the material body and show itself in different places; or being itself invis-
ible, it can accomplish various peregrinations. With some people this separation of
the "double" from the body happens involuntarily, but Tibetans say that those who
have trained themselves for the purpose can effect it at will.
The separation, however, is not complete, for a strand subsists, connecting the two
forms. The link persists during a certain length of time after death. The destruction
of the corpse generally, but not necessarily, brings about the destruction of the
"double" in the end. In certain cases, it may survive its companion.
In Tibet, one meets people who have been in a state of lethargy, and are able to
describe the various places in which, they say, they have travelled. Some have only
visited countries inhabited by men, while others can tell of their peregrinations in the
paradises, the purgatories or in the bardo, an intermediary region where "spirits"
wander after death, while waiting to be reincarnated.24
These curious travellers are called delogs, which means: "one who has returned
from the beyond.” Though the delogs vary in their descriptions of places and events,
they usually agree in depicting the feelings of the pseudo-dead as definitely pleas-
ant.
A woman whom I met in a village of Tsarong had some years ago, remained inani-
mate for a whole week. She said she had been agreeably astonished by the light-
ness and agility of her new body and the extraordinary rapidity of its movements.
She had only to wish herself in a certain place to be there immediately; she could
cross rivers, walking upon the waters, or pass through walls. There was only one
thing she found impossible – to cut an almost impalpable cord that attached her
ethereal being to the material body which she could see perfectly well sleeping
upon her couch. This cord lengthened out indefinitely but, nevertheless, it some-
times hampered her movements. She would "get caught up in it," she said.
23.mediums
24.The existence of such a region is denied by orthodox Buddhists.
•
•
20
•

•••

A male delog, whom my son had met in his youth, gave a similar description of his
state.
Evidently, the delog is not really a dead man, so that nothing can prove that the sen-
sations he experiences in his lethargy are the same as those felt by the dead. Tibet-
ans, however, do not seem to be troubled by this distinction.
When the dying man has taken his last breath, he is dressed by putting his clothes
on backwards-the front of the gown fastened on his back. Then he is tied up with his
legs crossed, or his knees bent and touching his breast. In the villages, the body,
dressed in this way, Is usually placed in a cauldron. As soon as the corpse has been
taken out for its journey to the cemetery, this cauldron is hastily washed, and soup
or tea is often prepared in it for the funeral guests who do not seem troubled by fear
of infection from the corpse.
In Tibet, funeral ceremonies occupy many days, and though the high altitude of the
central and northern provinces retards decomposition, in the hot and damp valleys,
corpses kept for a week, or longer spread a putrid odour.
This does not in the least affect the appetite of the officiating trapas, who continue to
advise the dead, signalling the roads he should follow and those he should avoid in
the next world. They take their meals facing the departed one. One may even say
they eat with him, for the chief monk invites him by names as follows: "Spirit, come
here, immediately, and feed yourself."
In the wooded regions of Tibet, the bodies are burned. The inhabitants of the vast
barren northern and central regions, where cowdung is the only fuel available,
abandon the corpses to the beasts of prey, either in cemeteries reserved near the
villages, or anywhere on the mountain solitudes.
The bodies of high religious dignitaries are sometimes preserved by the double pro-
cess of salting and cooking in butter.
These mummies are called mardong. Swathed in clothes, their faces painted with
gold, they are placed in mausoleums of massive silver, studded with precious
stones. A pane of glass is sometimes fitted in these cases, on a level with the head,
so that the gilded face can be seen. Other Grand Lamas are incinerated with butter
and their bones preserved in rich caskets.
All funeral monuments, in Tibet, take the form of chorten, which are imitations of the
stûpas which the ancient Buddhists of India built over their holy dead, or other pre-
cious relics.
In obedience to Buddhist beliefs in the excellence of charitable deeds, Lamaists
find, in the funerals, a fitting occasion for a supreme act of charity. The dead man
wished – or is supposed to have wished – that his body should serve as his last gift,
to nourish those tormented by hunger.
A work entitled: “A guide for the ‘spirit’ of the dead in the next world”,25 expounds the
subject as follows:
1.   The body is transported to the top of a mountain. It is dismembered, the four
limbs being cut off with a well-sharpened knife. The entrails, the heart, the
25.Tse hdas kyi rnamshes thog grang.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  21
•••

lungs are laid out on the ground. The birds, wolves and foxes feed themselves
upon them.
2.    The body is thrown into a sacred river. The blood and the humours are
dissolved in the blue water. The fish and the otters eat the flesh and the fat.
3.    The body is burned. Flesh, bones and skin are reduced to a heap of cinders.
The Tisas26 are nourished by the odour.
4.    The body is hidden in the earth. Flesh, bones and skin are sucked by worms.
Families who can afford to pay the officiating monks, have the religious service
repeated every day, for six weeks following the funerals. After this, an effigy is made
with a light frame of sticks, supporting clothes that belonged to the deceased. A
sheet of paper represents the face. The portrait of the dead person is sometimes
sketched upon it; more often a printed paper sheet is bought, ready made, in a mon-
astery. There are two models: one being the picture of a man, the other that of a
woman. The name of the departed is written under the drawn portrait or the printed
picture.
There is one more, final, religious ceremony, at the close of which the officiating
lama burns the paper sheet, or face of the dead person. The clothes in which the
effigy was dressed are given to the lama as part of his fee.
After this symbolic incineration, the ties which might still have attached the
deceased to this world are considered to be definitely severed.
Tibetans keenly desire avoiding any intercourse with the dead. Peasants use espe-
cially precise words to get rid of them. Just before the corpse is carried out of the
house, a meal is served to him and an aged member of the family harangues him, in
these words:
"So-and-so, listen. You are dead, be sure of that. You have nothing more to do
here. Eat copiously for the last time. You have a long road to run and several
mountain passes to cross. Take strength and do not return again."
I heard an even stranger discourse.
After having duly told the dead man that he no longer belonged to this world and
bidding him never to reappear, the orator added:
"Pagdzin. I must tell you that your house has been destroyed by fire, everything
you possessed is burned. Because of a debt you had forgotten, your creditor
has taken your two sons away as slaves. Your wife has left with a new husband.
As it would sadden you to see all this misery, be careful not to return."
I listened in astonishment to this extraordinary list of calamities.
"How did this series of misfortunes happen?" I asked an assistant.
"Nothing at all has happened," he answered, smiling maliciously. "The farm and
the cattle are intact and the widow is sitting quietly at home with the sons. We
invented that tale to disgust Pagdzin so that he will not think of returning to his
home."
26.The Tisas are demi-gods who feed upon odours; but while some of them nourish themselves with sweet
fragrances, others prefer odours which are offensive to us, such as that of burnt flesh.
•
•
22
•

•••

This seemed rather a naïve stratagem for people who credit the "spirit" with the fac-
ulty of seeing what is going on in our world.
In liturgical terms far more solemn than those employed by the villagers, the lama
also advises the departed one to follow his road without looking backward. But this
counsel is for his own good, while the common people only think of avoiding the
occult presence of a ghost which they consider dangerous.
During the celebration of these various ceremonies, the "spirit" travels through the
Bardo.
He beholds, in turn, radiant beautiful beings and hideous forms. He sees diversely
coloured paths and a crowd of strange visions. These apparitions frighten him, he is
bewildered and wanders at random among them.
If he is able to hear and to follow the advices of the officiating lama, he can take a
road that will lead him to be reborn among the gods, or in some other pleasant con-
dition-just as the initiate may, who has entered consciously into the Bardo after a
careful study of its "map."
But men who have not learned anything about the Bardo, and who enter it while
absorbed in their regret at leaving the material world, can hardly profit by the coun-
sels given to them.
So they miss the opportunity of escaping the mathematically rigid consequences of
their actions. The roads to celestial happiness are behind them. The wombs of
human and of animal beings are offered them and, deceived by their hallucinations,
they fancy these to be pleasant grottoes or palaces.
Thinking they will find an agreeable resting-place, they enter one or another of them
and thus determine for themselves the conditions of their rebirth. This one will
become a dog, while another will be the son of distinguished human parents.
According to other beliefs, the great mass of people who have not obtained post-
mortem spiritual illumination, by seizing the meaning of the vision which arose
before them immediately after death, travel like a frightened flock of sheep through
the phantasmagoria of Bardo, until they reach the court of Shinje, the Judge of the
Dead.
Shinje examines their past actions in a mirror or weighs them under the form of
white and black pebbles. According to the predominance of good or of evil deeds,
he determines the species of beings among whom the "spirit" will be reborn and the
particular conditions that shall accompany this rebirth, such as physical beauty or
ugliness, intellectual gifts, social standing of the parents, etc.
There is no question of "skilfulness" in saving oneself here, for the judge is impartial
and inflexible.
In fact, even at the time when "skilfulness" may be helpful, it only acts within the limit
permitted by the power of past actions. I have already mentioned this limitation and
will, now, give an amusing illustration of it which is characteristic of Tibetan humour.
A Grand Lama had passed his whole life in idleness. Although he had been given
excellent tutors in his youth, had inherited from his predecessors an important
library and had, moreover, always been surrounded by men of learning, still, he
scarcely knew how to read. This lama died.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  23
•••

In these times there lived a strange man, a miracle-worker and rough-speaking phi-
losopher, whose eccentricities – sometimes coarse – often exaggerated by his
biographers, have given birth to a number of stories in the style of Rabelais, much
appreciated in Tibet.
Dugpa Kunlegs, for such was his name, travelled under the guise of a vagabond.
Having arrived at the bank of a brook, he saw a girl who had come there to draw
water.
Suddenly he attacked her, and without saying a word he tried to violate her.
The lass was robust and Dugpa Kunlegs was approaching old age. She defended
herself so vigorously that she escaped him, and, running back to the village, told her
mother what had happened.
The good woman was most astonished. The men of the country were well behaved,
none of them could be suspected. The brute must be a stranger. She made her
daughter minutely describe the wicked wretch.
While listening to the girl, the mother wondered. The description of the man corre-
sponded, in all points, to that of Dugpa Kunlegs, this eccentric and saintly lama
whom she had met during a pilgrimage. There was no doubt possible. Dugpa Kun-
legs, himself, had wished to abuse her daughter.
She began to reflect on the strange behaviour of the holy one. The common moral
principles which rule the conduct of ordinary men do not apply to men of supernor-
mal wisdom-she thought. A doubtob27 is not bound to follow any law. His actions
are dictated by superior considerations which escape the vulgar observer. (...)
So she said to her daughter:
"The man you have seen is the great Dugpa Kunlegs. Whatever he does is well
done. Therefore, return to the brook, prostrate yourself at his feet and consent to
anything he wishes."
The girl went back and found the doubtob seated upon a stone, absorbed in his
thoughts. She bowed down before him, excused herself for having resisted him
when she had not known who he was, and declared that she was entirely at his ser-
vice.
The saint shrugged his shoulders.
"My child," he said, "women awake no desire in me. However, the Grand Lama
of the neighbouring monastery has died in ignorance, having neglected all
occasions of instruction. I saw his 'spirit' wandering in the Bardo, drawn towards
a bad rebirth, and, out of compassion, I wished to procure him a human body
But the power of his evil deeds has not permitted this You escaped, and while
you were at the village, the asses in that field near by, coupled. The Grand Lama
will soon be reborn as a donkey."
The majority of the dead men heed the desire of their families, as expressed during
the funeral, and do not return. The latter conclude that their fate, in the next world,
has been definitely settled and, probably, to their satisfaction.
27.A sage and wonder-worker.
•
•
24
•

•••

However, some departed ones are less discreet. They frequently appear in dreams
to their relatives or their friends and strange things happen in their former dwellings.
Tibetans believe that this shows the "spirit" to be unhappy and calling for help.
There are lama diviners who can be consulted in such cases. Thev order the rites to
be celebrated, the gifts to be bestowed upon the clergy, and holy books to be read,
to comfort the unhappy "spirit."
Nevertheless, many people, especially in those remote regions near the frontiers,
fall back on the practices of the ancient Böns28 for such cases. They think that the
dead man, himself, should be listened to. So a medium, male or female29, is sum-
moned to lend his voice to the departed one.
Spiritualistic seances in Tibet, do not resemble those of the Western countries. Nei-
ther darkness nor silence are required, sometimes they are held in the open air.
The pawo begins chanting, accompanying himself with a little drum and a bell. He
dances, first slowly, then faster and faster, and, finally, trembles convulsively. A
being of another world, god, demon or spirit of a dead person, has taken posses-
sion of him.
In a kind of frenzy, he utters broken sentences, which are supposed to convey that
which the invisible being wishes to communicate to the assistants.
Since it is of the first importance to know exactly who is speaking through the
medium, and what he is saying, the most intelligent men of the village are called
upon to listen attentively.
It sometimes happens that different gods or spirits take possession of the medium
one after another. Once in a while, the latter, under the impulsion given to him by
one of these beings, will suddenly attack one of the public and beat him mercilessly.
This correction is always accepted without any resistance being offered. Tibetans
imagine that it is meant to drive out a demon that has lodged himself in the man
without his being aware of it. This undesirable guest has, however, been discovered
by the spirit animating the medium.
The departed ones who suffer in the next world usually limit their performances to
giving an account of their misfortunes.
At a seance, where I was a spectator, I heard one say:
"I met a demon upon my road who dragged me into his dwelling. He made a
slave of me. He forces me to work hard, without stopping, and ill-treats me. Have
pity on me! Set me free so that I may reach the ' Paradise of the Great Bliss.'"
The mother of the man who was supposed to be speaking, as well as his wife and
children, wept bitter tears.
Families who receive supplications of this kind, think of nothing but how to liberate
the unfortunate captive.
It is a complicated affair.
First, one must get into communication with the demon and negotiate the ransom of
his prisoner.
28.The shamanist aborigines.
29.pawo or pamo
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  25
•••

The chosen intermediary is often a Bön sorcerer. He informs the relatives of the
unhappy "spirit" that his demoniacal master demands the sacrifice of a pig or a cow,
before setting him free.
Having offered the victim, the Bön enters into a trance. His "double" is supposed to
visit the dwelling-place of the demon.
He travels; the way is long and hard, full of obstacles This, the sorcerer indicates by
his contortions. But unlike the pawo he remains seated, moving only his head and
his bust. A flow of hurried words are uttered telling the various incidents of his
adventure.
He is even more difficult to understand than the pawo. The cleverest listeners find it
hard to make out the sense of his words.
The Bön has accomplished his task; now he has seized the "spirit" and prepares to
take him away. The demon has received the ransom demanded, but he usually
breaks faith and tries to hold on to his slave The sorcerer fights him, one can see
him struggling and panting, one can hear his screams.
The family and friends of the dead men follow the phases of the drama with the
greatest anxiety. They are overjoyed when the sorcerer declares that he has been
successful, and has led the "spirit" to an agreeable place.
But the first attempt does not always succeed. I have witnessed several perfor-
mances where the sorcerer, after having simulated extraordinary efforts, declared
that the "spirit" had been taken away from him by the demon. In this case, all rites,
sacrifices (...) and the payment of the Bön's fees, must begin all over again.
When a lama is called upon to save a "spirit" from slavery, no sacrifice is performed
for redemption and the rites that are celebrated ignore all negotiation. The lama,
who is learned in the magic ritual, considers himself powerful enough to compel the
demon to release his victim.
Under the influence of Buddhism, the inhabitants of Tibet proper have given up sac-
rificing animals. This is far from being true of Tibetans living in the Himalayas who
have only a thin coating of Lamaism and have remained practically Shamanists.
The beliefs of the learned lamas and of contemplative mystics differ greatly from
those held by the masses about the fate of the "spirit" in the next world.
To begin with, they consider all the incidents of the journey in the Bardo as purely
subjective visions. The nature of these visions depends on the ideas the man has
held when he was living. The various paradises, the hells and the Judge of the Dead
appear to those who have believed in them.
A gomchen of Eastern Tibet told me the following story upon this subject.
A painter whose principal work was that of decorating temples, often painted the
fantastic beings with human bodies and animal heads, who are supposed to be the
attendants of Shinje. His son, who was still a very young child, often stayed beside
him while he worked and amused himself looking at the monstrous forms appearing
in the frescoes.
Now it happened that the boy died, and entering the Bardo, met the terrible beings
whose images were familiar to him. Far from being frightened, he began to laugh.
•
•
26
•

•••

– "Oh! I know you all," he said. "My father makes you on the walls." And he
wished to play with them.
I once asked the lama of Enche what would be the post-mortem subjective visions
of a materialist who had looked upon death as total annihilation.
"Perhaps," said the lama, "such man would see apparitions corresponding to
the religious beliefs he held in his childhood, or to those, familiar to him, held by
the people among whom he has lived. According to the degree of his
intelligence and his post-mortem lucidity, he would, perhaps, examine and
analyse these visions and remember the reasons which, during his life-time,
made him deny the reality of that which now appears to him. He might, thus,
conclude that he is beholding a mirage.
"A less intelligent man in whom belief in total annihilation was the result of
indifference or dullness, rather than of reasoning, will, perhaps, see no vision at
all. However, this will not prevent the energy generated by his past actions from
following its course and manifesting itself through new phenomena. In other
words, it will not prevent the rebirth of the materialist."
My many copy-books filled with notes, showed that I had worked a great deal since
I had come to Sikkim. I thought I might allow myself a holiday. Summer was
approaching, the warmer temperature tempted me to undertake a trip in the north of
the country.
The road I chose was an excellent mule track leading from Gangtok to Kampa-
dzong and on to Shigatze in Tibet. Rising gradually from the travellers' bungalow of
Dikchu buried in the tropical jungle, on the bank of the Tista, it follows a tributary of
this river up to its source, passing through enchanting landscapes.
At about 50 miles from Gangtok, and at a height of 8,000 feet, this road crosses a
village called Lachen which occupies a prominent place in my experiences of
Lamaist mysticism.
This little group of cottages is the most northern in Sikkim, the last which the travel-
ler meets on his way towards the high passes of the Tibetan border. It is inhabited
by sturdy hillmen, who combine a little farming, in the valley, with the rearing of
yaks30 higher up on the Tibetan tableland, where they spend a part of the year
under tents.
Perched on a mountain slope, a humble monastery dominates the villagers' dwell-
ings.
I visited it the day after my arrival, but finding nothing of interest in the temple, I was
about to leave when a shadow darkened the luminous space of the wide-open door:
a lama stood on the threshold. I say "a lama," but the man did not wear the regular
monastic garb, neither was he dressed as a layman. His costume consisted of a
white skirt down to his feet a garnet-coloured waistcoat, Chinese in shape, and
through the wide armholes, the voluminous sleeves of a yellow shirt were seen. A
rosary made of some grey substance and coral beads hung around his neck, his
pierced ears were adorned with large gold rings studded with turquoises and his
long, thick, braided hair touched his heels.31
30.Yak, the hairy Tibetan ox.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  27
•••

This strange person looked at me without speaking, and as at that time I knew but
little of the Tibetan language, I did not dare to begin a conversation. I only saluted
him and went out.
A young man, my general factotum, was waiting for me on the terrace of the monas-
tery. As soon as he saw the lama descending the steps of the peristyle, behind me,
he prostrated himself thrice at his feet, asking for his blessing.
This astonished me, for the lad was not usually lavish with such signs of respect,
and honoured none, in this way, but the prince Tulku and Bermiag Kushog.
"Who is this lama?" I asked him as I returned to the travellers' bungalow.
"He is a great gomchen," the boy replied.
"One of his monks told me, while you were in the temple. He has spent years
alone, in a cave high up in the mountains. Demons obey him and he works
miracles. They say he can kill men at a distance and fly through the air."
What an extraordinary man! I thought.
My curiosity had been greatly excited by the stories regarding Tibetan gomchens I
had read with Dawasandup. I had also heard a great deal from the prince Tulku and
from various lamas, about the way of living of the Tibetan hermits, the curious doc-
trines they profess and the wonders they can perform.
Now I had, most unexpectedly, come across one of them. This was a lucky opportu-
nity. But how could I talk with the lama?
My boy was utterly ignorant of Tibetan philosophical terms, he would never be able
to translate my questions.
I was annoyed and excited. I slept badly, troubled by incoherent dreams. I saw
myself surrounded by elephants who pointed at me musical trunks from which
came out deep sounds like those of long Teban trumpets. This strange concert
woke me. My room was plunged in darkness. I no longer saw the elephants but I
continued to hear the music.
After listening attentively, I recognized religious tunes. The trapas were playing on
the terrace of the temple. Who were they serenading in the night? (...)
Whatever might come of it, I wished to risk an interview with the gomchen. I sent a
request that he would see me and the next day, accompanied by my boy, I returned
to the monastery.
A primitive staircase led to the lama's apartment situated above the assembly hall.
In front of the entrance door was a small loggia decorated with frescoes. While wait-
ing to be invited in, I examined these with some amusement.
On the walls, an artist, endowed with more imagination than professional skill, had
represented the torments of the purgatories, peopling the latter with a host of
demons and victims who grinned and writhed in the most comical attitudes.
In the middle of a panel, lust was undergoing punishment. A naked man, abnor-
mally thin, faced an unclothed woman. Her huge, disproportionate belly gave to this
31.Later on, I learned that this is the costume of the anchorites who are proficient in tumo See “Psychic
Sports” on page 122. and various other branches of the secret lore. The rosary is made of 108 small round
pieces of bone, each one cut out from a different human skull.
•
•
28
•

•••

"belle" the appearance of an Easter egg mounted on two feet and topped with a doll
head. The lecherous sinner, incorrigible slave of his passions, forgetting where he
was and how he had been led there, hugged the infernal creature in his arms, while
flames springing out from her mouth and from a secret recess scorched him.
At a small distance from this couple, a sinful woman suffered her chastisement.
Bound, in a reversed posture, to a triangle pointing downward, she was compelled
to accept the caresses inflicted upon her by a green devil with teeth like a saw and a
monkey's tail. In the background, other demons, variously coloured, were seen run-
ning forward to take their turn.
The gomchen lived in a kind of dark chapel, lighted only at one end by a small win-
dow, the ceiling supported by wooden pillars painted red. According to the Tibetan
custom the altar served as book-case.
In a niche, among the books, stood a small image of Padmasambhâva, with ritual
offerings placed before it: seven bowls filled with pure water, grain and a lamp.
Incense sticks burning on a small table mingled their mystic fragrance with odours
of tea and melted butter. The cushions and rugs piled up for the master to sit upon
were threadbare and faded, and the tiny gold star of the altar lamp shining at the
back of the room showed up its dust and emptiness.
Through my boy acting as interpreter, I tried to ask several questions on subjects I
had discussed with the lamas I had met at Gangtok, but it was useless. If only
Dawasandup had been with me. The young man was dumbfounded and unable to
find words to express ideas whose meaning he could not grasp.
I gave it up, and for a long time the lama and I sat facing each other in silence.
The next day I left Lachen, continuing my journey towards the north.
Here the scenery, which all along the track lower down had been charming, became
simply marvellous. The azalea and rhododendron thickets were still decked with
their bright spring garment.
A shimmering torrent of blossoms submerged the valley and seemed to be pouring
out, on the neighbouring slopes, a resistless flood of purple, yellow, red and pure
white waves. Seen from a distance, my porters, whose heads only emerged from
the bushes, seemed to be swimming in a sea of flowers.
A few miles farther, the fairy-like gardens gradually grew thin and scattered, till a few
rosy patches only remained, here and there, where dwarf bunches of azaleas strug-
gled obstinately for life against the dizzy heights.
The track now entered the fantastic region near the frontier passes.32
In the intense silence of these wild majestic solitudes, icy, crystalline, purling brooks
chatted gently. From the shore of a melancholy lake, a golden-crowned bird sol-
emnly watched my caravan as it passed.
Up and up we went, skirting gigantic glaciers, catching occasional glimpses of
crossing valleys filled by huge clouds. And then, without any transition, as we
issued from the mists the Tibetan tableland appeared before us, immense, void and
resplendent under the luminous sky of Central Asia.
32.The Koru-la and the Sepo-la, both above 15,000 feet.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  29
•••

Since then I have travelled across the country lying behind the distant mountain
ranges which, at that moment, bound my horizon. I have seen Lhasa, Shigatze, the
northern grassy solitudes with their salt lakes as large as seas; Kham, the country
of brigand-knights and magicians; the unexplored forests of Po and the enchanting
valleys of Tsarong where the pomegranates ripen, but nothing has ever dimmed, in
my mind, the memory of my first sight of Tibet.
A few weeks later the weather changed, the snow began to fall again. My provisions
were on the verge of giving out, porters and servants grew irritable and quarrel-
some. One day I had to use my riding-whip to separate two men who were fighting
with knives for a place near the camp fire.
After a few short excursions into Tibetan territory I left the frontier. I was not
equipped for a long journey and, moreover, the land that lay in front of me was for-
bidden ground.
Again I crossed Lachen, saw the gomchen and talked with him about his hermitage
that was a day's march distant, higher up in the mountains. He had lived there for
seventeen years. These plain details my boy could easily translate and I myself
could follow a certain amount of his conversation.
However, I did not risk mentioning the demons, said by popular opinion to be his
servants. I knew my young interpreter was too superstitious to dare to approach this
subject and, probably, also the lama would not have answered such inquiries.
I returned to Gangtok, sad at having missed the opportunity of learning things of
real interest regarding the mystery world of Tibetan anchorites, which I had skirted
by chance. I did not, in the least, foresee the curious consequences of my trip.
A little while after this, the Dalai Lama left Kalimpong. His army had beaten the Chi-
nese and he was to go back to Lhasa in triumph. I went to bid him farewell at a ham-
let situated below the Jelap pass.
I arrived ahead of him at the bungalow where he was to stop. There I found many
noblemen of the Sikkimeese court in great distress. They were in charge of the
preparations for the short stay of the Lamaking, but, as is usual in the East, every-
thing had come too late. Furniture, rugs, hangings were not in place and the distin-
guished guest might appear at any minute.
Everything was in confusion in the small house, with masters and servants wildly
rushing about. It amused me to lend a helping hand and arrange the cushions that
would serve the Dalai Lama for a bed. Some of the assistants assured me that this
would bring me good luck, now and in lives to come.
Here I had another opportunity of talking with the Tibetan sovereign. His thoughts
seemed entirely directed towards political affairs.
As usual he blessed the devotees with his duster made of ribbons, but one felt that
his mind had already crossed the mountain pass that marks the frontier and was
busy organizing the profits of his victory.
The following autumn I left Sikkim for Nepal and, later on, spent nearly a year in
Benares. I had made a long stay there in my youth, and returned with pleasure.
I gratefully accepted the kind offer of the members of the Theosophical Society to
rent me a small apartment in their beautiful park. The ascetic simplicity of this lodg-
•
•
30
•

•••

ing was in harmonious keeping with the atmosphere of the holy city of Shiva and
quite suited my taste.
In these congenial surroundings, I assiduously resumed the study of the Vedanta
philosophy, somewhat forsaking Lamaism which I did not seem to be able to investi-
gate more thoroughly than I had already done.
I had no thought of leaving Benares, when an unexpected combination of circum-
stances led me one morning to take a train going towards the Himalayas.
; ; ;
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  31
•••

Chapter II: A Guest of the Lamas
At Gangtok I again met Bermiag Kushog. The Lama of Enche had left for Shigatze,
in Tibet, and only returned some months later. Dawasandup had been called upon,
as interpreter, to follow the Sino-Tibetan political conference that was convoked in
India. The maharajah having died, his son Sidkeong Tulku succeeded him and, con-
sequently, had less time to devote to religious studies. Unexpected obstacles pre-
vented me from completing the journey which I had planned. Everything worked
against my desires.
Gradually hostile forces seemed to gather around me. I seemed to be obsessed by
invisible beings who incited me to leave the country, insinuating that I should be able
to advance no farther, either in my study of Lamaism or upon the actual soil of Tibet.
By a sort of clairvoyance at the same time, I saw these unknown enemies trium-
phant and rejoicing, after my departure, at having driven me away.
I attributed these phenomena to fever or neurasthenia due to brain fatigue and the
annoyance at my plans being upset.
Some people would, perhaps, have seen in this the effect of occult activities. What-
ever it was, I could not overcome this painful state bordering on hallucination. Calm-
ing drugs did not relieve me, I thought that a change of scene might be more
efficacious.
While I was racking my brain to think of a place where I might stop without leaving
the Himalayas, the new maharajah, the lama Tulku, without guessing that he was
more than realizing my desires, offered me an apartment in the monastery of
Podang, about 10 miles away from Gangtok, in the misty forests.
The apartment consisted of an immense room on the first floor of the temple and a
huge kitchen where, according to Tibetan custom, my servants were to sleep.
Two large bay-windows let in all the light of the sky, and with equal hospitality they
admitted wind, rain or hail through large gaps on both sides, for the framework was
too narrow and only joined the walls at the top.
In one corner of this hall I placed my books upon a wide wainscot. I opened my fold-
ing table and chair, and this was my "work room." In another corner I hooked my tent
to the beams and set up my camp bed. This was my bedroom. The middle of the
apartment, too well aired by cross ventilation, became a kind of reception-room for
my visitors, when the weather was fine.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  32
•••

The religious music which I heard at Podang twice a day, before dawn and at sun-
set, enchanted me. The small orchestra consisted of two gyalings,33 two rag-
dongs34 and two kettle-drums.
A bell striking a special rhythm, peculiar to Eastern temples, was sounded as pre-
lude. After a few moments' silence the deep-toned ragdongs rumbled for a while,
then the gyalings by themselves sang a slow musical phrase supremely moving in
its simplicity. They repeated it with variations, supported by the bass notes of the
ragdongs in which finally joined the kettledrums that imitated the thunder rolling in
the distance.
The melody flowed as smoothly as the water of a deep river, without interruption,
emphasis or passion. It produced a strange, acute impression of distress, as if all
the suffering of the beings wandering from world to world, since the beginning of the
ages, was breathed out in this weary, desperate lamentation.
What musician, inspired without his knowing, had found this leit motiv of universal
sorrow? And how, with this heterogeneous orchestra, could men devoid of any
artistic sense render it with such heart-rending fervour? – This remained a mystery
which the musician monks would have been unable to explain. I had to be content to
listen to them, while watching the dawn come up behind the mountains, or in the
darkening of the sunset sky.
Beside attending the daily services, I had the opportunity during my stay at Podang
to witness the annual Ceremony of the Demons. In Tibet, later on, I saw the same
rites celebrated with much greater display of clerical paraphernalia, but, to my mind,
this diminished the picturesque character which they assumed when performed in
the shadow of the Himalayan forests.
Sorcery loses much of its prestige when seen by broad daylight and in a crowd.
First, the trapas took Mahäkala out of the cabinet in which he had been shut up a full
year, with offerings and charms.
In every lamaist monastery there exists a temple, or a room reserved as a dwelling-
place for the ancient deities of the aborigines or those imported from India. The lat-
ter have considerably lost rank in entering the Land of Snows. Unconscious of their
irreverence Tibetans have turned them into mere demons and sometimes treat
them harshly.
Mahäkala is the most famous among the exiled Hindu deities. His original personal-
ity is a form of Shiva in his function of Destroyer of the World. Having become a
harmful spirit, he is held in slavery by the lamas who compel him to render them var-
ious kinds of services and do not hesitate to punish his lack of zeal.
A popular tradition has it that a celebrated lama head of the Karmapa sect, attached
Mahäkala to him as attendant. When this lama was at the Chinese court, he
offended the Emperor, who had him tied to the tail of a horse. Dragged behind the
animal, and in peril of death, the great Karmapa called on Mahäkala to help him.
But the latter did not immediately appear.
33.A kind of hautboy
34.A huge Teban trumpet
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  33
•••

When the lama had freed himself by means of magic words which separated his
beard from his chin, he saw Mahäkala coming toward him too late to be of any use,
and in his anger he hit the poor devil such a blow that though several centuries have
now passed his cheek remains swollen even to-day.
Of course, the trapas of Podang were not powerful enough to take such liberties,
Mahäkala inspired them with real terror.
Here, as in some other monasteries, grim wonders were said to happen. Some-
times blood sweated through the boards of the shrine where Mahäkala was shut up,
and at other times, on opening it, the remains of a human heart or brain were found.
These signs – according to the trapas – betoken the occult activity of the terrible
deity.
When the mask which represents Mahäkala – and in which he is supposed to reside
– was taken out of the shrine, it was placed in a dark chapel reserved for other kin-
dred malevolent deities. Two novices watched it, repeating without interruption the
magic words which prevent him from escaping. Lulled by their monotonous chant,
the boys fought with all their might against sleep during the long hours of the night,
convinced that if they stopped for an instant repeating the mysterious formula their
dreadful captive would take advantage of it to free himself and they would become
his first victims.
In the neighbouring hamlets, the peasants were greatly perturbed by the slight sem-
blance of liberty given to Mahäkala. They locked their door early in the evening and
mothers bid their children not to stay out after sunset.
Less important demons supposed to be wandering around the country, seeking to
do harm, were attracted by the incantations of the lamas and compelled to enter a
sort of cage woven of light wood and coloured threads. Then this pretty house was
solemnly carried out of the monastery and precipitated, with its prisoners, into a
flaming brazier.
But the demons are immortals – fortunately for the sorcerers whose living depends
upon them. Next year the same rites must be performed all over again.
A learned lama belonging to a wealthy family of Sikkim had just returned from Tibet.
He became head of the monastery of Rhumteck in succession to his brother who
had died recently. Custom demanded that he should celebrate certain rites meant
to assure the welfare of the dead in the next world, at Podane the chief monastery of
his sect in Sikkim.
The late head lama was an old acquaintance of mine. I had met him at Kalimpong
where he had come in the train of the heir prince to pay a visit to the Dalai Lama.
He was a jolly fellow, a veritable "bon vivant"; who did not worry himself with philo-
sophic problems, kept two wives at home, and appreciated old brandy to the extent
of drinking several bottles a day. In possession of a large income, he would buy any-
thing he fancied right and left although ignorant of its use. It is in this way that, one
day, the big powerfully built head lama came to see me wearing the hat, trimmed
with pink ribbons, of a three-years-old girl.
The new abbot, popularly called "the gentleman from Tibet" – Böd Kushog –
because he usually lived in this country, was quite different from his brother. He had
spent his youth studying in various Tibetan monasteries, and even in Lhasa he
•
•
34
•

•••

enjoyed the reputation among erudite lamas of being a distinguished grammarian.
He had also taken high Orders and remained a celibate, which is rare among the
Himalayan clergy.
The funeral services over which he presided lasted for a whole week. Happy days
for the trapas of Podang, who feasted and received gifts!
These ceremonies being ended, in the first month of the year35
Pöd Kushog proceeded to the annual blessing of the monastery. Escorted by a
choir of trapas chanting a litany of good wishes, he walked round the buildings and
through the corridors, throwing consecrated grain into each room as he passed by.
A few handfuls of barley, cast with a gracious smile and the liturgic wish tashi
shog!36 rattled against my "tent-bedroom" and sprinkled the table and the books in
my "study."
Prosperity! prosperity! (...) Duly exorcised and blessed, the monastery should
become a branch of the Paradise of the Great Bliss.37 Yet the monks did not feel
quite safe. Secretly doubting their occult powers and even those of the learned
grammarian they feared that a few devils might have escaped extermination and be
waiting in hiding to begin doing mischief again. They begged the help of one whom
they trusted more.
One evening, the gomchen of Lachen appeared with all the trapping of a magician:
a five-sided crown, a rosary-necklace made of one hundred and eight round pieces,
cut out of so many skulls, an apron of human bones bored and carved, and in his
belt the ritualistic dagger.38
Standing in the open, near a flaming fire, he drew magic signs in the air with his
sceptre-dorje and stabbed the air as he recited incantations in a low voice.
I do not know which invisible demons he was fighting, but in the fantastic light of the
leaping flames, he certainly looked like a demon himself.
My remedy had proved efficacious: whether change of place had killed the
microbes of fever, or the diversion of new scenes had cured the brain fatigue, or my
unyielding will-power had conquered conscious beings of the occult world, I, at any
rate, was freed from the obsession that had tortured me.
Yet a strange thing happened during my stay at Podang.
Sidkeong Tulku having become maharajah, wished to make his subjects renounce
their superstitions in favour of orthodox Buddhism. For this purpose, he had invited
an Indian monk, who belonged to the Theravadin philosophic school, to preach in
his country. The missionary had to fight against such anti-buddhistic customs as
sorcery, the cult of spirits and the habit of drinking fermented drinks. This monk, Kali
Kumar by name, was already at work.
The maharajah-lama, as abbot of Podang, had an apartment in the monastery
where he stayed on the rare occasions when he officiated at the head of his monks.
He came for two days, during my stay in the gompa.
35.Losar – the Tibetan New year begins in February
36.May prosperity be
37.Nub Dewachen
38.Phurba
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  35
•••

We were taking tea together, late in the afternoon, and talking of Kali Kumar's mis-
sion and the way in which he might hope to free the hillmen from their inveterate
superstitions.
"It is impossible." I said, "to know exactly what the historical Padmasambhâva,
who preached in Tibet centuries ago, was like.
But it is certain that his followers have made him the hero of legends that encourage
drunkenness and absurd, pernicious practices. Under his name, they worship an
evil spirit – even as you do," I added laughingly, pointing out an image of the great
magician standing at the far end of the room with an altar lamp burning at its feet.
"It is necessary," I continued, when, suddenly, I could say no more. A third
invisible presence had interrupted me. Yet no one had spoken, there was
complete silence in the room, but I keenly felt the influence of some occult force.
"Nothing you can do will succeed," said a soundless voice. "The people of this
country are mine (...) I am more powerful than you. (...)"
I listened in amazement to these silent words, and I had almost decided that they
were only the expression of my own doubts regarding the success of the proposed
reforms, when the maharajah replied.
He replied to that which I had not said, arguing with the invisible adversary of his
plans.
"Why should I not succeed," he went on to say. "Possibly it will take some time to
change the ideas of the peasants and the lower clergy. The demons which they
feed will not easily become resigned to die of hunger, but, nevertheless, I shall
get the better of them."
He was mockingly alluding to the animal sacrifices offered to the evil spirits-by the
sorcerers.
"But I have not said – "I began and stopped short, for I thought that, in spite of
the brave declaration of war the prince had made on the demons, he was not
entirely free from superstition and consequently it was better not to tell him what
had happened.
However, I do not wish to leave the reader with this impression of Sidkeong Tulku.
He had probably liberated himself from superstition more fully than I supposed.
According to his horoscope, in which Tibetans place complete faith, the year of his
death was noted as dangerous for him.
To counteract hostile influences, several lamas – among whom was the gomchen of
Lachen – offered to celebrate the rites prescribed for the purpose.
He thanked them and refused their ministry, saying that if he must die, he felt capa-
ble of passing into another life without their ceremonies.
I think he must have left the reputation of being an impious man. As soon as he was
dead, all innovations and religious reforms that he had started were abolished.
Preaching was stopped and beer was supplied in the temples again. A lama
informed the country clergy that they should return to their former habits.
The invisible adversary triumphed as he had predicted he would.
•
•
36
•

•••

Although my headquarters were at Podang, I had not entirely given up my excur-
sions across Sikkim. Thus it happened that I met two gomchens from Eastern Tibet
who had recently come to live in the Himalayas.
One of them dwelt in Sakyong, and for this reason he was called Sakyong gom-
chen. It is not considered polite, in Tibet, to address a person by his name. All who
are not treated as one's inferiors are designated by some title.
Sakyong gomchen was picturesque in his ways and open-minded. He haunted the
cemeteries and shut himself up for months in his house to practice magic rites. Like
his colleague from Lachen, he did not wear the regular monastic garb, and instead
of cutting his hair short he wore it rolled up on the top of his head after the fashion of
Indian yogins. For anyone except a layman to wear his hair long in Tibet, is the rec-
ognized distinction of those ascetics or anchorites who are called naljorpas and are
believed to seek salvation through the mystic "Short Path.'' See “Mystic Theories
and Spiritual Training” on page 148.
Up to then, my conversations with lamas had been chiefly concerned with the philo-
sophical doctrines of Mahayanist Buddhism from which Lamaism is derived. Saky-
ong gomchen held them in slight esteem and moreover was but little conversant
with them. He was fond of paradoxes.
"Study," he said, "is of no use in gaining true knowledge, it is rather an obstacle.
All that we learn in that way is vain. In fact, one only knows one's own ideas and
one's own visions. As for the real causes that have generated these ideas they
remain inaccessible to us. When we try to grasp them we only seize the ideas
that we, ourselves, have elaborated about these causes."
Did he clearly understand what he said, or was he merely repeating what he had
read or heard expressed by others? (...)
At the request of the prince Tulku, Sakyong gomchen also went on a round of
preaching. I had the opportunity of watching him delivering a sermon. I say watch-
ing rather than hearing, for at that time I was far from being capable of understand-
ing all what he said in Tibetan. In this rôle of apostle he was really very fine, the
vehemence of his speech, his gestures, the varied expressions of his countenance
proclaimed him a born orator, and the frightened faces, bathed in tears of his listen-
ers was proof enough of the impression he produced.
The gomchen of Sakyong is the only Buddhist I have ever seen preaching in such
impassioned way. For orthodox Buddhism excludes gestures and vocal effects as
unbefitting in expounding a doctrine which appeals only to calm reason.
I, one day, asked him:
"What is the Supreme Deliverance?”39
He answered:
"It is the absence of all views and all imagination, the cessation of that mental
activity which creates illusions."40
39.Tharpa
40.That mental activity which Tibetans call togpa, ratiocination in contradistinction to togspa – understanding.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  37
•••

Another day, he said: "You should go to Tibet and be initiated by a master of the
'Short Path.' You are too much attached to the doctrines of the nienthös.41 I foresee
that you would be capable of grasping the secret teaching."42
"And how could I go to Tibet, since foreigners are not admitted?" I asked.
"Pooh! many roads lead to Tibet," he replied lightly. "All the learned lamas do not
live in U and Tsang.43 One can find other, yet more learned, teachers in my
country.''44
The idea of getting into Tibet by way of China had never occurred to me, nor did the
gomchen's suggestion, that day, awaken any echo in my mind. My hour had proba-
bly not yet come.
The second gomchen whom I got to know was of an uncommunicative character
and rather haughty in his manners. Even the customary formulas of politeness
which he was compelled to utter were tinged with a peculiar icy coldness.
Like the gomchen of Sakyong he was called after the place where he lived – Daling
gomchen.
He always wore the regular monastic robes and toga but with the addition of ear-
rings of ivory, and a silver dorje studded with turquoises stuck in his hair.
This lama spent the whole summer of every year in a cabin built for him on the top of
a woody mountain.
A few days before his arrival, his disciples and the villagers round about would carry
into the hermitage enough provisions for three or four months. After this, they were
absolutely forbidden to approach the gomchen's dwelling. The lama had no diffi-
culty in getting them to respect his solitude. The country people did not doubt that
he practiced dreadful rites to trap the demons and compel them to give up their mis-
chievous designs against the persons or the possessions of those who worshipped
him. His protection greatly reassured them, but they feared that if they went near his
hut they might chance to meet some malignant beings answering unwillingly the
gomchen's summons and not in pleasant mood. Moreover, the mystery which
always surrounds the conduct, as well as the character, of the naljorpas, inspired
them with prudence.
Little inclined as this lama was to answer my questions the desire expressed by the
prince – to whom he owed his appointment as head of the small monastery of Dal-
ing – compelled him to depart somewhat from his reserve.
Among other subjects that I approached in my talk with him was that of the food per-
mitted to a Buddhist. "Should we interpret the command not to kill, sophistically and
continue to eat meat and fish?" I asked.
41.The Buddhists of the Theravadin school
42.Secret teaching regarding methods of spiritual training and not regarding a supposed esoteric Buddhist
doctrine as a few foreigners unacquainted with Buddhist literature believe. There exists no such thing as
esoteric Buddhism. All theories expounded in the mystic circles are extant in books. That which is taught
secretly to initiates, are ways to make the mind fit to reach enlightenment or, at lower degrees, ways to
develop supernormal powers.
43.The central provinces with Lhasa and Shigatze as capitals
44. As it has been said, the gomchen was a native of Eastern Tibet.
•
•
38
•

•••

The gomchen, like most Tibetans, was not a vegetarian. He expounded a theory on
this subject which I heard again in other parts of Tibet and which is not altogether
lacking in originality.
"Most men," he said, "eat like beasts, to satisfy their hunger without pondering
upon the act they are accomplishing nor upon its consequences. Such ignorant
people do well to abstain from eating meat and fish.
Others consider what becomes of the material elements they absorb when eating
animals. They know that the assimilation of these elements involves the assimila-
tion of the psychic elements which are inherent in them. Anyone who has acquired
that knowledge may, at his risk and peril, contract these associations and endeav-
our himself to obtain results useful to the victims sacrificed.
"The question is to find out whether the animal elements which he absorbs
strengthen the animal propensities of the man, or whether this man will be
capable of transmuting these elements into intellectual and spiritual forces, so
that the substance of the animal passing into the man will be reborn in the form
of human activity."
I then asked him if this explained the esoteric sense of the belief common among
Tibetans, that the lamas can send the spirits of the slaughtered animals to the Para-
dise of the Great Bliss.
"Do not think that I can answer your question in a few words," he replied. "The
subject is intricate. Animals have several 'consciousnesses,' just as we have
ourselves, and as it also happens in our case, these 'consciousnesses' do not all
follow the same road after death. A living being is an assemblage, not a unity.
But one must have been initiated by a proper master before being able to realize
these doctrines."
Often the lame cut his explanations short by this declaration.
One evening, when the prince, Daling lame and I were together in the bungalow of
Kewzing, the conversation was about mystic ascetics. With a repressed enthusi-
asm that was most impressive, the gomchen spoke of his master, of his wisdom, of
his supernormal powers. Sidkeong Tulku was deeply moved by the profound vener-
ation of the lama for his spiritual teacher.
At that time the prince was full of cares on account of his contemplated marriage
with a Birman princess.
"I regret very much that I cannot meet this great naljorpa," he said to me in
English. "For he, certainly, would give me good advice."
And addressing the gomchen he repeated, in Tibetan:
"I am sorry that your master is not here. I really need the advice of some such
clairvoyant sage."
But he did not mention the question he wished to ask, nor the nature of his preoccu-
pations.
The lama with his usual coldness of manner asked:
"Is the subject serious?"
"It is extremely important," the prince replied.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  39
•••

"You can perhaps receive the desired advice," said Daling gomchen.
I thought that he meant to send a letter by a messenger and was about to remind
him the great distance that would have to be covered, when his aspect struck me.
He had closed his eyes and was rapidly turning pale, his body stiffening. I wished to
go to him, thinking he was ill, but the prince, who had observed the sudden change
in the lama, held me back, whispering:
"Don't move. Gomchens sometimes go into a trance quite suddenly. One must
not wake them, for that is very dangerous and might even kill them."
So I stayed seated watching the lama who remained motionless. Gradually his fea-
tures changed, his face wrinkled, taking on an expression I had never seen him
wear before. He opened his eyes and the prince made a startled gesture.
The man we were looking at was not the gomchen of Daling, but some one we did
not know. He moved his lips with difficulty and said in a voice different from that of
the gomchen:
"Do not be disturbed. This question will never have to be considered by you."
Then he slowly closed his eyes, his features changed again and became those of
Daling lama who slowly recovered his senses.
He eluded our questions and retired in silence, staggering and seeming to be bro-
ken with fatigue.
"There is no sense in his answer," the prince concluded.
Whether by chance or for some other reason, it unfortunately proved that there had
been a meaning in these words.
The matter troubling the young maharajah was about his fiancée and an affair with a
girl who had borne him a son which he did not wish to break off when he married.
But, truly, he needed not to ponder over his course of conduct toward the two
women, for he died before the day arranged for the marriage.
I happened also to see two hermits of a peculiar type which I did not meet again in
Tibet where, on the whole, the natives are more civilized than in the Himalayas.
I was returning with the prince Tulku from an excursion to the frontier of Nepal. His
servants, knowing that he liked to show me the "religious curiosities" of his country,
pointed out the presence of two hermits in the mountains near the village where we
had spent the night.
The peasants said that these men had hidden themselves so cleverly that no one
had seen them for several years. A supply of food was placed from time to time
under a rock, at a chosen spot where the anchorites would take it at night. As to the
huts they had built themselves, none knew where they were, nor did anyone try to
discover them. For if the hermits were anxious to avoid being seen, the supersti-
tious villagers were even more anxious to keep at a distance from them and turned
away from the wood they inhabited.
Sidkeong Tulku had freed himself from fear of sorcery. He ordered his servants
together with a number of peasants to beat up the forest and bring the hermits to
him. The latter should be well treated and presents promised to them, but great care
must be taken that they did not escape.
•
•
40
•

•••

The hunt was strenuous. The two anchorites, surprised in their quiet retreat, tried to
run away, but with twenty men on their track they were finally captured.
They had to be forcibly made to enter the small temple where we were waiting with
several lamas – among whom was the gomchen of Sakyong. Once there, no one
could get a word out of them.
I have never seen such strange human creatures. Both men were frightfully dirty,
scarcely covered by a few rags, their long hair, thick as brushwood, covered their
faces and their eyes shot out sparks like a brazier.
While they looked around them like wild beasts newly caught in a cage, the prince
caused two large wicker baskets to be brought. These were filled with tea, meat,
barley-flour, rice and sundries. He told the hermits that he meant to give all this to
them. But in spite of this agreeable prospect they remained silent.
A villager then said that he thought he had understood that when the anchorites
came to live on that hill they were under a vow of silence.
His Highness, who was a prey to sudden attacks of truly Oriental despotism, replied
that they might at least bow to him as it is the custom and adopt a more respectful
attitude.
I saw his anger rising and, to avoid trouble brewing for the wild "holy ones," I begged
him to allow them to retire.
He first resisted my request, but I insisted.
In the meantime I had told one of my servants to bring two bags of crystallized sugar
taken from my luggage – Tibetans are very fond of it – I placed one bag in each bas-
ket.
"Open the door, and let these animals out," the prince commanded at last.
As soon as they saw a chance of escape, the hermits pounced on the baskets. One
of them hastily pulled something from under his rags, plunged his claw-like hand in
my hair, and then both of them flew away like hares.
I found a little amulet in my hair which I showed to my friends and, later on, to some
lamas who were conversant in the science of charms. All agreed in telling me that
far from being harmful, the amulet secured me the company of a demon who would
drive away any dangers on my road and serve me. I could only be pleased. Perhaps
the hermit had understood that I begged for him and his companion to be set free,
and his strange gift was a token of gratitude.
My last excursion with the lama prince led me again toward the north of the country.
I revisited Lachen and saw its gomchen. I was now able to converse with him, but
there was no time for long talks as we only stopped for one day on our way to reach
the foot of the Kinchindjinga mountain.45
On the way, we camped on the side of a pretty lake in the desolate valley of Lonak,
not far from the highest pass in the world: the Jongson pass (about 24,000 feet
high) where the frontiers of Tibet, Nepal and Sikkim meet.
45.Altitude 28,150 feet. The altitude of the Mount Everest the highest mountain of the world, is 29,000 feet.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  41
•••

We spent a few days near the gigantic moraines from which spring the snow-cov-
ered peaks of the Kinchindjinga. Then Sidkeong Tulku left me to return to Gangtok
with his retinue.
He made fun of my love for high solitary places which led me to continue my journey
with the young Yongden and a few servants. I can see him, even now. This time he
was not dressed as a genie of the
Arabian Nights, but in the kit of a Western alpinist. Before disappearing behind a
rocky spur, he turned back toward me waving his hat and crying from far off:
"Come back soon. Don't stay away too long!"
I never saw him again. He died mysteriously a few months later, while I was stop-
ping at Lachen.
The Lonak valley was too near Tibet for me to possibly resist climbing one of the
passes leading to that country. The Nago pass46 was the most easily accessible.
The weather was fair but cloudy and a little snow fell as we were starting.
The landscape, viewed from the top of the pass, did not resemble that which I had
seen two years earlier, so gloriously luminous. Now the twilight cast a purple grey-
ish veil over the immense tableland extending, majestically void, from the foot of the
mountain toward other ranges standing out indistinctly in the distance. But softly
enshrouded in the first evening's shadows the forbidden solitudes looked still more
mysterious and irresistibly attractive.
I should have been content to wander aimlessly across this extraordinary region,
but I had a goal. Before leaving Gangtok one of the native officials had called my
attention to the monastery of Chörten Nyima.
"The monasteries you have seen in Sikkim are very different from those of
Tibet," he had told me. "Since you cannot travel freely in Tibet, go at least to see
Chörten Nyima. Though this gompa is very small, you will get some idea of a
true Tibetan monastery."
So I was going to Chörten Nyima.
The monastic habitations of that place fully justified the name gompa47 given, in
Tibetan language, to monasteries. It is impossible to fancy any more solitary site.
The region in which the monks' houses have been built is not only uninhabited but
the high altitude makes a desert of it.
Sandy cliffs curiously carved by erosions, a large valley ascending toward a moun-
tain lake, high snowy peaks, a limpid brook on a bed of mauve, greyish green or
rosy coloured pebbles formed around the gompa an impassable, wholly mineral
scenery from which emanated a serenity beyond expression.
Legends and prodigies are naturally in their right place in such a setting. They are
not lacking at Chörten Nyima. This very name, which means "Sun shrine," was
derived from a wonder. Once upon a time a Chörten containing precious relics was
miraculously transported through the air, on a ray of sun from India to that spot.
46.Over 18,000 feet
47.A dwelling in the solitude
•
•
42
•

•••

In ancient traditions it is related that Padmasambhâva the apostle of Tibet has hid-
den in the vicinity of Chörten Nyima a number of manuscripts regarding mystic doc-
trines which he thought it was premature, to disclose, for in the eighth century, when
Padmasambhâva visited Tibet, Tibetans possessed no intellectual culture. This
master foresaw that long after he had left this world, lamas, predestined by their
former lives, would bring these writings to light again. Several works are said to
have been found in this region and some lamas are still hunting to discover others.
According to Tibetans, one hundred and eight chörtens and one hundred and eight
springs exist round about Chörten Nyima. All of them are not visible. A large num-
ber can only be seen by those whose mind is particularly pure. Wishes made
beside these springs, after one has placed an offering in the water at the very spot
where it wells up out of the earth, cannot help being fulfilled.
Chöd do48 either standing up or piled in the shape of cairns bristle all over the coun-
try, and when erected by pious pilgrims to honour Padmasambhâva, these primitive
monuments are believed to be indestructible.
The monastery, which must at one time have been somewhat important, is falling in
ruins. As in many other places in Tibet, we may see here a result of the destitution of
the ancient sects which have not followed the reforms of Tsong Khapa, whose disci-
ples, nowadays, form the state clergy. I found only four nuns at Chörten Nyima who
belonged to the Nyingma sect.49 They lived as celibates but without having been
fully ordained and did not wear monastic robes.
Numerous examples of strange contrasts are to be seen in Tibet, but what most
astonished me was the tranquil courage of the womenfolk. Very few Western
women would dare to live in the desert, in groups of four or five or sometimes quite
alone.
Few would dare under such conditions to undertake journeys that last for months or
even years, through solitary mountain regions infested by wild beasts and brigands.
This shows the singular character of Tibetan women. They do not ignore these real
dangers and they add to them by imagining legions of evil spirits taking on thou-
sands of strange forms, even that of a demoniacal plant which grows on the edge of
precipices, seizes hold of travellers with its thorny branches and drags them into the
abyss.
In spite of these many reasons for staying safely in their native villages, one finds
here and there in Tibet, communities of less than a dozen nuns, living in isolated
convents situated at a great height, some of them blocked in by the snow for more
than half of the year.
Other women live as hermits in caves, and many women pilgrims travel, alone,
across the immense territory of Tibet carrying their scanty luggage on their backs.
Visiting the Lhakhangs50 still existing among the ruined buildings of the monastery,
I found a room containing a collection of small images made of coloured clay and
representing the fantastic beings which surround the "spirits" of the dead as they
cross the Bardo. See “Tibet and the Lamas” on page 4.
48.Stone offerings
49."Ancient sect," the oldest of the "red caps "
50.houses of the gods, where their images are placed
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  43
•••

Above them, in the attitude of a Buddha meditating, Dorjee Chang was seated
naked, his blue body symbolizing space, that is to say, in mystic symbology: Empti-
ness.
One of the nuns surprised me by explaining their meaning.
"All these are non-existent," she said, pointing out the monstrous forms of the
Bardo's phantoms.
"Mind evokes them out of the void and can also dissolve them into the void."
"How do you know that?" I asked, doubting that the good woman could have
evolved this theory by herself.
"My lame has told it to me," she answered.
"And who may your lama be?"
"A gomchen living near the Mo-te-tong lake."
"Does he come here sometimes?"
"No, never. The lama of Chörten Nyima lives at Tranglung."
"Is he too a gomchen?"
"No, he is a ngagspa51 and a householder, he is very rich and works many kinds
of wonders."
"For instance? (...)"
"He can cure people or animals or cause them to become ill, even at a distance.
He can stop, or bring rain and hail at will (...)
Listen to what he did a few years ago:
"When it was harvest time, the lama ordered the villagers to cut and store his
grain. Some of them made answer that they would certainly store his barley but
not until they had lodged their own grain.
"The weather was unsettled and the peasants were afraid of hail-storms,
frequent at that time of the year. So instead of begging the lama to protect their
fields while they were working for him, a number of them remained obstinate,
meaning to cut their own barley first.
"Then the lama used his magic powers. He performed a dubthab rite, called up
his tutelary deities and animated some tormas.52
As soon as he had ended uttering the magic words, the tormas flew away and trav-
elling, like birds, through the air, they circled about, entered the houses of those
who had refused to obey immediately and caused much damage. But they passed
by the houses of the men who had first harvested the lame's barley, without doing
any harm.
"Since then, no one dares to disregard the orders of the lama."
51.magician
52.Ritualistic cakes
•
•
44
•

•••

Oh! to talk with this magician who shot avenging cakes through space! (...) I was
dying with desire to meet him.
Tranglung was not far from Chörten Nyima, the nuns said a day's march would bring
me there. But that day's march led through forbidden territory. I had, once more,
ventured to cross the border to visit Chörten Nyima, should I push on farther and
show myself in a village? If it was known, was I not likely to be turned out of Sikkim?
There was no question of starting a regular journey across Tibet. I was not at all pre-
pared for this, and as the matter was only one of paying a short visit to a sorcerer, I
did not think it worth while compromising my chance of continuing my Tibetan stud-
ies in the Himalayas.
So I decided to return after leaving a present for the nuns and another to be sent to
the lame of Tranglung.
My regrets were later on wiped off the slate. For two years later I met the sorcerer
and was several times his guest at Tranglung.
Autumn was coming on, snow had invaded the passes, nights under the tent
became hard. I recrossed the frontier and was delighted to find myself in a house,
beside a flaming fire.
The house was one of those bungalows built by the British administration for the
convenience of foreign travellers, all along the roads of India and the neighbouring
countries under British control. Thanks to them, trips that would otherwise have to
be organized expeditions, can be easily accomplished.
The Thangu bungalow, 12,000 feet high and about 14 miles to the south of the
Tibetan frontier, stood in a pretty solitary place surrounded by forests.
I felt comfortable there and stayed on, little inclined to hasten my return to Gangtok
or to Podang. There was not much more for me to learn from the lamas I had been
associated with. Perhaps in normal times I would have left the country for China or
Japan, but the war which had begun in Europe just as I was leaving for Chörten
Nyima, made it rather dangerous to cross seas ploughed by submarines.
I was considering where I should spend the winter when a few days after my arrival
at Thangu I learned that the gomchen of Lachen was in his hermitage, half a day's
march from the bungalow.
I immediately decided to pay him a visit. The excursion could not help being inter-
esting. What was this "cave of the clear light" as he called it, and what sort of life did
he live there? – I was curious to know.
I had sent back my horse when leaving for Chörten Nyima and made the journey on
a yak.53
I expected to hire a beast at Lachen for my return to Gangtok. Seeing me without a
horse, the keeper of the bungalow proposed to bring his own. The animal, he said,
was very sure-footed and would climb the rough steep path that led to the gom-
chen's cave perfectly well.
I accepted and the next day was mounted on a small, not too ugly, beast with a red
coat.
53.The long-haired grunting Tibetan ox.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  45
•••

Horses are bridled and bitted but yaks are not, and when one rides the latter, one's
hands are free. I had kept this habit, and thinking of other things, was putting on my
gloves, forgetting to hold the reins as I should have done, especially as I was unfa-
miliar with the horse's character. While I continued dreaming, the animal rose on his
fore feet and kicked his heels at the clouds. Shot through the air, I fell down on a
piece of ground, luckily covered with grass, below the path. The hard blow made me
unconscious.
When I came to myself again, a sharp pain in my back made it impossible to get up.
As to the red horse, his fit of kicking over he had not budged. Quiet as a lamb, with
his head turned toward me, he watched with attentive interest the people busying
themselves about me and carrying me into my room.
The keeper of the bungalow was most grieved at my reproaches.
"This horse has never before acted like that, I assure you. It is not vicious," he
said. "I should not have offered it to you if I had not been sure of it. I have ridden
it for several years.
"Watch me. I shall make it trot a little."
Through the window I saw the beast standing quite still.
His master approached it, spoke to it, took hold of the bridle, placing his foot in the
stirrup and sprung not as he intended, into the saddle, but into the air, where a good
kick had hurled him.
Less lucky than I had been, he fell upon rocks.
Men ran to help him. He was badly wounded in the head and bleeding freely, but
escaped with no bones broken.
Between his groans, he kept repeating, as he was carried home: "Never, never
before has this horse acted in that way!"
This is very astonishing, I thought, as I lay stiff and bruised on my bed.
While I was pondering on this strange manifestation of an animal supposed to be so
gentle, my cook came in.
"Reverend lady, this is not natural," he said. "I have questioned the keeper's
servant. His master told the truth, the horse has always been quiet. The
gomchen must be at the bottom of this. He has demons around him.
"Do not go to his hermitage. Harm will come to you. Return to Gangtok. I shall
find you a chair and porters if you cannot ride on horseback."
Another of my men lighted incense sticks and a small altar lamp. Yongden who, at
that time, was only fifteen, wept in a corner.
This stage setting looked as if I was dying. I started to laugh.
"Come, come, I am not dead yet," I said. "The demons have nothing to do with
the horse. The gomchen is not a wicked man.
Why are you afraid of him? Send up dinner early and then let us all go to sleep. To-
morrow, we will consider what is to be done."
Two days later the gomchen, having heard about my accident, sent me a black mare
to take me to him.
•
•
46
•

•••

No incident marked the trip. Through mountain paths that wound about the woody
height, I reached a clearing at the foot of a very steep and barren mountainside that
was crowned by an indented ridge of black rocks.
A little farther up a number of flags showed the place of the hermitage.
The lama came half-way down to welcome me Then he led me through the loops of
the winding path not to his own dwelling, but to another hermitage about a mile
away below his own.
He had a large pot of buttered tea brought there and a fire lighted on the ground, in
the centre of the room.
The word room might prove misleading, for it was not in a house that the gomchen
showed me this hospitality, we were in a small-sized cave closed by a wall of unce-
mented stones, in which two narrow gaping holes less than ten inches high served
for windows. A few boards, roughly hewn with an axe, and bound together with
strips of supple bark, formed the door.
I had left Thangu late and it was dusk when I arrived at the hermitage.
My servants spread my blankets on the bare rock, and the gomchen took them to
sleep in a hut which, he said, was just beside his cave.
Left to myself, I stepped out of my lair. There was no moon. I could only dimly see
the white mass of a glacier against the shadow at the end of the valley, and the som-
bre mountain-tops that towered above my head toward the starry sky. Below me lay
a mist of darkness from which ascended the roar of a distant torrent. I did not dare to
go far in this blackness the path was only large enough for a foothold and skirted the
void. I had to put further explorations off until tomorrow.
I went in and lay down. I had scarcely time to roll myself in my blankets before the
light flickered and went out. The servants had forgotten to fill the lantern with kero-
sene. I could find no matches at hand and being unacquainted with the formation of
my prehistoric dwelling I did not dare to move for fear of hurting myself on some
pointed rocks.
A bitter breeze began to blow in through the "windows" and the cracks of the door. A
star peeped at me through the gap facing my ascetic couch: "Do you feel comfort-
able?" it seemed to say: "What do you think of a hermit's life?"
Indeed, its ironical twinkling mocked me!
"Yes, I am all right," I answered. "Thousand times better than all right (...) ravished,
and I feel that the hermit's life, free of what we call 'the goods and pleasures of the
world,' is the most wonderful of all lives."
Then the star left off mockery. It shone more brightly and growing larger, lighted the
whole cave.
"That I may be capable of dying in this hermitage And my wish will be accom-
plished,''54 it said, quoting the verses of Milarespa. And an expression of doubt
dulled its grave voice.
54.These verses belong to a poem composed by Milarespa in the eleventh century, while he was living in a
cave. It is popular in Tibet and means. If I am capable of living in this hermitage until death, without being
tempted to return to the world, I shall have reached my spiritual goal.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  47
•••

The next day I went up to the hermitage of the gomchen.
This too was a cave, but larger and better furnished than mine. The whole ground
under the arched rocky roof had been enclosed by a wall of uncemented stones and
provided with a solid door. This entrance room served as a kitchen. At the back of it
a natural opening in the rock led into a diminutive grotto. There the gomchen had his
living-room. A wooden step led to the entrance, for it was higher than the kitchen,
and a heavy multi-coloured curtain hid the doorway. There was no aperture to venti-
late this inner chamber; a fissure in the stone through which air may have entered
was closed with a glass pane.
The furniture consisted of several wooden chests piled up behind a curtain which
formed the back of the anchorite's couch, which was made of large hard cushions
placed on the ground. In front of it were two low tables, mere slabs of wood set up on
feet, painted in bright colours.
At the back of the grotto, on a small altar were placed the usual offerings: copper
bowls filled with water, grain and butter lamps.
Scrolls of religious painting completely covered the rocky uneven walls. Under one
of these was hidden the small cabinet in which lamas of the tantric sects keep a
demon prisoner.
Outside the cave, half sheltered under protuberant rocks, two cabins had been built
that served to store the provisions.
As you can see, the gomchen's dwelling was not entirely lacking in comfort.
This eyrie commanded a romantic and absolutely solitary site. The natives held it to
be inhabited by evil spirits. They said that some men who had formerly ventured
there looking for stray cattle or to work as wood-cutters had strange encounters
which sometimes led to fatal consequences.
Such spots are often chosen as dwelling-places by Tibetan hermits. Firstly they
deem them a suitable ground for spiritual training. Secondly they think that they find,
there, the opportunity of using their magic powers for the good of men and animals,
either by converting malignant evil spirits or by forcibly preventing their harmful
activity at least, simple people ascribe that charitable desire to these "holy ones."
Seventeen years earlier, the lama whom the mountaineers called Jowo gomchen55
had established himself in the cave where I saw him. Gradually the monks of the
Lachen monastery had improved it, till it became as I have just described it.
At first the gomchen had lived in total seclusion. The villagers or herdsmen who
brought his provisions, left their offerings in front of his door and retired without see-
ing him. The hermitage was inaccessible during three or four months every year, for
the snows would block the valleys that led to it.
When he grew older he kept a young boy with him as attendant, and when I came to
live in the cave below his he called near him his initiated consort. As he belonged to
the "red hat sect" the gomchen was not bound to be a celibate.
I spent a week in my cave, visiting the gomchen each day. Though his conversation
was full of interest, I was still far more interested in watching the daily life of a
Tibetan anchorite.
55.Lord contemplative anchorite
•
•
48
•

•••

A few Westerners such as Csöma de Köros or the French Rev. Fathers Huc and
Gabet have sojourned in lamaist monasteries, but none has lived with these gom-
chens about whom so many fantastic stories are told.
This was reason enough to incite me to stay in the neighbourhood of the gomchen.
Added to this was my keen desire to myself experience the contemplative life
according to lamaist methods.
However, my wish did not suffice, the consent of the lama was needed. If he did not
grant it, there would be no advantage in living near his hermitage. He would shut
himself up and I could only look at a wall of rock behind which "something was going
on."
So I presented my request to the lama in a manner that agreed with Oriental cus-
toms. I begged that he would instruct me in the doctrine he professed. He objected
that his knowledge was not extensive enough and that it was useless for me to stay
in such an inhospitable region to listen to an ignorant man, when I had had the
opportunity of long talks with learned lamas elsewhere.
I strongly insisted, however, and he decided to admit me, not exactly as a pupil, but
on a trial as a novice, for a certain time.
I began to thank him, when he interrupted me.
"Wait," he said, "there is a condition; you must promise me that you will not
return to Gangtok, nor undertake any journey toward the south without my
permission."56
The adventure was becoming exciting. The strangeness of it aroused my enthusi-
asm.
"I promise," I answered without hesitaating.
A rough cabin was added to my cave. Like that of the gomchen, it was built of planks
roughly hewn with an axe. The mountaineers of this country do not know to use a
saw, nor did they, at that time, care to learn.
A few yards away, another hut was built, containing a small private room for
Yongden and a lodging for our servants.
In enlarging my hermitage, I was not altogether yielding to sybaritic tendencies.
It would have been difficult for me to fetch water and fuel and to carry these burdens
up to my cave. Yongden, who had just left school, was no more experienced than I
at this kind of work. We could not do without servants to help us, therefore an ample
supply of provision and a store-house was indispensable since we were facing a
long winter during which we should remain completely isolated.
Now these things seem to me small difficulties, but at that time I was making my
"début" in the rôle of anchorite, and my son had not yet begun his apprenticeship as
explorer.
56.To go southward meant to go to Gangtok or to Kalimpong, where a few foreigners reside, and even if
avoiding these places to follow a road sometimes frequented by Western tourists coming to these hills
from India.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  49
•••

The days passed. Winter came, spreading a coat of immaculate snow on the whole
country and, as we had expected, blocking the valleys that led to the foot of our
mountain.
The gomchen shut himself up for a long retreat. I did the same thing. My single daily
meal was placed behind a curtain at the entrance of my hut. The boy who brought it
and who later carried away the empty platesleft in silence, without having seen me.
My life resembled that of the Carthusians without the diverion which they may find in
attendance at religous services.
A bear appeared in search of food and after its first feelings of astonishment and
defiance were over, grew accustomed to coming and waiting for bread and other
eatable things that were thrown to it.
At last, toward the beginning of April, one of the boys noticed a black spot moving in
the clearing beneath us and cried out: "a man!" just as early navigators must have
cried "land ahead!" We were no longer blocked in; letters arrived that had been writ-
ten in Europe five months before.
Then it was springtime in the cloudy Himalayas. Nine hundred feet below my cave
rhododendrons blossomed. I climbed barren mountain-tops. Long tramps led me to
desolate valleys studded with translucent lakes .(...) Solitude, solitude! (...) Mind
and senses develop their sensibility in this contemplative life made up of continual
observations and reflections. Does one become a visionary or, rather, is it not that
one has been blind until then? (...)
A few miles farther north, beyond the last range of the Himalayas which the clouds
of the Indian monsoon cannot cross, the sun shone in the blue sky over the high
Tibetan tableland. But, there, the summer was rainy, cold and short. In September
the tenacious snows already covered the neighbouring heights and soon our yearly
imprisonment began again.
What were the fruits of my long retreat? I should have found it difficult to explain, yet
I learnt a number of things.
Apart from my study of the Tibetan language with the help of grammars, dictionar-
ies and talks with the gomchen, I also read with him the lives of famous Tibetan
mystics. He would often stop our reading to tell me about facts he had himself wit-
nessed which were akin to the stories related in the books. He would describe peo-
ple he had known, repeating their conversations and telling me about their lives.
Thus, while seated in his cabin or in mine I visited the palaces of rich lamas, entered
the hermitages of many an ascetic. I travelled along the roads, meeting curious
people. I became, in that way, closely acquainted with Tibet, its inhabitants, their
customs and their thoughts: a precious science which was later on to stand me in
good stead.
I never let myself be taken in by the illusion that my anchorite's home might become
my final harbour. Too many causes opposed any desire of staying there and of lay-
ing down, once and for all, the burden of foolish ideas, routine cares and duties to
which, like other Westerners, I still fancied myself to be bound.
I knew that the personality of a gomchenma which I had taken on, could only be an
episode in my life as a traveller, or at the best, a preparation for future liberation.
•
•
50
•

•••

Sadly, almost with terror, I often looked at the threadlike path which I saw, lower
down, winding in the valleys and disappearing between the mountains. The day
would come when it would lead me back to the sorrowful world that existed beyond
the distant hill ranges, and so thinking, an indescribable suffering lay hold of me.
Besides more important reasons, the impossibility of keeping my servants any
longer in this desert, compelled me to leave my hermitage. Yet, before parting once
more from Tibet, I wished to visit one of its two great religious centres: Shigatze,
which was not a great distance.
The famous monastery of Tashilhunpo lies near this town. It is the seat of the Grand
Lama whom foreigners call the Tashi Lama. Tibetans call him Tsang Penchen rim-
poche, "the Precious learned man of the province of Tsang." He is considered to be
an emanation of Odpagmed, the mystic Buddha of infinite light and at the same
time, a reincarnation of Subhuti, one of the foremost disciples of the historical Bud-
dha. From a spiritual point of view, his rank equals that of the Dalai Lama. But as
spirit, in this world, must often yield precedence to temporal power, so the Dalai
Lama autocrat of Tibet is the master.
Foreseeing the possible consequences of this journey I put off starting for Shigatze
until I was definitely ready to leave the Himalayas.
I went from my hermitage to Chörten Nyima where I had stayed before. From there I
left for Shigatze accompanied by Yongden and a monk who was to act as our ser-
vant. We were all three on horseback. Our luggage was placed in large leather sad-
dle-bags, as is customary in Tibet; a pack-mule carried two small tents and our
provisions.
The distance was not great. One could easily accomplish the trip in four days. I
intended, however to travel very slowly so as not to miss anything of interest on my
way, and above all, that I might absorb in body and spirit as much as possible of
Tibet whose heart I was at last about to penetrate, but probably might never see
again.
Since my first visit to Chörten Nyima I had met a son of the lama sorcerer who sent
ritualistic cakes flying through the air to punish his disobedient neighbours, and I
had been invited, if circumstances permitted to visit him.
Tranglung, the village where he lived, was no more on the straight road leading from
my hermitage to Shigatze than Chörten Nyima, but as I have just said, I intended to
profit by all opportunities of seeing interesting things that my adventure in forbidden
land might bring me.
We reached Tranglung at the end of the afternoon. The village was quite different
from any that Tibetan settlers have built in the Himalayas. It was, indeed surprising
to find such a complete contrast at so short a distance. Not only the tall stone
houses differed from the cottages made of wood with thatched roofs I had been
accustomed to see in Sikkim, but the climate, the soil, the landscape, the people's
cast of features and general look had changed. I was really in Tibet.
We found the sorcerer in his oratory, a huge room without any windows, scantily
enough lighted through the roof. Near him were several men to whom he was dis-
tributing charms which consisted in toys like small pigs' heads, made of pink-
coloured clay and wrapped in woollen threads of different shades.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  51
•••

The peasants listened with rapt attention to the lama's endless instructions on the
ways to use these objects.
When they had gone, the householder-lama, with a gracious smile, invited me to
take tea with him. A long conversation ensued. I was burning to ask my host about
the flying cakes, but a direct question would have been against all rules of polite-
ness. During the few days I remained there, I was told about a peculiar domestic
drama and had the rare honour of being consulted by an authentic sorcerer.
Here, as in a large number of families in Central Tibet, polyandry was practiced. On
the wedding day of the lama's eldest son, his brothers' names had been mentioned
in the marriage deed and the young girl had consented to take them all as hus-
bands.
As in most cases, at that time some of the "bridegrooms" were mere children who
had, of course, not been consulted. They were, nevertheless, legally married.
Now the sorcerer of Tranglung had four sons. I was not told what the second son
thought about his partnership with his elder brother. He was away in journey and
most likely all was right with him.
The third son, whom I knew personally, was also travelling somewhere. It was he
who had upset the peace of the family.
He was much younger than his first two brothers being only twenty-five, and he
obstinately refused to fulfil his conjugal duties toward the collective wife.
Unfortunately for the lady, this purely nominal husband was far more attractive than
the elder two. Not only was he rather better looking than his brothers but he sur-
passed them in social position, eloquence' learning, and may be in various other
accomplishments that I could not discover.
While the two elders were but wealthy farmers, the third brother enjoyed the pres-
tige attached, in Tibet to clergy. He was a lama, and more than a common lama. He
was a so-called naljorpa initiated in occult doctrines, he had the right to wear the
five-sided hat of the tantric mystics and the white skirt of the respas who are adepts
in tumo, the art of keeping warm without fire in even the coldest weather. (Regard-
ing tumo, See “Psychic Sports” on page 122.
It was this distinguished husband who refused to fulfil his part, and the offended
wife could not resign herself to be disdained.
What made the matter worse was that the young lama courted a girl in one of the
neighbouring villages and meant to marry her.
The law of the country permitted him to do so, but if he persisted in this marriage
and thus broke up the unity of the family, the young husband would have to leave his
father's house and establish a new home for his bride. The priestly son of my host,
indeed, did not shrink from the responsibility, and even relied confidently on his
earnings as a sorcerer to make that home comfortable.
But by so doing would he not be setting himself up as a rival to his father? Although
the old lama did not express his thought in words, I could read in the expression of
his face that he feared a competitor in that obstinate son who refused to please a
healthy, sturdy woman of forty, probably not too ugly.
•
•
52
•

•••

I could not dispute this point, for the wife's features were hidden under a thick coat-
ing of butter and soot that made her as black as a negress.
"What on earth is to be done?" groaned the aged mother of the family.
I had no experience in such matters. Though I had met polyandrist ladies in the
west, as a rule no family council was called in to settle the imbroglios that result from
their affairs. And in my travels I had only been asked for advice by polygamist gen-
tlemen whose homes had become a seat of war.
Since polygamy is also legal in Tibet, I suggested that the young lama might be per-
suaded to bring his bride home.
Luckily for me, I was then wearing the respected monastic robe, for only this pre-
vented the jealous, disdained wife from throwing herself upon me.
"Reverend lady," cried the old mother as she wept, "you do not know that our
daughter-in-law wanted to send her servants to beat the girl and to disfigure her.
We had a hard task to prevent her from doing so. Think of people of our rank
doing such thing! We should be dishonoured for ever afterwards!"
I could find nothing more to say, so I remarked that it was time for my evening medi-
tation and asked permission to retire to the oratory which the lama had courteously
lent to me for the night.
As I was leaving the room I noticed the youngest son, a lad of eighteen, the hus-
band number four. He was seated in a dark corner and looking at the common wife
with a strange half-smile, as if he were saying –
"Wait a little, old lady, I have worse things in store for you."
During the following days I wandered idly from village to village, sleeping at night in
the peasants' houses. I did not try to hide my identity as I was obliged to later on, on
the road to Lhasa. No one here seemed to notice that I was a foreigner, or at any
rate, no one seemed to attach any importance to the fact.
My road passed the monastery of Patur which appeared to me immense compared
with those of Sikkim. One of the ecclesiastic officials invited us to an excellent meal
in a dark hall where we enjoyed the company of several monks.
Nothing there, with the exception of the massive buildings several stories high, was
entirely new to me. Nevertheless, I understood that Lamaism as I had observed it in
Sikkim was only a pale reflection of that which exists in Tibet.
I had vaguely imagined that beyond the Himalayas the country would become wild,
but now I began to realize that on the contrary I was coming into touch with a truly
civilized people.
Among the various incidents of the journey, the Chi River, swollen by the rains and
the melting snows, was difficult to ford in spite of the help of three villagers who took
our horses across one by one.
Beyond the village called Kuma extends a long track of desert land. According to
the description of our servant who knew the road well I hoped to camp pleasantly
near thermal springs, getting a hot bath and warm earth for bedding. A sudden
storm compelled us to set up our camp hastily before reaching this desired para-
dise. First hail attacked us, then the snow began to fall so hard that it soon came
nearly up to our knees.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  53
•••

A neighbouring brook overflowed into our camp. I had to spend the night fasting and
standing up most of the time on the small island that was the only spot, under my
tent, not invaded by the muddy water. So much for the comfortable sleep I had
expected.
At last, at a turning of the road where I had stopped to look at a drunken man wal-
lowing in the dust, my eyes suddenly fell on a glorious vision. In the bluish gloaming,
the enormous monastery of Tashilhunpo stood in the distance: a mass of white
buildings crowned with golden roofs that reflected the last dim rays of the setting
sun.
I had reached my goal.
A strange idea had grown up in my mind. Instead of looking for a shelter in one of
the inns of the town, I sent my servant to the lama who was responsible for enter-
taining the monks' visitors or the native students from the Kham province. How
could a foreign woman traveller, unknown to him, awaken his interest, and what rea-
son could she have for requesting his good offices? I had not asked myself this
question. I acted entirely on impulse and the result was excellent.
The distinguished official sent a trapa to order two rooms for me in the only house
next to the monastery. There I settled myself.
The very next day, according to the protocol the requests for an audience with the
Tashi Lama were begun. I had to give details of my native country and satisfied
them by saying that my birthplace was called Paris.
Which Paris? – South of Lhasa there is a village called Phagri, that name being pro-
nounced Pari. I explained that "my Paris" was a little farther away from the Tibetan
capital and stood westward, but I insisted on the point that starting from Tibet, one
could reach my country without crossing the sea and that, consequently, I was not a
Philing.57 This was a play upon the word philing which literally means a continent
over sea.
I had stayed so long in the proximity of Shigatze that it was impossible to be
unknown there, and, moreover,
the fact of having lived as a hermit made me somewhat famous in the country. An
audience was immediately granted and the mother of the Tashi Lama invited me to
be her guest.
I went over every corner of the monastery and, to pay for my welcome, I offered tea
to the several thousand monks living there.
The number of years that have elapsed and the chances I have taken, since that
time, to visit the large lamaseries, or even to dwell in them, have dulled my impres-
sions, but when I went round Tashilhunpo I was deeply struck by every thing I saw.
A barbaric splendour reigned in the temples, halls, and palaces of the dignitaries.
No description can give an idea of it. Gold, silver, turquoises, jade, were lavishly
used on the altars, the tombs, the ornamented doors, the ritualistic implements and
even on mere household objects for the use of wealthy lamas.
Should I say that I admired this opulent display? No, for it seemed unrefined and
childish: the work of powerful giants whose minds had not grown up.
57.Stranger
•
•
54
•

•••

That first contact with Tibet would even have impressed me unfavourably if I had not
had ever present before me the vision of its calm solitudes, and known that they
conceal ascetic sages who spurn the vulgarities that are the insignia of grandeur in
the eyes of the masses.
The Tashi Lama was most kind to me every time I saw him and showered me with
attentions. He knew quite well where my Paris was and pronounced the word
France with a perfect French accent.
My zeal for the study of Lamaism pleased him very much. He was willing to help my
researches in any way. Why should I not stay in Tibet? he asked me.
Why, indeed? Desire was not lacking, but I knew that however great and honoured
he was in the country, the gracious Grand Lama had not enough temporal power to
obtain permission for me to live in Tibet.
Nevertheless, if I had, at that moment, been as free of ties as I was when I under-
took my journey to Lhasa, I might have attempted to avail myself, in some secluded
spot, of the protection which was offered to me. But I had not foreseen such an offer.
My luggage, notes, collections of photo negatives (why should one think these
things important?) had been left behind, some in the care of friends in Calcutta, oth-
ers in my hermitage. How many things remained for me to learn, how great was the
mental transformation necessary to enable me to become, a few years later, a joyful
tramp in the wilds of Tibet.
While at Shigatze, I met the masters who had educated the Tashi Lama: his profes-
sor of secular sciences and he who had initiated him into the mystic doctrines. I also
came to know a contemplative mystic, the spiritual guide of the Tashi Lama, highly
revered by him, who if we must believe the stories told about him – ended his life, a
few years later, in a miraculous way. (See “Psychic Phenomena in Tibet – How
Tibetans Explain Them” on page 176.)
During my visit to Shigatze, the temple that the Tashi Lama meant to dedicate to the
future Buddha Maitreya, the lord of infinite compassion, was nearing completion.
I saw the huge image placed in a hall with galleries that allowed the devotees to cir-
cle around it on the ground floor on a level with the feet and successively ascending
the first, second and third galleries, up to its belt, its shoulders and its head.
Twenty jewellers were setting the enormous ornaments that were to adorn the
gigantic Maitreya. They were re-setting the jewels presented by the ladies belong-
ing to the nobility of Tsang, the mother of the Tashi Lama at their head, with the gift
of all her sets of precious stones.
I spent delightful days in the palaces of the Tashi Lama in Shigatze and the neigh-
bourhood. I talked with men of widely different characters. The novelty of what I saw
and heard, the special psychic atmosphere of the place, enchanted me. I have sel-
dom enjoyed such blissful hours.
At last the dreaded moment came. Taking with me books notes, presents and the
robe of a graduate lama that the Tashi Lama had bestowed on me as a kind of
diploma of Doctor honori causa of the Tashil-hunpo university, I left Shigatze, gaz-
ing sadly at the immense monastery as it disappeared behind the same turning of
the road from which it had first appeared to me.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  55
•••

I went on to Narthang to visit the largest of the printing establishments in Tibet. The
number of engraved wooden plates used for the printing of the various religious
books was prodigious. Set up on shelves, in rows, they filled a huge building.
The printers, spattered with ink up to their elbows sat upon the floor as they worked,
while in other rooms monks cut the paper according to the size required for each
kind of book.
There was no haste; chatting and drinking of buttered tea went on freely. What a
contrast to the feverish agitation in our newspaper printing-rooms.
From Narthang I sought out the hermitage of a gomchen who had been good
enough to send me an invitation. I found the anchorite's abode in a desolate place
on a hill, near the lake Mo-te-tong. It consisted of a spacious cave, to which one
room after another had been added, till it looked like a small fort.
The present gomchen had succeeded his master who himself had succeeded his
own spiritual father, famous as a wonder-worker. Gifts of devotees to three genera-
tions of lama magicians had led to the accumulation, in the hermitage, of a good
number of objects affording comfort, and life could be passed there quite pleasantly
that is, from the point of view of a Tibetan, born in the wilds and accustomed since
his youth to live as the disciple of an anchorite.
Such was the case of my host. He had never been to Lhasa nor to Shigatze, nor
travelled anywhere in Tibet and knew nothing of the world outside his cave. His
master had lived there for more than thirty years, and when he died the present her-
mit had walled himself in.
By walled in, one must understand that one door only gave access to the hermitage
enclosure, and this door the lama never approached. Two lower rooms under the
rock – kitchen, store-room and servant's quarter all together – opened on an inner
courtyard closed in, on the side which gave on to the precipice, by a high wall.
Above these rooms an upper cave was the private apartment of the lama, which
was reached by a ladder and a trap-door in the floor. This chamber stood on a small
terrace, also closed by walls. So the recluse could take a little exercise or sun him-
self without being seen by anyone outside and without himself seeing anything but
the sky overhead.
The anchorite mitigated the severity of his seclusion by receiving visitors and chat-
ting with them, but he added to its austerity by never lying down to sleep, spending
the nights in a gamti.
There exist, in Tibet, special seats which are called gamti58 or gomti.59 These are
square boxes, each side being about 25 or 30 inches long and one of the sides
being higher to form the back of the seat. At the bottom of the box a cushion is
placed on which the ascetic sits cross-legged. Often he does not allow himself to lie
against the back of the seat. and in order to support his body, either while sleeping
or during long meditation, he uses the "meditation rope."60 It is a sash usually made
in woollen cloth, which one passes under the knees and behind the nape of the
58.box seat
59.meditation seat
60.sgomthag
•
•
56
•

•••

neck, or with which one encircles the knees and the back. Many gomchens spend
days and nights in that way, without reclining or stretching their limbs to sleep.
They doze sometimes but never fall fast asleep, and except during these short peri-
ods of drowsiness, they do not stop their meditation.
I had several interesting conversations with the hermit and then I turned back
towards the frontier.
The British resident at Gangtok had already sent a letter by peasants from Sikkim
ordering me to leave Tibetan soil. I had not obeyed because I wanted to end my trip
as I had planned it, but now I had accomplished my object, and as I had foreseen
the consequences of a prolonged incursion on the forbidden territory, I was ready to
bid farewell to the Himalayas.
A second letter commanding me to leave the vicinity of the Tibetan border found me
already on the road to India en route for the Far East.
; ; ;
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  57
•••

Chapter III: A Famous Tibetan Monastery
Once more I have crossed the Himalayas, proceeding downward to India.
It is sad to leave the bewitching region where during several years I have lived a
most fantastic and captivating life: though, wonderful as this entrance house of
Tibet proved to be, I know that I am far from having obtained even a glimpse of all
the strange mystic doctrines and practices which are hidden from the profane in the
hermitages of the "Land of Snow." My journey to Shigatze has also revealed me the
scholastic Tibet, its monastic universities, its immense libraries. How many things
are left for me to learn! And I am leaving (...)
I go to Burma and spend days of retreat on the Sagain hills with the Kamatangs, the
contemplative monks of one of the most austere Buddhist sects.
I go to Japan where I dive into the calm of the Töfoku-ji, a monastery of that Zen sect
which, for centuries, has collected the intellectual aristocracy of the country.
I go to Korea. Panya-an; the "monastery of wisdom" concealed in the heart of the
forest opens its door to me.
When I went there to beg temporary admittance, heavy rains had washed the path
away. I found the Panya-an monks busy repairing it. The novice sent by his abbot to
introduce me stopped before one of the workers as muddy as his companions,
bowed respectfully and said a few words to him. The digger, leaning on his spade,
looked at me intently for a while, then nodded his consent and began to work again,
without taking any more notice of me.
"He is the head of the hermitage," my guide told me. "He is willing to give you a
room."
The next day when I returned to Panya-an, I was led to a completely empty cell. My
blanket spread on the floor was to be my couch, while my dressingcase could be
used as a table. Yongden was to share the room of a young novice of his age, which,
excepting for a few books on a shelf, was as little furnished as mine.
The daily routine included eight hours of meditation divided in four periods of two
hours – eight hours of study and manual work – eight hours devoted to sleep, meals
and recreation according to individual tastes.
Each day, a little before 3 a.m., a monk went round the houses, striking a wooden
instrument to waken his brothers.
Then, all met in the assembly room, where they sat in meditation facing the wall.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  58
•••

Diet was truly ascetic (...) rice and some boiled vegetables without any flavouring.
Even the vegetables were often missing and the meal consisted of plain rice alone.
Silence was not compulsory as it is amongst the Trappist, but the monks seldom
spoke. They did not feel the need of talking nor of spending their energy in outward
manifestations. Their thoughts remained fixed on secret introspections and their
eyes had the inward gaze of the Buddha's images.
I go to Peking. I live in Peling-sse, formerly an imperial mansion, now a Buddhist
monastery. It is situated next the large Lamaist temple and near the stately temple
of Confucius, several miles distant from the Legations. There, Tibet calls to me
again.
For years I have dreamt of far-away Kum-Bum without having dared hope I would
ever get there. Yet the journey is decided. I will cross the whole of China to reach its
north-western frontier into Tibetan land.
I join a caravan composed of two rich lamas and their respective retinues, who are
returning to Amdo, a Chinese trader of the remote Kansu province with his ser-
vants, and a few monks and laymen who are
glad to benefit from the protection that numbers ensure on the unsafe roads.
The journey is most picturesque. Besides other incidents my travelling companions
supply abundant matter for amazement.
One day, the gigantic head of our caravan entertains some Chinese harlots at the
inn where we have put up. Slender and short, clad in pale-green pants and pink
coats, they enter the lama's room like a family of Tom Thumbs going into the Ogre's
den.
The "lama" is a ngagspa, a follower of the very heterodox sect of the magicians,
scarcely belonging to the clergy, and a married man.
A harsh and noisy bargaining takes place with the door wide open. The cynical, yet
candid terms of the borderer of Koko-nor wilderness are translated into Chinese by
his imperturbable secretary-interpreter. Finally, five Chinese dollars are accepted
as honorarium; one of the dolls stays over night.
Our libertine companion is also hot tempered. Another day he quarrels with a Chi-
nese officer. The soldiers of a neighbouring post invade our inn, guns in hand. The
lama calls his retainers, who arrive with their own guns. The inn-keeper falls pros-
trate at my feet beseeching me to intervene.
With the help of the Chinese trader, a member of our travelling party, who knows
Tibetan and acts as my interpreter, I succeed in convincing the soldiers that it is
beneath their dignity to pay the least attention to the stupid actions of a barbarian
from the Koko-nor wilds.
Then I remonstrate with the lama against a man of his rank compromising himself
with vulgar soldiers.
Peace is restored.
I become acquainted with civil war and robbery. I endeavour to nurse wounded men
left without help. One morning I see a bunch of heads – those of newly beheaded
robbers – hung above the door of our inn. That sight arouses philosophical thoughts
about death in my placid son, which he quietly expounds to me.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  59
•••

The road ahead of us is blocked by the fighting troops.
I think I shall be able to avoid the vicinity of the battles by going to a town named
Tungchow situated several miles away from the direct road to Sian-fu.
The day after my arrival Tungchow is besieged. I could watch storming enemies
climbing the city walls on high ladders, while defenders hurled stones down on
them. I seemed to be living in an ancient picture depicting the wars of olden times.
I escape from the besieged town during a tempest when the army remains shel-
tered on the other side of the walls. My cart rushes madly through the night; we
arrive at the shore of a river beyond which we expect to be in safety. We call the
ferry-man. For answer, shots are fired at us from the other bank.
I have an amusing remembrance of a tea-party with the governor of Shensi. The
enemy surrounds the city. Tea is served by soldiers with guns on their shoulders
and revolvers in their belts, ready to resist an attack that may occur at any minute.
Yet, the guests talk calmly with that exquisite and apparently serene courtesy which
is one of the fruits of the old Chinese education.
We discuss philosophical questions, one of the officials speaks French perfectly
and acts as my interpreter. Whatever the feelings of the governor and his party may
be in this tragic situation, their faces remain smiling. The conversation around the
tea-table is that of litterati enjoying the intellectual game of exchanging subtle
thoughts in a dispassionate way.
How wonderfully refined and civilized are the Chinese and how lovable, in spite of
the faults that can be found in them!
I came out, at last, from the troubled area. I am in Amdo, settled in the precinct of the
Pegyai Lama's palace, in the Kum-Bum monastery. (...) Again, I plunge into Tibetan
life.
"Salutation to the Buddha.
In the language of the gods and in that of the lus,61
In the language of the demons,
and in that of the men,
In all the languages which exist,
I proclaim the Doctrine."
A few lads stand on the flat roof of the assembly hall, they have hastily recited the
liturgic formula and, simultaneously, lift the conches to their lips. Each of them take
turn at breathing, while his companions continue to blow. And so is produced an
uninterrupted bellowing whose sonorous waves, rising and falling in successive
crescendi and diminuendi spread over the still sleeping monastery.
Above the peristyle of the hall the young novices, wrapped in the clerical toga, are
silhouetted on the bright starry sky like a row of unearthly dark beings who have
alighted to call the dead from their slumbers. And, truly, the silent gompa with its
many low-roofed whitewashed houses appears, in the night, as a vast necropolis.
The musical summons dies away. Moving lights appear through the windows of the
princely garbas62 and noises arise from the tashas63 squatting around them. Doors
61.Snake demi-gods who live in the lakes and the ocean and are said to be the owners of fabulous wealth.)
62.Grand Lama's mansions.
•
•
60
•

•••

open, a hurried stamping of feet is heard in all the streets and avenues of the
monastic city: the lamas are going to the morning assembly.
As they reach the precincts of the hall, the sky grows pale, the day breaks. Taking off
their felt boots which they leave outside, piled here and there, each of them hastens
towards his place.
In large monasteries, the gathering monks number several thousands. A strange,
shabby, ill-smelling crew, offering a strange contrast to the sumptuousness of the
gold brocade vests worn by the dignitaries and the jewelled cloak and rod of office
of the tsogs chen shalngo, the elected ruler of the gompa.
Hanging from the high ceiling, from the galleries and against the tall pillars, scrolls
of painting show countless Buddhas and deities, while a host of other worthies
saints, gods and demons, may be vaguely discerned on the frescoes which deco-
rate the walls of the dark edifice.
At the bottom of the hall, behind rows of butter lamps, shine softly the gilded images
of former Grand Lamas and the massive silver and gold reliquaries which contain
their ashes or mummified bodies. A mystic atmosphere envelops men and things,
veiling all vulgar details, idealizing the attitudes and the faces. Whatever knowledge
one may have acquired regarding the shortcomings of many of the monks assem-
bled there, the sight of the assembly itself is most impressive.
Now, every one is seated cross-legged, motionless, the lamas and officials on their
thrones whose heights vary according to their rank, and the common ecclesiastic
folk on long benches nearly on the level of the floor.
Chanting begins, deep toned in a slow rhythm. Bells, wailing gyalings,64 thundering
ragdong,65, tiny drums and big drums on which the cadence is beaten, at times
accompany the psalmody.
The little novices, seated at the extremity of the benches near the door, hardly dare
to breathe. They know the hundred-eyed chöstimpa66 soon detects any chatting or
playful gestures, and fear-inspiring are the rod and whip that are hung at hand, next
his high seat.
Chastisement, however, is not for little boys only and full-grown members of the reli-
gious Order may well receive at times their good share of it.
I have witnessed queer performances of that kind. One of them took place in a mon-
astery of the Sakya sect during a solemn festival.
Several hundred monks were assembled in the tsokhan67 and the usual liturgy and
music was going on, when three men communicated something to each other by
gesture. As they were not seated on the front bench, they thought themselves suffi-
ciently screened by the monks placed in front of them. The slight motion of their
hands and the looks they exchanged would, they believed, not be noticed by the
chöstimpa. But most likely, the patron gods of the lamaseries invest these stern offi-
63.Houses of ordinary monks.
64.A musical instrument like a hautboy.
65.A kind of huge Theban trumpet.
66.An official who enforces discipline in the gompa, especially during the religious ceremonies.
67.Assembly hall
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  61
•••

cials with a supernormal keenness of sight: the chöstimpa had seen the culprits and
started towards them.
He was a tall, dark Khampa68 with athletic features, and standing on his high seat,
as on a pedestal, looked like a bronze statue. Majestically, he took down his whip,
descended from his throne and strode across the hall with the air of a destroying
angel.
He passed before me, tucking his toga above his elbows. The whip which he
clutched in his large hand was made of several leather ropes, each the size of a
forefinger and ended by a knot.
Having reached the place where the culprits awaited their unavoidable chastise-
ment, he grasped their necks from behind, one after the other, lifting them brutally
from the bench.
It being impossible even to think of escape, the resigned fellows moved to the pas-
sage between the rows of monks and there prostrated themselves, their forehead
against the floor.
A few strokes of the whip sounded on the back of each one and the fearful person-
age, with the same supreme dignity of demeanour, returned to his seat.
However, only minor offences, as breach of silence incorrect attitude, etc., are pun-
ished in the assembly hall. More severe penalties are carried out elsewhere.
A much appreciated intermission cuts the long service: tea is brought in steaming
hot, flavoured with butter and salt, according to the Tibetan taste. It is carried in
large wooden buckets whose bearer walk along the rows. Each trapa produces his
own bowl, kept till then under his vest next his skin. The bowls are of special pat-
terns which vary according to the sects.
No china or silver ornamented bowls are allowed at the assembly. The highest dig-
nitaries must use a plain wooden one. Yet even that rule, meant as a symbolic
remembrance of the renunciation and poverty enjoined by the original Buddhist dis-
cipline, is avoided by the astute lamas. The bowl of the richest among them is truly
in wood, but some of these wooden utensils, made of special timbers out of the
excrescences that grow on the trunk of certain trees, are highly prized and may cost
as much as the equivalent of £6 in local currency.
In wealthy gompas, the tea is generously buttered and the monks bring with them,
to the assembly, a small pot in which they blow a certain quantity of the butter that
rises to the surface of the liquid. This they use at home or sell to be put again in tea
or to fill the lamps used in the house. Not the altar lamps, for which new butter is
required.
Trapas bring also some tsampa69 from their own houses, and this flour, together
with the tea provided free, constitutes their breakfast.
Upon certain days, tsampa and a piece of butter are distributed with the tea, or a
soup served instead of tea, or even the meal includes both tea and soup.
68.A native of Kham, in Eastern Tibet.
69.Flour made with roasted barley, which is the staple food of all Tibetans.
•
•
62
•

•••

The inmates of the famous lamaseries enjoy a rather large number of these special
breakfasts offered by rich pilgrims or by wealthy Grand Lamas belonging to the
monastery itself.
On such occasions, hills of tsampa and huge heaps of pieces of butter, sown in
sheep's stomachs, fill the gompa's kitchen to overflowing. The spectacle is still
"greater" when it is a question of soup, for then a number of sheep's carcases
amounting sometimes to several hundred are cut up for the gargantuan broth.
While living in Kum-Bum and in other monasteries – though, as a woman, I was not
allowed to take part at the monastic banquet – a pot full of the special dainty of the
day was brought to my house whenever I wished.
It was in that way that I became acquainted with a certain Mongolian dish made of
mutton, rice, Chinese dates, butter, cheese, curds, sugar-candy, and various other
ingredients and spices, all boiled together.
This was not the only sample of their culinary science with which the lamaist "chefs"
treated me.
A distribution of money takes place, sometimes, during the meal. Mongolians
greatly outdo Tibetans in their liberality to the clergy. I have seen some of them
leave more than ten thousand Chinese dollars at the Kum-Bum monastery during
their visit.
So, day after day, in the frosty morning or the warm summer dawns, that peculiar
lamaist matins is performed in countless gompas all over the immense territories70
of which Tibet itself is but a small part.
Each morning, half-awake lads, together with their elders, are bathed in that curious
atmosphere which is a blend of mysticism, gastronomic preoccupations and antici-
pations of a dole. That beginning of the day in the gompa gives us an idea of the
character of the whole lamaist monastic life. In the latter we find also, always
present, the same ill-assorted elements:
subtle philosophy, commercialism, lofty spirituality and eager pursuit of coarse
enjoyments! And these ar so closely interwoven that one endeavours in vain to
completely disentangle them.
Youngsters brought up amongst these conflicting streams of influence yield to one
or other of the according to their natural propensities and the way in which they are
directed by their masters. Out of that early, rather incoherent monastic training,
issue a small élite of litterati, a number of idle, dull, sleepy fellows, wanton brag-
garts, and a few mystics who resort to lonely hermitages and life-long meditations.
The majority of the Tibetan trapas and lamas do not, however, belong exclusively to
any of these different classes, they rather harbour in their mind – at least in potenti-
ality – all of these various characteristics, and, according to the circumstances, one
or another appear on the stage to play its part.
Plurality of personalities in the apparently single individual is, of course, not peculiar
to Tibetan Lamas but it exists in them in a remarkably high degree, and on that
account their discourses and behaviour provide the attentive observer with contin-
ual matter for wonder.
70.The whole of Mongolia, parts of Siberia, of Manchuria and even of European Russia.)
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  63
•••

Tibetan Buddhism differs widely from Buddhism as seen in Ceylon, Burma and
even China or Japan. So, also, lamaist monastic dwellings have their own quite
peculiar aspect. As I have already mentioned, in Tibetan language, a monastery is
called a gompa71 that is to say a "house in the solitude," and this name is entirely
justified.
Proudly isolated on summits beaten by the wind amidst wild landscapes, Tibetan
gompas look vaguely aggressive, as if bidding defiance to invisible foes, at the four
corners of the horizon. Or, when squatting between high mountain ranges, they
often assume a disquieting air of laboratories where occult forces are manipulated.
That twofold appearance corresponds to a certain reality. Though nowadays the
thoughts of the monks may be mostly occupied by mercantile and other vulgar
cares, Tibetan gompas were not, originally, intended for such earthly-minded folk.
The hard conquest of a world other than that perceived through the senses, tran-
scendental knowledge, mystic realizations, mastery over occult forces, such were
the aims for the pursuit of which were built the lamaist towering citadels and those
enigmatic cities concealed in the maze of snowy hills. Yet nowadays mystics and
magicians must be looked for mostly out of the monasteries. In order to escape an
atmosphere that has become too much permeated by material cares and pursuits,
they emigrate to more remote, inaccessible places, and the discovery of hermit-
ages entails, sometimes, all the hardships of a real exploration. Nevertheless, with
a very few exceptions, anchorites begin life as novices in the regular religious
Order.
The boys whom their parents destine for a clerical life are taken to the monastery at
the age of eight or nine. They are given as wards to a monk of their own family par-
entage, or, failing a relative in the monastery to some intimate friend. As a rule, the
tutor of the novice is his first teacher and, in many cases, his only one.
However, wealthy parents, who can afford generous recognition to the tuition of an
erudite monk, either entrust the guardianship of their sons to such a one, or make
an arrangement to the effect that the lads be sent to him to be taught at appointed
hours. Sometimes, also, they beg for their sons the favour of being admitted as
boarders in the house of an ecclesiastic dignitary. In that case, the latter will more or
less supervise the youths' education.
These novices are supported by their parents, who send to their tutor's house the
usual supply of butter, tea, tsampa and meat.
Beside substantial provisions, rich Tibetans send to their sons various dainties:
cheese, dried fruits, sugar, molasses, cakes, etc. Such treasures play a great part in
the everyday life of the boys lucky enough to possess them. They allow of countless
bartering, and many services can be bought from poor and gourmand fellow-stu-
dents with a handful of shrunk, stone-like apricots, or a few bits of desiccated mut-
ton.
Young Tibetans begin, in that way, the apprenticeship in the tricks of trade while
they are spelling out the first pages of religious treatises. One may guess that their
progress in the former science is, often, more rapid than in the latter.
71.Spelling dgon pa.
•
•
64
•

•••

Entirely destitute boys become geyog72 that is to say that in exchange for menial
work, they get teaching and sometimes also food and clothing at the house of a
monk. Needless to add that, in this case, lessons are, as a rule, rare and brief! The
professor, who is often illiterate or nearly so, can only teach the lads to memorize
parts of the liturgic recitations, which they mangle dreadfully, and whose meaning
they will never understand.
Numbers of geyog remain without being taught anything at all. It is not that their
work as servants is heavy, but the carelessness natural to their age prevents them
from asking for lessons which are not imposed on them, and they spend their many
leisure hours playing with other little fellows of their own condition.
As soon as they are admitted to a monastery the novices have a share in the
income of the gompa73 and in the gifts made by the devotees to the community.
If, when growing older, the novice feels inclined to study and if circumstances allow,
he may seek admission to one of the monastic colleges. There are four of them in
all, large lamaseries.
As for the youths who belong to smaller gompas where no such colleges exist, they
may at any time get leave to go and study elsewhere.
The subjects taught are: Philosophy and Metaphysics in the Tsen ñid college; Ritual
and Magic in the Gyud college; Medicine, according to Chinese and Indian meth-
ods, in the Men college; and the Sacred Scriptures in the Do college.
Grammar, arithmetic and several other sciences are taught outside of these
schools by private professors.
Both junior and senior students of philosophy hold discussions at regular dates.
Often the latter take place in the open, and in all large lamaseries a shady garden,
surrounded by walls, is reserved for that purpose.
Ritualistic gestures accompany the controversies and are a lively part of it. There
are peculiar ways of turning one's rosary around one's arm, clapping one's hands
and stamping when putting a question: there are other prescribed ways of jumping
when giving an answer or replying to one interrogation by another. And so, though
the words exchanged are usually but quotations, and only do honour to the memory
of the controversialists, their antics and challenging attitudes create the illusion of
passionate debates.
Yet, all members of the Philosophical College are not mere parrots. Amongst them
one finds eminent litterati and subtle thinkers. They too can quote for hours from
countless books, but they are also able to descant on the import of the old texts and
bring forward the results of their own reflections.
A noteworthy feature of these public contests is that, at the end of them, he who has
been acknowledged the victor is carried round the assembly riding on the shoulders
of his defeated opponent.
The College of Ritualistic Magic is generally the most sumptuously housed of the
gompa's scholastic institutions, and its Fellows, called gynd pas, are held in high
72."Servant of virtue" or "virtuous servant."
73.As I have given in another book, “My Journey to Lhasa” a large number of details regarding the organiza-
tion of the lamaseries, their source of revenues, information about their tenants, etc., I omit them here.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  65
•••

esteem. They are believed to know the special technique which enables one to pro-
pitiate the fierce deities and subjugate evil spirits; and the protection of their monas-
teries is entrusted to them. The gyn pas belonging to the two great Gynd Colleges
that exist at Lhasa, act in the same capacity on behalf of the State. Their appointed
duty is to attract prosperity to Tibet and its ruler, as well as to shelter them from all
bad influences and malignant undertakings.
Gynd pas are also entrusted with the task of honouring and serving the aboriginal
gods or demons, whose good will or neutrality had been previously won by promis-
ing them perpetual worship and attendance to their needs. They must, also by their
magic art, keep the untamed evil spirits bound in captivity.
Though for lack of another word in the English language we are compelled to refer
to the gompas as monasteries, they do not in the least resemble a Christian monas-
tery. Excepting the fact that the inmates of the gompa are celibates and that the
monastery owns property, I hardly see a point in common between the Christian
and the Lamaist religious Orders.
As to celibacy, it must be remembered that all monks of the Ge-lugs-pa74 sect,
familiarly called "yellow cap" sect, are celibate.
But in the various "red cap" sects celibacy is only enjoined on fully ordained monks
called gelongs. Married lamas or trapas keep, outside of the gompa, a home where
their family lives. They have also a dwelling-place in their respective monasteries
where they stay occasionally, at the time of religious festivals or when retiring for a
period of religious exercises or meditation.
Wives are never allowed to cohabit with their husbands in the enclosure of a mon-
astery.
Lamaseries are meant, just as the vihäras of Ceylon or the monasteries of any Bud-
dhist country, to house people who pursue a spiritual aim. That aim is neither strictly
defined nor imposed and common to all gompa's dwellers. Humble or lofty, as it may
be, the goal of each monk remains his secret and he may endeavour to reach it by
any means he chooses. No devotional exercises in common, nor uniform religious
practices are enjoined on the inmates of the lamaseries. The only rules that exist
are of a lay character, relating to the good order, the keeping up of the monastery, or
the attendance of the members of the gompa to daily or occasional meetings.
These assemblies themselves have nothing to do with the celebration of a cult in
which each one present joins for his own sake and from which he expects good
fruits for himself. When lamaist monks meet in the assembly hall, it is, beside hear-
ing communications from the monastic authorities, to read parts of the Scriptures
for the benefit of the monastery, the State, or the supporters and occasional bene-
factors of the gompa. Such readings are credited with happy results in bringing
prosperity, averting illness and calamities, and keeping away malevolent beings.
As for the ritualistic ceremonies, all of a magic nature, they are also performed for
some aim in which the celebrants have no share. It is even believed that none can
perform them for his own sake. The most proficient gynd pas are compelled to call a
colleague when they wish to have these rites celebrated on their behalf.
74.Gelugpa
•
•
66
•

•••

Magic for personal purposes, meditation and exercises connected with spiritual life,
are accomplished privately by each monk in his own dwelling. None but the teacher
whom he has chosen has the least right to interfere in that matter. No one either has
any right to ask any account of the lama's views. He may believe whatever doctrine
he deems true, he may even be an utter unbeliever; this concerns himself only.
There is no church or chapel in the lamaist monasteries, for, as it has been
explained, no worship is done in which the laity joins or even merely attends.
Beside the assembly hall there exist a number of lha khans, that is to say "god's
houses." Each of them is dedicated to a deity or to some Buddhist worthies, histori-
cal or mythical. Those who wish it pay courteous visits to the images of these
exalted persons.
They light a lamp or burn incense in their honour salute them with three prostrations
and depart. Favours are often begged during such visits, but not always, and a num-
ber of these polite meetings are the outcome of disinterested reverence.
Before the images of the Buddha boons are not requested, for Buddhas have
passed beyond the "world of desire" and, in fact, beyond all worlds. But vows are
taken and spiritual wishes expressed such as:
"May I be, in this life or in the next one, able to distribute a quantity of alms, to
contribute efficaciously to the welfare of many," or "may I be able to understand
the meaning of Buddha's doctrine and to live accordingly."
There are a larger number than one would suppose who, when raising a small lamp
in the gesture of an offering before the Buddha's image, ask for no more than spiri-
tual insight. Though they may make but little practical effort to reach it, the mystic
ideal of salvation through enlightenment remains alive amongst Tibetans.
To the complete spiritual freedom of the lamaist monk corresponds a nearly equal
material liberty.
The members of a monastery do not live in community, but each one in his own
house or apartment, and each one according to his own means.
Poverty is not enjoined to them as it was to the early Buddhist monks. I must even
say that the lama who voluntarily would practice it would enjoy no special regard on
that account; quite the opposite. Anchorites only may indulge in that kind of "eccen-
tricity."
Yet, absolute renunciation, as India – and may be India alone – has thoroughly
understood it, is not an ideal altogether foreign to Tibetans75 are listened to with the
deepest reverence and admiration. But these stories, relating to facts which took
place in times long gone, are regarded as belonging to another world that has no
connection whatever with that of their wealthy and honoured lamas.
One may be ordained in any grade of the religious Order without becoming a mem-
ber of a monastery, though this seldom happens, and only when the candidate is of
an age to know what he is doing and intends to live as an anchorite.
75.The ascetic poet Milarespa (eleventh century), the most popular of Tibetan saints, is an instance.) nor do
they fail to pay homage to its loftiness. Stories of youths of good family who leave their home and take to
the life of religious mendicants and especially, the story of Siddhartha Gautama, the Buddha, who gave up
his estate and princely rank.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  67
•••

Admission in a gompa does not confer any right to free lodging therein. Each monk
must build his dwelling or purchase it from a previous owner, unless he inherits it
from a relative or from his own teacher. Poor monks rent a room or two in the house
of a more wealthy colleague. In the case of students and of learned or old trapa,
lodging is often granted free to them in the houses of rich lamas.
The poorest ones who, beside a shelter, need also board, engage themselves in the
service of wealthy members of the monastery. Their condition depends on their
ability; some may be clerks, others cooks, or stable boys. Those who succeed in
becoming stewards of a Tulku, often become important and wealthy persons.
Learned monks belonging to poor families may earn their livelihood as teachers, as
artists if they are gifted at painting religious pictures, as resident chaplains at the
houses of rich lamas or laymen, or by occasionally performing religious ceremonies
at householders' homes. Besides these various professions, divination, astrology,
drawing horoscopes may be reckoned amongst their sources of income.
The lama doctors create very favourable situations for themselves if they show their
skill by curing a sufficient number of distinguished people. But even with a small
amount of success, the medical profession is a lucrative one.
However, the profession which looks the most attractive to many is trade. The great
majority of those lamaists monks who are not especially religious minded, become
traders. If they lack the money needed to undertake a business of their own, they
engage them selves as secretaries, accountants, or even as mere servants of a
trader.
Transacting business, in a more or less unostentatious way, is to a certain extent
allowed in the monasteries. As for those of their members who have a really big
business they obtain leave from the authorities of the monastery to travel with their
caravan, and open shops or branches wherever they like.
One may think that trade does not fit in very well with religious pursuits, but we must
also remember a monk has very seldom chosen his own profession. Most of them
are led to the monastery as little boys, and it would be unjust to reproach them for
not following a mystic avocation which has never been their own choice.
Trading on a large scale is carried on by the lamaseries themselves as a means of
increasing their income. They barter and sell the products of their land and cattle
which they receive from their tenants. To these are added the revenue derived from
the big collections called kartik. These collections take place at regular intervals,
each year or every two or three years. The lamas resort, also, to occasional appeals
when building a new monastery, or a new temple in an already established lama-
sery, and for various other purposes. Small monasteries merely send some of their
monks in the neighbouring regions to beg alms, but in large gompas, going to kartik
takes all the forms of an expedition. Groups of trapas may go from Tibet to Mongo-
lia, spend months travelling across the country and return like triumphant warriors
with hundreds of horses, cattle, gold, silver and goods of every description, all offer-
ings from the devotees.
They have a peculiar custom of entrusting, for a time a certain amount of money, or
a quantity of goods, to an official of the monastery, who must traffic with that capital
so as to provide for certain special expenses out of his profit. As an instance, he
must supply during one year, or more, the butter needed to keep burning the lamps
•
•
68
•

•••

of a particular lha khang, or he must give a fixed number of meals to the whole com-
munity or, again, support the expenses of building repairs, horse fodder, reception
of guests and many other things. At the end of the period, be it one year or three, the
capital entrusted to him must be given back. If the man who has received it, as a
deposit, has been able to make more profit than was needed to cover his expenses,
so much the better for him, he can keep the balance. But if he has expended more
than his profit, he must pay it from his own pocket. In any case, the capital must
remain intact.
The administration of a large monastery is as complicated as the administration of a
town. Beside a population of several thousand men living between their walls, these
gompas own large estates inhabited by tenants to whom they owe protection and
over whom they have the right of justice. A number of elected officials, helped by
clerks and a kind of police body, all clerics, assume the care of these temporal
affairs.
A big personage called tsogs chen shal ngo is the elected head of the gompa. To
him belongs the infliction of punishments on those who infringe monastic rules. It is
he who grants leave, dispensations and admission to the gompa. He is assisted by
several other officials. All of them wear ceremonial cloaks adorned with precious
stones and carry massive silver sticks encrusted with golden ornaments and inlaid
with torquoise and coral.
The policemen, called dobdobs, are well worth special mention. They are recruited
amongst the athletic unlettered braggarts whose fathers have placed them as chil-
dren in the monastery when their place ought rather to be in the barracks.
Brave with the wild rashness of brutes, always on the look out for quarrels and mis-
chief, these impudent scoundrels have all the picturesque characteristics of medi-
eval ruffians.
The badge which they favour is dirt. Grease, they think, increases the martial
appearance of a man. A true brave never washes himself, nay more, he blackens
his face with the greasy soot that sticks on the bottom of the cauldrons, till he looks
like a real negro.
Sometimes poverty is responsible for the ragged garments worn by the dobdob, but
he often deliberately tears his monastic robe, to look – he thinks – more terrible.
Nearly always when putting on a new dress, his first care is to make it greasy. Tradi-
tion commands it. However costly the material may be, the dobdob kneading butter
in his black hands, spreads it all over his new clothes.
These strange fellows consider that nothing can be more elegant than a robe and a
toga which has become as shining as velvet and stiff as armour, by the careful and
constant application of dirt and filth.
The Miraculous Tree of Tsong Khapa
The monastery of Kum-Bum owes its celebrity to a miraculous tree. I borrow from
the Kum-Bum chronicles the following details about it.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  69
•••

In 1555, the Reformer Tsong Khapa, founder of the Ge-lug-spa sects,76 was born in
Amado, in North-eastern Tibet, at the place where now stands the great lamasery
of Kum-Bum.
A short time after the child's birth the Lama dubchen Karma Dorje prophesied that
his career would be an extraordinary one and advised his parents to keep the spot
where his mother had been delivered perfectly clean. A little later, a tree began to
grow there.
Even to-day, beaten earth is used as the floor in most houses of Amdo, and the
natives sleep on cushions or carpets spread on that floor. This makes it easy to
understand the tradition according to which the tree grew out of the blood that had
been spilled during the confinement and cutting of the umbilical cord.
At first the sapling did not bear any peculiar signs on its leaves, but owing to its
miraculous origin, it enjoyed some fame and was worshipped by people of the
neighbourhood. A monk built a hut next to it and lived there. This was the beginning
of the present large and rich monastery.
Many years later when Tsong Khapa had already begun his reformation work, his
mother, from whom he had been separated for a long time, wished to see him again
and sent him a letter to call him back. At that time, Tsong Khapa lived in Central
Tibet. During a mystic meditation, he understood that his journey to Amdo would
benefit nobody, and therefore he only wrote to his mother. With his letter he gave to
the messenger two pictures of himself intended for his mother and his sister, a pic-
ture of Gyalwa Senge,77 Lord of Science and Eloquence, the patron of the intellec-
tuals, and several pictures of Demchog, a deity of the tantric pantheon.
When these objects were being handed to the family of the reformer, the latter, exer-
cising his magic powers from afar, caused the picture of the deities to appear on the
leaves of the miraculous tree. The print was so neat, so perfect, according to the
legend, that the most clever artist could not have drawn them better.
With the pictures, various other marks and the "Six Writings"78 appeared on the
branches and the bark of the tree.
This is the origin of the name Kum-Bum: "hundred thousand images," by which the
monastery became known.
In the account of their journey in Tibet, the French Fathers Huc and Gabet affirm
that they have read the words Aumm Mani Padme Hum! on the leaves and the trunk
of the tree.
Now, what kind of tree did these two travellers see?
The monastery's chronicles relate that after the miraculous appearance of the
images on the tree, the latter was wrapped in a piece of silk (a "robe") and that a
temple was built around it.
Was it an unroofed one? The word chörten used in the text does not favour that
opinion, for a chörten is a monument with a needle-like top and consequently
closed.
76.Gelupka – "Yellow hats" sect. Literally Ge-lug-spa means "those who have virtuous customs."
77.More generally denominated Jampeion. His Sanskrit name is Manjushri.
78.The formula in six syllables: Aum Mani Padme Hum
•
•
70
•
The Miraculous Tree of Tsong Khapa
•••

Deprived of light and air, the tree could not but die. And as, according to the chroni-
cles, the chörten was built in the sixteenth century, the Fathers Huc and Gabet at
best could only have seen the dried skeleton of the tree. But their description
applies to a living one.
The chronicles mention also that the miraculous tree remained unchanged in winter
and summer, and that the number of its leaves was always the same.
We read again that, once upon a time, noises were heard inside the chörten in
which the tree stood. The abbot of Kum-Bum entered it, cleaned the space around
the tree, and found near to it a small quantity of liquid which he drank.
These details seem to indicate that the tree was in a closed room but seldom
entered, while the wonder of keeping its leaves during the winter79 can only be
applied to a living tree.
It is difficult to find one's way amongst these conflicting accounts.
To-day a chörten about 40 to 50 feet high80 stands in the middle of a gold-roofed
temple.
Yet, when I lived in Kum-Bum the lamas said that the shrine had been erected only a
few years ago. (Or rather rebuilt alter a fire which destroyed it.)
In front of that temple grows a shoot of the miraculous tree, surrounded by a railing,
and is venerated to a certain extent.
Another larger tree, which is also believed to have I originated from the miraculous
tree, has been transplanted into a small garden before the temple of the Buddha.
The leaves of these two trees are collected when they fall, and distributed to the
devotees.
Perhaps it is one of these two which the Fathers Huc and Gabet saw. Foreign travel-
lers who go to KumBum, as a rule, do not know the history, or even the existence, of
the tree hidden in the shrine.
Some Europeans residing in Kansu81 have told to me that they have read Aum Mani
Padme Hum! on the leaves of the living trees. However lamaist pilgrims and the
monks of the monastery (about 3,000 men) do not notice anything peculiar about
these leaves and even listen with scornful scepticism to accounts of the foreigners'
visions of the sacred trees.
Nevertheless, their modern attitude is not supported by the old chronicles, which
affirm that all people of Amdo saw the miraculous imprints on the tree when they
first appeared, about four hundred years ago.
Living Buddha
Besides the various officials, there exist, in the gompas, another class of men who,
as a rule, do not take any direct part in the business of the monastery and live more
or less aloof in their sumptuous mansions. These are the lamas Tulkus.
79.The species to which belongs the Kum-Bum tree has caducous leaves
80.In which the original tree is said to be enshrined
81.The Chinese province on the border of which Kum-Bum is situated
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  71
•••

Tulkus occupy a prominent place in Lamaism, they constitute one of its most striking
features which set it quite apart from all other Buddhist sects.
The real character of the lamas Tulkus has never been correctly defined by Western
authors and it would almost seem that they have never even suspected it. However,
the theories regarding Tulkus are well worth our attention, for they are far removed
from any belief in incarnations or transmigrating spiritual entities and, as we will
see, border upon the field of psychic phenomena.
The peculiar religious aristocracy which goes by the name of Tulkus is not of very
ancient origin. It is only after A.D. 1650 that it developed in the form which exists at
present.
The fifth Grand Lama of the Gelugspa sect,82 Lobzang Gyatso by name, had then
been newly enthroned as temporal ruler of Tibet by a Mongolian prince and recog-
nized as such by the Chinese emperor. Yet, these earthly honours failed to satisfy
the ambitious lama, and he added to them by declaring himself to be an emanation
of the Bodhisatva Chenrezigs. At the same time, he established his religious
teacher as Grand Lama of Tashilhunpo, affirming that he was a Tulku of Ödpagmed,
a mystic Buddha of whom Chenrezigs is the spiritual son.83
The example set by the lama-king encouraged the creation of Tulkus. Very soon, all
monasteries of some importance deemed it a point of honour to have, at their head,
an incarnation of one or another worthy. However, in setting himself up as a Tulku of
Chenrezigs, Lobzang Gyatso had not been entirely an innovator. Theories affording
him some support can be traced in the mahâyânist speculations regarding the mys-
tic Buddhas and their spiritual family of Bodhisatvas and human Buddhas who are
said to emanate from them.
Moreover, since the death (about A.D. 1470) of Gedundub, the disciple of the
reformer Tsong Khapa, his successors as head of the "Yellow caps" sect had been
recognized as his reincarnations. So, the Fifth Dalai Lama was therefore already a
Tulku of Gedundub when he became Chenrezig’s84 Tulku.
But even earlier, in the eleventh century, Tibetans believed in Tulkus. We read in the
biography of Milarespa, that one of his disciples, called Bhiraja, convinced that a
divine being was incarnated in his master, asked him to disclose his name.
Milarespa himself believed that his own master, the lama Marpa, was the Tulku of
Dorjee Chang. He called him by that name repeatedly, not only in his poems, but
when addressing him directly.
So, though recognized avatars were, at first, insolated cases and not in the regular
lineal succession of incarnations, they have paved the way for the Dalai Lama-
Chenrezigs and the thousands of lordly Tulkus who are nowadays to be found all
over the lamaist countries.
"Living Buddha" is a current appellation given by foreigners to lamas Tulkus. Now, in
spite of the many books on Buddhism which have been published in Western lan-
guages, there still remain a large number of Westerners who take the word Buddha
82.Yellow caps
83.Chenrezigs and Ödpagmed are, respectively, the Tibetan names of the mystic beings called in Sanskrit
Avalokiteshvara and Amithaba.
84.Chenreziig (tib.) Boddhisatva of Compassion
•
•
72
•
Living Buddha
•••

for a proper noun: the name of the founder of Buddhism. To these people, the words
"living Buddha" convey the idea of a reincarnation of Gautama the historical Bud-
dha.
There is no Tibetan, even amongst the most ignorant; villagers or herdsman, who
entertains such a false view. As for learned lamas, they agree with all other Bud-
dhists, in declaring that the Buddha Gautama85 cannot be incarnated again. The
reason of it is that Gautama has entered nirvâna, a state which precludes all possi-
bilities of reincarnation, for that which is called nirvâna is precisely a setting free
from the round of births and death.
So much for avatars of the historical Buddha. There have never been any in the past
and none exist at present.
Can there be incarnations of other Buddhas? – In fact: no. And for the same reason
– the Buddhas have entered nirvâna.
It is, indeed, because they have realized that condition that they are Buddhas. How-
ever, while in Southern Buddhist countries the title of “Buddha” is exclusively given
to the historical human Buddha, to his supposed predecessors and to his expected
successor, Maitreya, Northern Buddhists have imagined a number of symbolic and
mystic entities, certain of which are styled "Buddha." It is these who are said to
manifest themselves through avatars, and their avatars may assume other forms
than that of human being.
It follows that, according to popular belief, a Tulkus is either the reincarnation of a
saintly or peculiarly learned departed personality, or the incarnation of a non-
human entity.
The number of the former greatly exceeds that of the latter. Tulkus of non-human
entities are limited to a few avatars of mystic Buddhas, Bodhisatvas or deities, such
as the Dalai Lama, the Grand Lama of Tashilunpo, the Lady Dorje Phagmo and,
lower in rank, the Tulkus of some autochthonous gods like Pekar.
Tulkus of gods, demons and fairies86 appear especially as heroes of stories, yet
some living men and women enjoy, as such, some local renown. This category of
Tulkus is not reckoned amongst the lamaist aristocracy; one may think that it origi-
nated not in Lamaism, but in the old religion of Tibet.
Though Buddhism denies the existence of a transmigrating soul and considers the
belief in a permanent ego, as almost pernicious error, the large majority of
unlearned Buddhists have lapsed into the old Indian doctrine which represents the
jîva87 periodically "changing his worn-out body for a new one, as we cast away a
worn-out garment to clothe ourself in a new.''88
Based on that belief, lines of successive reincarnations of human worthies89 have
been recognized. These are styled “rosary of births" or rosary of bodies",90 or more
politely kutreng.91 because they are linked together like the beads of a rosary.
85.Sakya Thubpa as he is called in Tibet
86.Khadhomas
87.Self
88.Bhagavad Gîtâ, II, 22.
89.ibid
90.Kyai treng (spelt:skye hphreng)
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  73
•••

When the Tulku is considered as the incarnation of a god or the emanation of a spir-
itual entity who co-exists with him, the reason afforded by "the self changing his
flesh garment" does not explain his nature. But average Tibetans do not think
deeply, and for all practical purposes Tulkus of celestial personages are considered
as true reincarnations of their predecessors.
The ancestor of a line of purely human Tulkus is called ku kongma, he is generally –
but not necessarily – a lama.
Amongst the exceptions I may mention the father and mother of the reformer Tsong
Khapa. Both reincarnate in male children who become monks and as lamas, have
their seat at Kum-Bum monastery. The lama who is held to be the reincarnation of
Tsong Khapa's father is called Aghia tsang and is the lord of the monastery. When I
lived at Kum-Bum, he was a boy in his tenth year.
There exist also nuns who are Tulkus of departed saintly ladies or goddesses.
By the by, I may say that it is a cause of amusement for the observer to remark how
intelligence and holiness often seem to become exhausted in a succession of incar-
nations. It is not unusual to find an utterly stupid fellow as the supposed embodi-
ment of some eminent thinker, or to see an earthly minded epicure recognized as
the incarnation of a mystic anchorite famous for his austerity.
The reincarnation of the Tulkus cannot astonish people who believe in a transmi-
grating ego. According to that view, we all are Tulkus, for the self, now embodied in
our present form, cannot but have existed previously in other forms. The only pecu-
liarity with Tulkus is that they are reincarnations of remarkable personalities, that
they, sometimes, remember their previous lives and are able, at the time of death, to
choose and make known the place of their next birth and their future parents.
However, some lamas see a complete difference between the process of reincarna-
tion in the case of common men and that of the enlightened ones. Men, they say,
who have practiced no mental training, who live like animals, yielding thoughtlessly
to their impulses, are like travellers who wander over the world without any fixed
purpose. Such a man sees a lake in the east, and, being thirsty, hurries away to the
water. When nearing the shore, he perceives the smell of smoke. This suggests the
presence of a house or a camp. It would be pleasant, he thinks, to get hot tea
instead of water, and a shelter for the night. So the man leaves the lake without hav-
ing actually reached its shore and proceeds to the north, the smoke coming from
that direction. On his way, before he has yet discovered any houses or tent, threat-
ening phantoms spring up before him.
Terrified, the wanderer turns away from the fearful beings and runs for life towards
the south. When he deems that he has gone far enough to be safe, he stops to rest.
Now, other wanderers pass who tell him of some blissful land of joy and plenty that
they intend to reach. Full of enthusiasm, the vagrant joins the party and goes off to
the west. And on the road he will be tempted many times to change his direction
again before seeing the enchanted country.
So continually roaming at random all his life, that simpleton will reach no goal what-
ever. Death will overtake him on the road, and the conflicting forces of his disordi-
nated activity will be scattered to the four winds. The co-ordinated amount of
91.Spelt: sku hphreng
•
•
74
•
Living Buddha
•••

energy92 necessary to determine the continuation of a same current of force not
having been produced, no Tulkus can arise.
On the contrary, the enlightened one is likened to a traveller well aware of the goal
which he means to reach, well informed, also, of its geographical position and the
roads that lead to it. The mind unflinchingly fixed on his aim, indifferent to the vari-
ous mirages alla allurements of the roadside, this man controls the forces begotten
by his concentration of mind and his bodily activity. Death may dissolve his body on
the path, but the psychic energy of which that body is both creator and instrument,
will remain coherent. Pushing forward towards the same goal, it will provide itself
with a new material instrument, that is to say with a new form which is a Tulku.
Here we meet with different views. Some lamas think that the subsisting subtile
energy attracts elements of congenial essence and thus becomes the nucleus of a
new being. Others say that the disembodied force joins an already existing being,
whose material and mental dispositions, acquired in previous lives, provide a har-
monious union.
Needless to say that several criticisms and objections may be brought forward
against these theories, but the present book is meant only to relate lamaist opinions
and not to discuss them. I can only say that all the views I have mentioned are con-
sistent with a number of old Tibetan stories whose heroes determine, by an act of
will,93 the nature of their rebirth and the course of action of their future avatar. This
shows that similar theories have been widely spread among Tibetans for a long
time.
In spite of the part which a conscious purpose plays in bringing about the continua-
tion of a line of Tulkus, one must beware of thinking that the composition of the new
personality is arbitrarily produced. The determinist idea is too strongly rooted in the
mind even of the wildest Tibetan herdsmen to allow of such an idea. Laws are said
to be at work during the whole process which proceeds according to natural attrac-
tions and repulsions.
More learned lamaists hold another view regarding the nature of Tulkus. This is, in
fact, the only truly orthodox one, which fully agrees with the very meaning of the
term Tulku.
The word Tulku means a form created by magic, and in accordance with that defini-
tion, we must consider the Tulkus as phantom bodies, occult emanations, puppets
constructed by a magician to serve his purpose.
I cannot do better than quote, here, the explanation of Tulkus given to me by the
Dalai Lama
As I have related it in the first chapter of the present book, I met the Dalai Lama in
1912 when he was living in the Himalayas, and asked him several questions regard-
ing lamaist doctrine to which he first answered orally. Afterward, in order to avoid
misunderstandings he told me to write a list of new questions on the points which
still appeared to me obscure. To these he gave written answers. The present quota-
tion is taken from the document with which the Dalai Lama favoured me.
92.In Tibetan Tsal or shugs.
93.According to lamaists, that will is determined, depends on causes.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  75
•••

"A Bodhisatva94 of himself in thousands millions of worlds. He may create not
only human forms, but any forms he chooses, even those of inanimated objects
such as hills, enclosures, houses, forests, roads, bridges, etc. He may produce
atmospheric phenomena as well as the thirst-quenching beverage of
immortality.”95
"In fact," reads the conclusion, "there is no limit to his power of phantom
creation."
The theory sanctioned in these lines by the highest authority of official Lamaism is
identical with that expounded in the mahâyânist literature, where it is said that an
accomplished Bodhisatva is capable of effecting ten kinds of magic creations.
The power of producing magic formations, Tulkus or less lasting and materialized
tulpas, does not, however, belong exclusively to such mystic exalted beings. Any
human, divme or demoniac being may be possessed of it. The only difference
comes from the degree of power, and this depends on the strength of the concen-
tration and the quality of the mind itself.
The Tulkus of mystic entities co-exist with their spiritual parent. For instance, while
the Dalai Lama, who is Chenrezigs' Tulku, lives at Lhasa, Chenrezigs himself – so
Tibetans believe – dwells in Nankai Potala, an island near the Chinese coast.96
The Dhyani Buddha Ödpagmed, of whom the Tashi (Panchen) Lama is the Tulku,
resides in the Western Paradise, Nub dewachen.
Men, also, may co-exist with their magic progeny. King Srong bstan gampo and the
warrior chieftain Gesar of Ling are illustrations of this. In our own days it is said that
when he fled from Shigatze, the Tashi Lama left, in his stead, a phantom perfectly
resembling him who played his part so thoroughly and naturally that every one who
saw him was deceived. When the lama was safe beyond the border, the phantom
vanished.97
The three men here mentioned are themselves Tulkus, but according to lamaists,
that circumstance does not preclude the further creation of emanations. These
spring from one another and there exist denominations for emanations of the sec-
ond or the third degree.98
It may happen that the self-same defunct lame, multiplying himself post-mortem,
has several recognized Tulkus who are contemporaries. On the other hand, there
are lamas who are said to be Tulkus of several entities. Before dismissing the sub-
ject, it may be interesting to remind ourselves that the followers of the docetae sect,
in early Christianity, looked upon Jesus Christ as being a Tulku. They maintained
that Jesus who had been crucified was not a natural being, but a phantom created
to play that part by a spiritual entity.
94.A being who has attained the high degree of spiritual perfection immediately below that of a Buddha.) is
the basis of countless magic forms. By the power generated in a state of perfect concentration of mind he
may, at one and the same time show a phantom (tulpa) (Written: sprulpa.)
95.The latter expression I have been advised to take in both a literal and a symbolic sense.
96.Pu-to-shang island in the Choushan archipelago, off the coast of Chekiang.”
97.See the account of the Tashi Lama flight in my book, “My Journey to Lhasa.”
98.Yang Tulku emanated from a Tulku ; gsum Tulku emanated from the Tulku of a Tulku .
•
•
76
•
Living Buddha
•••

So, also, in contradiction with the orthodox tradition which tells that the historical
Buddha Gautama is the incarnation of a Bodhisatva who came down from the Tush-
ita heaven, some Buddhists have affirmed that he who is the real Buddha was never
incarnate, but that he created a phantom which appeared in India as Gautama99.
In spite of the various more or less subtle theories held about Tulkus in learned
Tibetan circles, they are considered, for all practical purposes, as real reincarna-
tions of their predecessors and the formalities regarding their recognition have
been devised accordingly.
It happens, not unfrequently, that a lama – often himself one of a line of Tulkus –
foretells, at his deathbed, the country or district where he will be reborn. Sometimes
he adds various particulars about his future parents, the situation of their house and
so on.
Contrary to the opinion prevailing in the southern schools of Buddhism, lamaists
believe that a certain time of undetermined length elapses between the death and
the rebirth of a being on the earth. In the interval, the main consciousness, that
which causes the rebirth, is wandering in the labyrinth of the bardo, (About Bardo,
See “Tibet and the Lamas” on page 4.) seeking its way.
As a rule, it is about two years100 after the death of a lama Tulku that the treasurer,
the head steward or other clerical officials of his household, begin to look for his
reincarnation. By that time the child who is that supposed "reincarnation" is usually
one or two years old. There are cases when the reincarnation is delayed, but these
are very exceptional.
If the late lama left directions regarding his rebirth, his monks pursue their
researches accordingly; if such directions are lacking, they resort to a lama Tulku
astrologer101 who points out generally in veiled and obscure sentences the country
where investigations must be made and various signs by which the child may be
known. When the Tulku to be discovered is of a high rank, one of the State oracles
may be consulted, and this is always done for the reincarnations of the Dalai Lama
and the Tashi Lama.
Sometimes a young boy is quickly found whose birth-place and other characteris-
tics answer the directions given by the late lama or the astrologer. In other cases,
years elapse without finding anyone, and some "incarnations" even remain undis-
covered. This is a cause of deep sorrow to the devotees of the Tulku, and still more
to the monks of his monastery, which, lacking its worshipful head, does not attract
the same number of pious benefactors, suppliers of feasts and gifts. Yet, while
some lament, that sad plight may be a cause of secret joy to a cunning steward who,
during the absence of a legitimate master, manages the business of the Tulku
estate on his own authority and may thus find a way to make his own fortune.
When a child is discovered who nearly answers the prescribed conditions, a lama
clairvoyant is again consulted, and if he pronounces in favour of the child the follow-
ing final test is applied.
99.The Buddhist sect which held that view was that of the Vetullaka.
100.There are, however, no fixed customs regarding that matter, circumstances decide the turn given to the
procedure.
101.Called tsispa, a calculator. It is the tsispa who draws horoscopes, discloses hidden things, etc. Any ordi-
nary monk may act as tsispa, but the discovery of a Tulku is always entrusted to another Tulku
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  77
•••

A number of objects such as rosaries, ritualistic implements, books, tea-cups102,
etc., are placed together, and the child must pick out those which belonged to the
late Tulku, thus showing that he recognizes the things which were his in his previous
life.
It sometimes happens when several children are candidates to a vacant Tulku seat,
that equally convincing signs have been noticed concerning each of them, and they
all correctly pick out the objects owned by the defunct lama. Or it sometimes occurs
that two or three clairvoyants disagree among themselves as to which is the authen-
tic Tulku.
Such cases are rather frequent when it is a question of succeeding to one of these
grand Tulkus, lords of big monasteries and large estates. Then many families are
eager to place one of their sons on the throne of the departed grandee, which brings
with it consideration and material profit.
Generally the parents of the Tulku are allowed to live in the monastery till the child
can dispense with his mother's nursing and care. Then a comfortable lodging is pro-
vided for them on the monastery land, but outside the gompa's enclosure, and they
are plentifully supplied with all they need. If the monastery has no special mansion
reserved for the parents of its grand talks, the latter are well provided for at their own
home.
Beside a grand lama Tulku, who is the lord of the monastery, the gompas often
include several other Tulkus amongst their members. In the largest of these monas-
tic cities, their number may amount to a few hundreds. Some of them rank high in
the lamaist ecclesiastic aristocracy and, in addition to their seat in their parent mon-
astery, they own mansions in other gompas and estates in Tibet or Mongolia. In
fact, to be the near relative of even the least of them is a connection profitable
enough to rouse covetousness in the heart of any Tibetan.
So countless intrigues are woven around the succession to a Tulku, and, amidst the
warlike folk of Kham or of the northern borderland, bloody feuds spring from such
passionate competitions.
Countless tales are told throughout Tibet about extraordinary proofs of memory
from previous lives and wonders worked by young Tulkus to testify their identity. We
find in them the habitual Tibetan mixture of superstition, cunning, comedy, and dis-
concerting events. I could relate dozens of them, but I prefer to confine myself to the
relation of facts connected with people whom I have personally known.
Next the mansion of the Pegyai Lama, in which I lived at Kum-Bum, was the dwelling
of a minor Tulku called Agnai tsang.103
Seven years had elapsed since the death of the last master of the place and none
had been able to discover the child in whom he had reincarnated. I do not think that
the steward of the lama's household felt greatly afflicted by that circumstance. He
managed the estate and seemed rather prosperous.
102.Each Tibetan owns a private bowl in which he alone drinks tea. That bowl mav be the wooden one of the
poor or the costly jade one with golden saucer and cover of the rich, or any of the intermediate kinds, but it
is never lent to anyone to drink in.
103.Not to be mistaken for Aghia tsang, the grand Tulku already mentioned.
•
•
78
•
Living Buddha
•••

Now it happened that in the course of a trading tour, he felt tired and thirsty and
entered a farm to rest and drink. While the housewife made tea the nierpa104 drew a
jade snuff-box from his pocket and was about to take a pinch of snuff when a little
boy who had been playing in a corner of the room stopped him and putting his small
hand on the box asked reproachfully:
"Why do you use my snuff-box?"
The steward was thunderstruck. Truly, the precious snuff-box was not his, but
belonged to the departed Agnai tsang, and though he had not perhaps exactly
intended to steal it, yet he had taken possession of it.
He remained there trembling while the boy looked at him as his face suddenly
became grave and stern with no longer anything childish about it.
"Give it back to me at once, it is mine," he said again.
Stung with remorse, and at the same time terrified and bewildered, the superstitious
monk could only fall on his knees and prostrate himself before his reincarnated
master.
A few days later, I saw the boy coming in state to his mansion. He wore a yellow bro-
cade robe105 and rode a beautiful black pony, the nierpa holding the bridle.
When the procession entered the house the boy remarked:
"Why do we turn to the left to reach the second courtyard? The gate is on our
right side."
Now, for some reason, the gate on the right side had been walled up after the death
of the lama and another one opened instead.
The monks marvelled at this new proof of the authenticity of their lama and all pro-
ceeded to his private apartment where tea was to be served.
The boy, seated on a pile of large hard cushions, looked at the cup with silver-gilt
saucer and jewelled cover placed on the table before him.
"Give me the larger china cup," he commanded. And he described one,
mentioning the very pattern that decorated it.
Nobody knew about such a cup, not even the steward, and the monks respectfully
endeavoured to convince their young master that there was no cup of that kind in
the house.
It was at that moment that, taking advantage of an already long acquaintance with
the nierpa, I entered the room. I had heard the snuff-box story and wished to see for
myself, my remarkable little new neighbour. I offered him the customary complimen-
tary scarf and a few presents. These he received with a gracious smile, but, appar-
ently following the trend of his thoughts regarding the cup, he said:
"Look better, you will find it."
104.Steward
105.As he had not yet been admitted into the religious Order, he was not yet allowed to wear the ecclesiastic
robes.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  79
•••

And suddenly, as if a flash of memory had dashed through his mind, he added
explanations about a box painted in such a colour, which was in such a place in the
store-room.
The monks had briefly informed me of what was going on and I waited with interest
to see how things would turn out.
Less than half an hour later, the set, cup, saucer and cover, was discovered in a cas-
ket that was at the bottom of the very box described by the boy.
"I did not know of the existence of that cup," the steward told me later on. "The
lama himself, or my predecessor, must have put it in that box which did not
contain anything else precious and hart not been opened for years."
I also witnessed a much more striking and fantastic discovery of a Tulku in the poor
inn of a hamlet, some miles distant from Ansi.
Roads going from Mongolia to Tibet cross, in that region, the long highway which
extends from Peking to Russia over a whole continent. So I felt annoyed but not
astonished when, reaching the inn at sunset, I found it crowded with visitors from a
Mongolian caravan.
The men looked rather excited as if something unusual had just happened. Yet, with
their customary courtesy still increased by the sight of the lamaist monastic gar-
ments which lama Yongden and I wore, the travellers immediately gave up a room
for my party and made room for my beasts in the stable.
As Yongden and I remained in the courtyard, looking at the camels of the Mongo-
lians, the door of one of the rooms opened and a tall handsome youth, poorly clad in
a Tibetan robe, stood on the threshold and asked if we were Tibetans. We
answered in the affirmative.
Then a well-dressed elderly lama appeared behind the young man and he, also,
addressed us in Tibetan.
As usual, we exchanged questions about the country from which we came and
where we were going. The lama said that he had intended going to Lhasa by the
Suchow winter road, but now, he added, it was no longer necessary to take this jour-
ney.
The Mongolian servants who were in the courtyard nodded their assent.
I wondered what could have caused these people to change their minds while en
route, but as the lama retired to his room, I did not deem it polite to follow and ask
explanations that were not offered.
However, later in the evening, when they had inquired about Yongden and me from
our servants, the Mongolians invited us to drink tea with them and I heard the whole
story.
The handsome young man was a native of the far distant Ngari province106. He
seemed to be somewhat of a visionary. At least, most Westerners would have so
described him, but we were in Asia.
Since his early youth, Migyur – this was his name – had been restless, haunted by
the queer idea that he was not where he ought to be. He felt himself a foreigner in
106.in South-western Tibet
•
•
80
•
Living Buddha
•••

his village, a foreigner in his family. In dreams, he saw landscapes that did not exist
in Ngari: sandy solitudes, round felt tents, a monastery on a hillock. And even when
awake, the same subjective images appeared to him and superimposed them-
selves on his material surroundings, veiling them, creating around him a perpetual
mirage
He was only a boy when he ran away, unable to resist the desire of finding the reality
of his vision. Since then, Migyur had been a vagrant, working a little here and there
on his way, begging most times, wandering at random without being able to control
his restlessness or settle anywhere.
To-day he had arrived from Aric, tramping aimlessly as usual.
He saw the inn, the encampment of the caravan, the camels in the courtyard. With-
out knowing why, he crossed the gate, and found himself face to face with the lama
and his party. Then, with the rapidity of lightning, past events flashed through his
mind. He remembered that very lama as a young man, his disciple, and himself as
an already aged lama, both on that very road, returning from a pilgrimage to the
holy places of Tibet and going home to the monastery on the hillock.
He reminded the lama of all these things, giving minute details regarding their jour-
ney, their lives in the distant monastery and many other particulars.
Now the aim of the Mongolians' journey was precisely to beg advice from the Dalai
Lama as to the best way of discovering the Tulku head of their monastery, whose
seat had been unoccupied for more than twenty years, in spite of persevering
efforts to find his reincarnation.
These superstitious people were ready to believe that the Dalai Lama, through his
supernormal power, had detected their intention and out of kindness had caused
their meeting with their reincarnated lord.
The Ngari wanderer complied immediately with the usual test, picking out without
hesitation or mistake among a number of similar objects, those that had belonged to
the late lama.
No doubt subsisted in the mind of the Mongolians. On the morrow, I saw the cara-
van retracing its steps, moving away to the slow pace of the big camels and disap-
pearing on the skyline into the Gobi solitudes. The new Tulku was going to meet his
fate.
; ; ;
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  81
•••

Chapter IV: Dealing with Ghosts and Demons
The Lugubrious Communion
A Rather large number of Tibetan occultists seem delight in lugubrious musing and
practices in which corpses play a prominent part. Vulgar sorcerers only seek by this
means to acquire magic powers, but a number of more enlightened men affirm that
esoteric teachings and a special kind of spiritual training is thus hidden under the
veil of symbols and conventional language.
I need not say that this repugnant mysticism has nothing at all in common with Bud-
dhism. It is also foreign to true Lamaism, though a few lamas secretly yield to its
bizarre attraction. Its origin must be sought in the light of Tantric Hinduism and the
doctrines of the ancient Bönpo shamanists.
The following story will be sufficient to illustrate this dark side of Tibetan occultism. It
was told me at Cherku only a few years after the death of those concerned and by a
man who had known them personally.
The lama who plays the principal part was the abbot of Miniagpar Lhakhang near
Tachienlu, know by the name of Chogs Tsang. He is the author of a number of
prophecies regarding events which are to take place in Tibet, China and the world at
large. He was regarded as having supernormal powers, among others of being able
to cause death.
Chogs Tsang used to behave in a strange, often quite incomprehensible way, and
was addicted to drinking. He lived for some time with the Tibetan chieftain of
Tachienlu who bears the title of gyalpo.107
Once, while talking and drinking with his host, the lama asked for the sister of the
master of horse as his wife. This official, who happened to be present, refused his
consent.
The lama was so enraged that he violently threw the precious jade cup in which he
had drunk on the ground, breaking it into pieces, and cursed the equerry, declaring
that after two days he would die.
The gyalpo did not approve of the lama's request for his officer's sister and had no
faith in the power of his curse. The equerry was young and healthy, he argued. Still
the lama maintained that he would die and, indeed, two days later the man passed
away.
107.The king
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  82
•••

Then the gyalpo and the parents of the young maid became frightened and has-
tened to bring the girl to the lama. But he refused to take her.
"She would have been useful," he said, "for obtaining an object which would
have benefited a large number of beings; but the opportunity has passed, and I
do not care for a wife."
This story resembles that of Dugpa Kunlegs, mentioned in the first chapter. It is a
common theme of Tibetan tales.
Now one evening this same Chogs Tsang unexpectedly called up one of his trapas.
"Saddle two horses, we are going," he ordered him.
The monk remonstrated with the Lama, saying that it was already late and that it
would be better to wait the next morning.
"Do not answer back," said Chogs Tsang laconically. "Let us go."
They start, ride in the night and arrive at some spot near a river. There they alight
from their horses and walk towards the river bank.
Though the sky is completely dark a spot on the water is "lighted by sun rays," and in
that illuminated place a corpse is floating up-stream, moving against the current.
After a while it comes within reach of the two men.
"Take your knife, cut a piece of the flesh and eat it," commands Chogs Tsang to his
companion. And he adds:
"I have a friend in India who sends me a meal every year at this date."
Then he himself begins to cut and to eat.
The attendant is struck with terror, he endeavours to imitate his master but does not
dare to put the morsel into his mouth and hides it in his ambag.108
Both return to the monastery where they arrive at dawn.
The lama says to the monk:
"I wished you to share the favour and the most excellent fruits of this mystic
meal, but you are not worthy of it. That is why you have not dared to eat the piece
which you have cut off and hidden under your dress."
Hearing these words the monk repents of his lack of courage and puts his hand into
his ambag to take his share of the corpse, but the piece of flesh is no longer there.
This fantastic story accords with certain information given me with great reserve by
some anchorites belonging to the Dzogschen sect.
There exist, so they said, certain human beings who have attained such a high
degree of spiritual perfection, that the original material substance of their bodies
has become transmuted into a more subtle one which possesses special qualities.
Few people can discern the change which has come over these exceptional men. A
morsel of their transformed flesh, when eaten, will produce a special kind of ecstasy
and bestow knowledge and supernormal powers upon the person partaking of it.
108.The breast pocket formed by the wide Tibetan robe tied with a belt.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  83
•••

A hermit told me that when a naljorpa, through his clairvoyance, has discovered one
of these wonderful beings, he sometimes begs from him the favour of being
informed of his death in order that he may, obtain a small portion of his precious
body.
Might fervent candidates for this gruesome communion not sometimes grow too
impatient and refuse to wait for the natural death of the holy one? – Might they not
hurry it forward? – one of those who disclosed this secret rite to me, almost seemed
to confess that the thing had happened. However, he was careful to mention the
attenuating circumstance that the victim consented to the sacrifice.
The Corpse Who Dances
Another mysterious rite is called rolang.109 Traditions and ancient chronicles relate
that, before the introduction of Buddhism into Tibet, it was practiced by the Bönpo
shamans during the funeral ceremony. However, the brief movement made by a
dead body in such circumstances cannot be compared with what happens in the
course of the horrible and grotesque têtê-à-téte that Tibetan occultists depict.
There exist several kinds of rolang. These must not be mistaken for the trong jug110
rite which causes the "spirit" of another being to pass into a corpse and apparently
resuscitate it, though the corpse is not animated by its original occupant.
One of these lugubrious rolang was described to me as follows by a ngagspa who
said he had practiced it himself.
The celebrant is shut up alone with a corpse in a dark room. To animate the body, he
lies on it, mouth to mouth, and while holding it in his arms, he must continually
repeat mentally the same magic formula111 excluding all other thoughts.
After a certain time the corpse begins to move. It stands up and tries to escape; the
sorcerer, firmly clinging to it, prevents it from freeing itself. Now the body struggles
more fiercely. It leaps and bounds to extraordinary heights, dragging with it the man
who must hold on, keeping his lips upon the mouth of the monster, and continue
mentally repeating the magic words.
At last the tongue of the corpse protrudes from its mouth. The critical moment has
arrived. The sorcerer seizes the tongue with his teeth and bites it off. The corpse at
once collapses.
Failure in controlling the body after having awaked it, means certain death for the
sorcerer.
The tongue carefully dried becomes a powerful magic weapon which is treasured
by the triumphant ngagspa.
The Tibetan who gave me these details described most vividly the gradual awaken-
ing of the corpse: the first conscious look which brightened its glazed eyes and its
feeble movements slowly growing in strength until he became unable to prevent the
agitation of the jumping monster and needed all his strength to hold it. He described
his sensations when he could feel the tongue issuing from the mouth of the corpse
109.The corpse who stands up
110.Written: grong hjug.
111.This differs according to the masters.
•
•
84
•
The Corpse Who Dances
•••

and touching his own lips, and realized that the terrible moment had come when, if
he failed to conquer it, the horrible being would kill him.
Had that fantastic struggle not been purely subjective? Had it not taken place during
one of these trances which are frequently experienced by Tibetan naljorpas, which
they also voluntarily cultivate? I doubted and asked to see "the tongue."
The sorcerer showed me a desiccated blackish object which might have been" a
tongue," but it was not sufficient to prove the origin of the hideous relic.
Be that as it may, numbers of Tibetans believe that the rolang rite really takes place.
Beside corpses being revived by special rites, Tibetans believe also that any corpse
is liable to rise suddenly and harm the living. It is for this reason that dead bodies
are continually watched by some one who recites the liturgic words which prevent
that sham resurrection.
A trapa from Sepogön in the vicinity of the Salween told me the following story.
While still a boy novice, he had accompanied three lamas of his monastery to a
house where a man had died. There the lamas were to perform the daily rite for the
dead till the day appointed to carry the corpse to the cemetery. At night they had
retired to sleep in a corner of the large room where the body was kept, tied up in a
seated posture with many scarves and swathed in clothes.
"The charge of reciting the magic formulas had been entrusted to me. In the middle
of the night I was overcome with the continuous wearisome repetition and may have
dozed a few minutes. A small noise awaked me! a black cat passed by the corpse
and went out of the room. Then I heard a kind of cracking noise like tearing cloth,
and to my horror I saw the dead body moving and freeing himself from his bands.
Mad with fright, I ran out of the house but before I had escaped from the room I saw
the ghost stretching out one hand and creeping upon the sleeping men.
"In the morning the three men were found dead; the corpse had returned to his
place but the scarves were torn and the clothes lay on the floor around him."
Tibetans have great faith in such stories.
The touch of the rolang is mortal and the mischievous ghost does not fail to lay his
hand on all who are within his reach: only the lamas who perform the rites of the
dead are said to know magic words and gestures which avert that danger, by con-
trolling the corpse and causing it to sit back if it attempts to move.
We are also told of rolangs which escape fom the house where they have revived
and roam about the country. Again, others are said to disappear without leaving any
trace.
One could fill numbers of books with the stories one hears about rolangs among the
good people of Tibet.
The Enchanted Dagger
It is needless to say that "tongues of the jumping corpse," if they exist at all, are
exceptional implements of sorcery. The ritual weapons – called phurba – generally
used by lamaist magicians are made of bronze, wood or even ivory, shaped to
resemble a dagger and often beautifully chiselled or carved.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  85
•••

A true initiate in the Tibetan secret lore, however, would scoff at the sorcerer and his
repugnant practices. The power of the magic weapon does not, he thinks, depend
on the substance of which it is made but is communicated to it by the magician him-
self.
Yet, as time goes on, a certain portion of this energy remains attached to the
phurba. Its strength increases with the repeated use which is made of it in magic
rites. The inert object becomes "possessed" just as an animated being could be.
We shall read, in a following chapter, of the process employed by the ngagspas who
hold this belief.
On the other hand, it is said that the ritual implements which have served in coer-
cion rites should not be kept in the house of a layman or of an uninitiated monk, for
fear that the dangerous entities subdued by their means might use them to take
revenge upon the possessor, if he does not know how to protect himself.
To that belief I owe a few interesting objects which those who had inherited them
begged me to carry away.
One day a windfall of this kind came my way so strangely that the story is worth tell-
ing. During a journey in Northern Tibet I met a small caravan of lamas, and talking
with them according to the custom along these trails where travellers are scarce, I
learned that they were transporting a phurba which had become a source of calam-
ity.
This ritualistic implement had belonged to a lama, their master, who had recently
died. The dagger had started to work harm in the monastery itself. Two of the three
monks who had touched it, had died, and the other one broke his leg by falling from
a horse. Then the pole that held the banner of benediction, which was planted in the
courtyard of the monastery, broke, and this is considered a very bad omen.
Frightened, yet not daring to destroy the phurba for fear of greater misfortunes, the
monks had closed it up in a box. Soon after this, strange noises had been heard pro-
ceeding from the box.
They had finally decided to place the baleful object in an isolated cavern conse-
crated to a deity, but the cowherds living in that region threatened armed opposition.
They recalled the story of a phurba that had moved through the air, wounding and
killing numbers of men and animals. No one knew where nor when these wonders
had taken place, but such details are of little importance to superstitious minds. The
cowherds did not want the phurba in their neighbourhood.
The unfortunate trapas who carried the enchanted dagger wrapped in many papers
printed with charms and sealed in a casket, did not know how to get rid of it. Their
dejected countenances prevented me from laughing at their credulity. I was also
curious to look at the miraculous weapon.
"Let me see the phurba," I said, "perhaps I shall find some way of helping you."
They did not dare to take it out of the box, but after long parleys, they allowed me to
do so myself.
The phurba was a fine piece of ancient Tibetan art and I was seized with a desire to
possess it, but I knew that the trapas would not sell it for anything in the world.
•
•
86
•
The Enchanted Dagger
•••

"Camp with us for the night," I said to them, "and leave the phurba with me. I will
think it over."
My words promised nothing, but the bait of a good supper and of chatting with my
men decided the travellers to accept.
At nightfall, I went some distance from the camp ostensibly carrying the dagger
which, freed from its box, would have terrified the credulous Tibetans had I left it
with them.
When I thought I was far enough away, I stuck the enchanted weapon into the
ground and sat down on a blanket to think out a way of persuading the monks to let
me have it.
I had been there for several hours when I seemed to see the form of a lama appear-
ing near the spot where I had planted the phurba. He moved forward, bending cau-
tiously. From beneath the toga in which his rather indistinct body was wrapped, a
hand came out slowly and advanced to seize the magic dagger.
Jumping up, I grabbed it before the thief had been able to touch it.
So, I have not been the only one tempted. This man, less superstitious than his
companions, had recognized the value of the phurba and very likely hoped to sell it
secretly. He thought that I was asleep and should notice nothing. The next day, the
disappearance of the enchanted dagger would be attributed to some new occult
intervention and one more story of magic would be circulated among the faithful.
Too bad that such a clever scheme had not succeeded, but I kept the enchanted
weapon; I even grasped it so tightly that my nerves, excited by the adventure or by
the pressure of the bronze carved handle on my flesh, gave me the impression that
the dagger was feebly moving in my hand.
And now for the thief!
All around me the barren plain was empty. He must have made off when I was
stooping down to pull the dagger out of the ground.
I ran to the camp. The man who had just returned or who came back after me must
be the culprit.
I found every one sitting up and reciting religious texts for protection against the evil
powers. I called Yongden into my tent.
"Which of the monks has been missing ?" I asked him.
"No one," he answered. "They are half dead with fright. They did not even dare
to go far enough away from the tents to perform the necessities of nature. I had
to scold them."
Good! I must have been "seeing things"; but perhaps this would stand me in good
stead.
"Listen," I said to the trapas, "this is what has happened." And I told them quite
frankly about my illusion and the doubts I had conceived of their honesty.
"Surely that was our Grand Lama!" they exclaimed. "He wanted to take back his
phurba and perhaps he would have killed you if he had succeeded. Oh!
Jetsunma, you are a true gomchenma, although certain people call you a
philing.112
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  87
•••

Our tsawai lama113 was a powerful magician; yet he could not take his phurba
away from you. Keep it now, keep and it will no longer do harm to anyone."
They all spoke together, excited and terrified to think that their lama magician –
more to be feared than ever, since he belonged to another world – had passed so
close to them, and delighted, at the same time, to get rid of the enchanted dagger.
I shared in their joy but for a different reason: the phurba was mine. However, it was
only honest not to take advantage of their confused state of mind.
"Think it over," I said. "A shadow may have deceived me. I may have gone to
sleep while sitting there and been troubled by a dream."
They would have nothing of this. The lama had come, I had seen him and he had not
been able to seize the phurba; so I, by my superior power, became its legitimate
owner.
I confess that I allowed myself to be easily convinced. (...)
Practices to acquire Fearlessness – Challenging Demoniacal Beings
There is hardly any country which can vie with Tibet as to the riches, variety and pic-
turesqueness of its folklore regarding ghosts and demons. If we were to rely on pop-
ular beliefs, we should conclude that evil spirits greatly outnumber the human
population of the "Land of Snow."
Assuming thousands of different shapes, these malignant beings are said to dwell
in trees, rocks, valleys, lakes, springs, and many other places. Always bent on mis-
chief they hunt men and animals to steal their vital breath and feed upon it. They
wander for pure pleasure across forests and high barren hills and every traveller
risks being confronted by one of them at any turning of the road.
Official lamaist magicians undertake to convert, or to subdue, these dangerous
neighbours in order to stop their undesirable activity and transform them into useful
obedient servants. Sorcerers compete with them in this art, but, nearly always,
practice it with a view to using the power of the malevolent beings which they have
tamed for their own, no less evil, purposes.
As for Tibetan mystics, they patronize a certain kind of commerce with demons that
is connected with psychic training. This consists in meetings deliberately sought by
the disciple, either to challenge demoniac beings or to give them alms. These rites
are very different from those which have been described at the beginning of this
chapter. Though they, too, may sometimes appear ridiculous or even repugnant,
according to our ideas, their purpose is useful or lofty, such as liberating from fear,
awakening feelings of boundless practical compassion leading to complete detach-
ment and, finally, to spiritual illumination.
It happens, not infrequently, that credulous men who firmly believe in the strictly
objective existence of thousands of demons, betake themselves to a mystic lama
and, desirous of leading a religious life, beg to be accepted as his disciples.
112.Foreigner
113.Spiritual father
•
•
88
•
Practices to acquire Fearlessness –
•••

All these simpletons are not turned away and sent back to their village with good
advice regarding morality and the practice of good will towards every one. Some
among them, who appear capable of progressing towards enlightenment, may well
be favoured with more extended teaching.
If the lama is a true adept of the "Short Path," his first care will be to provide the new
disciple with opportunities of liberating himself from his terror of the various
demons. Lengthy explanations and demonstrations of truth and error are not part of
mystic teachers' methods. They simply place their disciples in the conditions
required to experience events and sensations that will awaken their reflection and
allow them to acquire knowledge. The extent of the profit derived from such experi-
ences depends on the pupil's intelligence.
A young man of my acquaintance was sent by his master – a lama from Amdo – to a
solitary gloomy ravine which was supposed to be haunted by evil non-human
beings. There he was told to tie himself to a tree or to a rock and at night, calling on
the ferocious Towos, which Tibetan painters show eating the brains of men, he was
to challenge them.
However terrified he might feel, he was commanded to resist the temptation of unty-
ing himself and running away. He must remain, bound to his post, until sunrise.
This is nearly a classic practice. It is enjoined on many Tibetan novices as a first
step on the mystic path.
Sometimes the disciples must remain bound for three days and three nights, or for
even a longer period, fasting, sleepless, experiencing the conditions of utter weari-
ness and starvation that so easily bring hallucinations.
Such exercises naturally at times have tragic consequences. Yongden was told a
story that illustrates this by an old lama of Tsarong, when I was travelling incognito
to Lhasa. Seated in a corner of the room, the "insignificant mamma" whom I person-
ified at that time did not miss one word of the story.
In their youth, this lama and his younger brother, called Lodö, had left their monas-
tery to follow a wandering ascetic of another region who had established himself for
a time as hermit on a hill called Phagri – a well-known place of pilgrimage situated
not far from Dayul.
The anchorite commanded the young brother to tie himself by the neck to a tree, in
a woody place which was said to be haunted by Thags yang, a demon who gener-
ally appears under the shape of a tiger, to whom the ferocious instincts of that ani-
mal are ascribed.
Once bound as a victim to the sacrificial post, the man was to imagine that he was a
cow which had been led there as a propitiating offering to Thags yang. Keeping his
thoughts concentrated on that idea and lowing now and then to identify himself
more completely with the beast, he would – if the concentration was strong enough
– reach a state of trance in which, having entirely lost the consciousness of his own
personality, he would experience the anguish of a cow in danger of being devoured.
The exercise was to last for three consecutive days and nights. Four days went by
and the novice did not return to his master. On the morning of the fifth day, the latter
said to the eldest of his disciples:
"I had a strange dream last night. Go and fetch your brother."
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  89
•••

The monk obeyed.
An appalling sight awaited him in the forest. The corpse of Lodö, torn and half
devoured, remained partly fastened to a tree, while bloody pieces lay scattered
among the surrounding bushes.
The terrified man collected the ghastly remains in his monastic toga and hastened
back to his guru.
When he reached the hut in which the latter lived with his two disciples, he found it
empty. The lama had left, taking with him all his belongings, two religious books, a
few ritualistic implements and his travelling stick with a trident at the top.
"I felt that I was becoming mad," said the old Tibetan. "That sudden departure
frightened me even more than the discovery of my brother's mangled body."
"What had our teacher dreamt? Did he know the awful fate of his disciple? Why
had he gone? (...)"
Without actually knowing any better than the afflicted monk what reasons had led
the lama to run away, I nevertheless thought that when he saw that his disciple had
not returned, he might have feared some accident had befallen the young man in
the forest haunted by wild beasts. Perhaps he had really received some kind of
mysterious information in a dream about the tragic event, and thought it prudent to
escape the anger and revenge of the victim's family.
As for the novice's death, it could be explained quite naturally. Panthers are fre-
quently found in that region, some leopards roam also in the woods. I had met two
myself a few days before hearing the story. (See My Journey to Lhasa.)
One of these animals, which the monk himself had perhaps attracted by his lowing,
might have killed him before he had time to break his bonds and defend himself.
But a very different interpretation was given to the sad story by the man who told it
and those seated around him. According to them the demon-tiger had seized upon
the offering imprudently presented to him.
The young disciple, they said, ignored the magic words and gestures which would
have protected him. And in this matter the fault of his teacher was very great, for he
ought never to have sent him to challenge the demon-tiger without arming him with
the teachings and ritualistic formula which are efficacious weapons in such cases.
But in the utmost depth of his soul the monk, wounded in his brotherly love, had a
more terrible idea which he expressed in a low and trembling voice.
"Who knows," he said "if that strange lama was not the demon-tiger himself who
had taken on a human form to attract a victim? He could not have killed my poor
brother while in human form, but at night when I was asleep, resuming his tiger
shape he ran to the forest and satisfied his ferocious craving."
The last words of the old man met with profound silence. He had probably told this
terrifying episode of his long-lost youth many times. But his audience was once
more deeply impressed.
Might it not still happen any day? Thags yang and so many other kindred beings
continue to prowl around the villages and to follow the travellers, seeking to prey
upon those who are unsufficiently protected. Every one there believed it.
•
•
90
•
Practices to acquire Fearlessness –
•••

In the large kitchen dimly lighted by the flames leaping now and then from the
hearth, a woman lifted her eyes instinctively towards the protective charms pasted
on the walls, as if she wanted to ascertain that they were still there. The grandfather
went into the next room where the evening offering lamps burnt on the family altar,
and the sweet fragrance of incense sticks he had lighted floated in to soothe our
nerves.
Although one may suppose that a number of accidents apparently of occult origin,
do actually happen during the performance of these rites, yet they can only be
exceptional. So it seems only logical that, after spending a certain amount of time
sitting in haunted places and challenging evil spirits, the disciple should come to
doubt the existence of beings which never appear.
I have questioned several lamas on this subject.
"Incredulity comes sometimes," answered a Geshes from Derge.114
"Indeed, it is one of the ultimate objects of the mystic masters, but if the disciple
reaches this state of mind before the proper time he misses some thing which
these exercises are designed to develop, that is fearlessness.
"Moreover, the teachers do not approve of simple incredulity, they deem it
contrary to truth. The disciple must understand that gods and demons do really
exist for those who believe in their existence, and that they are possessed with
the power of benefiting or harming those who worship or fear them.
"However, very few reach incredulity in the early part of their training. Most
novices actually see frightful apparitions."
I shall not venture to contradict this latter opinion a number of instances have
proved to me that it is well grounded.
Darkness, the peculiarly wild aspect of the places chosen for meeting the dreaded
evil beings, the power that Orientals possess to a high degree of visualizing their
thoughts, are sufficient to produce hallucinations. But must we classify all phenom-
ena witnessed by the celebrants of these curious rites as hallucination? Tibetans
affirm that we must not.
I had the opportunity of talking with a gomchen of Ga115 called Kushog Wanchen
about sudden deaths which occurred while calling up demons.
This lama did not appear inclined towards superstition and I thought he would agree
with my opinion on th matter.
"Those who died were killed by fear. Their vision were the creation of their own
imagination. He who does not believe in demons would never be killed by them."
I was much astonished when the anchorites replied in a peculiar tone of voice.
"According to that it must also follow that a man who does not believe in the
existence of tigers may feel confident that none of them would ever hurt him
eyed: if he were confronted by such a beast." (...)
And he continued:
114.A Geshes is a graduate, a kind of LL.D. and Ph. D. Derge is a town in the province of Kham, in Eastern
Tibet.
115.Eastern Tibet
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  91
•••

"Visualizing mental formations, either voluntarily or not, is a most mysterious
process. What becomes of these creations? May it not be that like children born
of our flesh, these children of our mind separate their lives from ours, escape our
control, and play parts of their own? (...) (See “Psychic Phenomena in Tibet –
How Tibetans Explain Them” on page 176. what is said about tulpas.)
"Must we not also consider that we are not the only ones capable of creating
such formations? And if such entities exist in the world, are we not liable to come
into touch with them, either by the will of their maker or from some other cause?
Could one of these causes not be that, through our mind or through our material
deeds we bring about the conditions in which these entities are capable of
manifesting some kind of activity?
"I will give you an illustration," he continued. "If you are living on a dry spot of
ground at some distance from the banks of a river, fishes will never approach
you. But cut a channel between the river and your dwellingplace and dig a pond
in the dry spot of ground. Then, as the water runs in it, fishes will come from the
river and you will see them moving before your eyes.
"It is only prudent to beware of opening channels without due consideration.
Few, indeed, suspect what the great store-house of the world which they tap
unconsciously, contains." And in lighter vein he concluded: "One must know how
to protect oneself against the tigers to which one has given birth, as well as
against those that have been begotten by others."
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
It is these theories and others akin to them which have determined the choice of the
places deemed proper as exercise grounds for mental wrestling with occult adver-
saries, as well as the peculiar form of the rites to be practiced on these occasions.
The most fantastic of them is called chöd.116 It is a kind of "Mystery" played by one
actor only, the celebrant; and it has been so cleverly devised to terrify the novices
that one hears of men who have suddenly gone mad or died while engaged in its
performance.
A cemetery, or any wild site whose physical aspect awakens feelings of terror, is
considered to be an appropriate spot. However the place is thought even more suit-
able if it is associated with a terrible legend or if a tragic event has actually hap-
pened there quite recently.
The reason of this preference is that the effect of chöd, or kindred rites, does not
depend solely on the feelings aroused in the mind of the celebrant by the stern
words of the liturgy, nor upon the awe-inspiring surroundings. It is also designed to
stir up the occult forces, or the conscious beings which – according to Tibetans –
may exist in such places, having been enerated either by actual deeds or by the
concentration of many people's thoughts on imaginary events.
It follows that, during the performance of chöd, which I have compared to a drama
enacted by a single actor, the latter may happen to see himself suddenly sur-
rounded by players of the occult worlds who begin to play unexpected rôles. What-
116.Written: gchod – cutting off
•
•
92
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

ever part auto-suggestion and visualization may have in the production of these
phenomena, they are deemed excellent for the good result of the training; but the
test proves too hard for the nerves of some apprentice naljorpas and it is then that
the accidents that I have mentioned occur: of madness or death.
Like any other actor, the man who wants to perform chöd must first learn his rôle by
heart. Then he must practice the ritual dance, his steps forming geometrical figures,
and also turning on one foot, stamping and leaping while keeping time with the litur-
gic recitation. Finally, he must learn to handle, according to rule, the bell, the dorjee,
and the magic dagger,117 to beat rhythmically a kind of small drum118 and to blow a
trumpet made of a human femur.119
The task is not easy; I lost my breath more than once during my apprenticeship.
The lama teacher who directs the drill must be a kind of ballet master. But around
him are to be seen no smiling dancing girls in pink tights. The dancers are young
ascetics emaciated by austerities, clad in ragged robes, their unwashed faces
lighted by ecstatic, hard, resolute eyes. They are preparing themselves, as they
think, for a perilous undertaking, and the thought of the dreadful banquet at which
they must offer their bodies to be devoured by the hungry demons haunts their
minds.
In such conditions this "rehearsal," which might be comical, becomes rather lugu-
brious.
Lack of place prevents me from giving a translation of the text of chöd, in extenso. It
includes long mystic preliminaries during which the celebrant naljorpa "tramples
down" all passions and crucifies his selfishness. However, the essential part of the
rite consists in a banquet which may be briefly described as follows.
The celebrant blows his bone trumpet, calling the hungry demons to the feast he
intends to lay before them. He imagines that a feminine deity, which esoterically
personifies his own will, springs from the top of his head and stands before him,
sword in hand.
With one stroke she cuts off the head of the naljorpa. Then, while troops of ghouls
crowd round for the feast, the goddess severs his limbs, skins him and rips open his
belly. The bowels fall out, the blood flows like a river, and the hideous guests bite
here and there, masticate noisily, while the celebrant excites and urges them with
the liturgic words of unreserved surrender:
"For ages, in the course of renewed births I have borrowed from countless living
beings – at the cost of their welfare and life – food, clothing, all kinds of services
to sustain my body, to keep it joyful in comfort and to defend it against death. To-
day, I pay my debt, offering for destruction this body which I have held so dear.
"I give my flesh to the hungry, my blood to the thirsty, my skin to clothe those who
are naked, my bones as fuel to those who suffer from cold. I give my happiness
to the unhappy ones. I give my breath to bring back the dying to life.
117.Phurba
118.Damaru
119.Kangling
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  93
•••

“Shame on me if I shrink from giving my self! Shame on you, wretched and
demoniac beings,120 if you do not dare to prey upon it. (...)"
This act of the "Mystery" is called the "red meal." It is followed by the "black meal,"
whose mystic signification is disclosed only to those disciples who have received an
initiation of high degree.
The vision of the demoniacal banquet vanishes, to laughter and cries of the ghouls
die away. Utter loneliness in a gloomy landscape succeeds the weird orgy, and the
exaltation aroused in the naljorpa by his dramatic sacrifice gradually subsides.
Now he must imagine that he has become a small heap of charred human bones
that emerges from a lake of black mud – the mud of misery, of moral defilement, and
of harmful deeds to which he has co-operated during the course of numberless
lives, whose origin is lost in the night of time. He must realize that the very idea of
sacrifice is but an illusion, an offshoot of blind, groundless pride. In fact, he has
nothing to give away, because he is nothing. These useless bones, symbolizing the
destruction of his phantom "I," may sink into the muddy lake, it will not matter.
That silent renunciation of the ascetic who realizes that he holds nothing that he can
renounce, and who utterly relinquishes the elation springing from the idea of sacri-
fice, closes the rite.
Some lamas undertake tours to perform chöd near a hundred and eight lakes, and a
hundred and eight cemeteries. They devote years to this exercise, wandering not
only over Tibet, but also in India, Nepal and China. Others only retire to solitary
places for the daily celebration of chöd for a longer or shorter time.
Chöd has a fascinating aspect which cannot be conveyed by a dry account read in
surroundings totally different from those in which this rite is celebrated. Like many
others, I have yielded to the peculiar attraction of its austere symbolism and been
impressed by the fantastic natural background of the Tibetan wilds.
The first time that I started alone for one of these strange peregrinations, I stopped
near a clear lake set between stony shores. The surrounding landscape, com-
pletely barren and impassive, excluded all feelings of fear or of security, of joy or of
sadness. There one felt oneself sinking into a bottomless abyss of indifference.
Evening darkened the bright mirror of the lake while I mused on the strange mind of
the race that has invented chöd and so many other grim practices.
The fantastic procession of clouds lighted by the moon marched along the neigh-
bouring summits and descended towards the valleys surrounding me with a troop of
nebulous phantoms. One of them came forward walking alone over a path of light,
suddenly spread out on the dark water, like a carpet before his steps.
The transparent giant, whose eyes were two stars, made a gesture with his long
arm emerging from a floating robe. Did he call me? Did he drive me away? (...) I
could not tell.
120.Buddhists extend their compassion and brotherly love to all beings, demons included. One must note that
according to them, and especially according to lamaists. a demon does not necessarily dwell in the purga-
tories. The inhabitants of these sorrowful worlds are beings who have been led there by their cruelty or
other evil deeds. They may, while in their present sad condition, reject their former bad feelings, and be
animated by good will toward others, or with a desire for enlightenment. etc. As for so-called "demons,"
they are beings who habitually harbour hatred and ill will, who rejoice in unrighteousness and cruelty. And
these may – as a result of former deeds – have been born as men, demi-gods or any other kind of beings.
•
•
94
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

Then he approached still nearer, looking so real, so life-like, that I closed my eyes to
dispel the hallucination. I felt myself wrapped in the folds of a soft cold cloak whose
subtle substance penetrated me, causing me to shiver. (...)
What strange visions must the sons of these haunted wilds behold, these novices
brought up in superstition sent by their spiritual fathers through the night all alone
their imagination excited by the maddening rites. How many times, in the storm
sweeping across the high tablelands, they must hear their challenge answered and
shudder with terror in their tiny tent, miles and miles away from all human beings.
I very well understood the fear experienced by some celebrants of chöd. Yet I
thought there was much exaggeration in the stories circulated about the tragic
effects of this rite and I treated them with considerable scepticism. However, as the
years went by, I gathered together a few facts which compelled me to have more
faith in these tales.
There is one that I will relate.
At that time I was camping in Northern Tibet, in the desert or grassland. I had estab-
lished myself in the vicinity of three black tents inhabited by herdsman who spent
the summer with their cattle, in a large pasture thang.121
Chance, which is but an easy word to designate unknown causes, had led me there
while hunting for butter, of which I had run short. These few cowherds happened to
be good men. My presence near them as a lady-lama and also as a purchaser from
whom silver might be obtained, did not displease them in the least. They offered to
keep my horses and mules with their own, which would save my servants a good
deal of work, and I decided to let men and beasts enjoy a week of rest.
Two hours after my arrival, I already knew all about the neighbouring region. Truly,
there was not much to be said about it.
The void immensity of the grassy solitudes extended towards the four quarters, bro-
ken only by streams and solitary hill ranges, while over all lay the great sky, lumi-
nous and void.
Yet there was an object of interest in that desert; I learnt that a lama, whose seat
was somewhere north among Mongolian tribes, had chosen a cave near mv camp
for practicing meditation during the summer months.
With him – the cowherd said – were two trapas, his disciples, who lived in a small
tent below their master's ascetic lodging. Beside boiling tea, these two had no work
to do and they spent most of the time in religious exercises. They often wandered
out at night, and no doubt I should sometimes hear the sounds of the damarus, kan-
glings and bells accompanying the celebration nocturnal offices, here or there, on
the hills.
As for the lama, whose name was Rabjoms Gyatso, he had not left his cave since
his arrival, three months ago.
From this information I guessed that the lama was engaged in the performance of a
dubthab or some other magic practice.
The following day, at dawn, I started for the lama's cave. I wanted to reach it while
the trapas were busy in their tent with their morning devotions. I hoped, if I was not
121.Thang. A tableland of level ground between hill ranges or a very wide valley.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  95
•••

seen by them, to be able to approach their master unexpectedly and have a look at
what he was doing. This is not at all "etiquette," but being well acquainted with the
customs of Tibetan lamas, I feared that Rabjoms Gyatso would refuse to see me if I
asked permission to pay him a visit.
Guided by the directions which the cowherds had given me, I easily found the cave
on a slope dominating a glen in which flowed a purling brook. A low wall built of
stones, sods and turf and a curtain of rough yak hair had been added to the prehis-
toric dwelling to provide the lama with some sort of comfort and to hide him from
passers-by.
My stratagem met with failure. As I climbed towards the cave, I met a sickly looking,
matted-haired fellow dressed in ragged ascetic garb who stopped me. I had diffi-
culty in persuading him to go to his master and beg for me the favour of an interview.
The answer which he brought was polite but negative. The lama said that he could
not see me but that if I would come again in a fortnight he would receive me.
As I had already planned to stay where I was for another week and, indeed, was not
in a hurry to continue my journey, there was no special reason against some further
delay. But, on the other hand, I did not know whether it was worth while waiting for
the lama. I merely told the trapa that I might return, but would not engage to do so.
Twice a day, one or the other of the lama's disciples passed by my tent to fetch milk
from the cowherds. The lean young man who had stopped me near the lama's cave
attracted my attention by his wretched appearance. I thought that I might help him
with some medicine and made up my mind to have a talk with him.
At my first words about medical treatment, he denied that he was suffering from any
kind of illness, and as I pressed him with questions about the cause of his skeleton-
like appearance, an expression of intense terror appeared in his wild eyes. It was
impossible to obtain any explanation from him. I told my servants to try and learn
something about the matter from his companion, but he too evaded all questions.
Unlike the majority of Tibetans, who are rather talkative folk, these men were both
uncommonly silent. After my inquiries, they went to the dokpas's tents by a round-
about way to avoid my camp, and as it was clear that they did not want me to inter-
fere, even in order to help them, I let them alone.
I had been staying there for seven days, when I was informed that a man had died
among a group of herdsmen established about a mile away, in the middle of the
thang, and this decided me to postpone my departure to witness the rustic funeral.
In great haste two riders set off for a lama's camp, or as dokpas122 call it, a banag
gompa – that is to say a monastery composed of an agglomeration of black tents –
situated two days' journey from their home. They were to request the service of two
monks to perform the rite for the dead. Only the ecclesiastics belonging to the mon-
astery with which a layman is connected, as spiritual son or supporter, are rightly
entitled to attend his postmortem needs. But, in the meantime, the disciples of the
foreign lama, our neighbour, went each in turn to read religious books over the dead
man.
Some friends of the deceased, who had learnt the sad news, arrived from different
directions, bringing presents to console the family in its bereavement, and the riders
122.Cowherds, herdsman.
•
•
96
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

returned with the two monks and a few lay acquaintances. Then the chanting, ring-
ing bells, beating of drums and cymbals by the trapas, and the copious eating and
drinking by all concerned, continued as usual in these circumstances in front of the
decaying corpse tied in many wrappings and seated in a big cauldron. At last, when
all was over, the dead body was carried to a small tableland on the mountains, cut
into pieces and abandoned there, as supreme alms to the vultures.
To edify the dokpas in complying with a time-honoured custom of their naljorpas,
whose costume I was wearing, I wrapped myself in a thick "zen"123 at nightfall and
walked to the place where the corpse had been carried, to spend the night there in
meditation.
The moon was nearly full and beautifully lit up the immense plain extending from the
foot of the hills which I skirted to other distant ranges. Nocturnal tramps in these sol-
itudes have a peculiar charm. I could have walked for joy the whole night, but the
cemetery, my goal, was less than an hour's march from my camp.
As I neared it I suddenly heard a strange sound, at the same time hoarse and pierc-
ing, that broke the perfect stillness of the desert. It was repeated several times,
rending, it seemed, the calm atmosphere in which the sleeping steppes lay. Then
the rhythmic beating of damaru followed.
This language was clear enough to me. Some one – no doubt one of the lama's dis-
ciples – had gone to the place and performed chöd near the corpse.
The configuration of the land allowed me to reach unnoticed a small hillock and to
hide myself in a cleft sheltered from the moonlight. From there I could perfectly
observe the celebrant of chöd. He was the lean, sickly looking trapa to whom I had
offered medicine. He wore his usual ragged naljorpa dress, a garnet-coloured
pleated skirt, a yellow chemise with wide sleeves and a red sleeveless waistcoat of
a Chinese shape. But now the monastic toga was thrown over it and though as
shabby as the rest of the clothes, its folds imparted a dignified and impressive mien
to the tall emaciated monk.
When I arrived, the young ascetic recited the mantra of praise to the Pra-
jñãpãramitã.
"O Wisdom that is gone, gone, gone to the beyond,
and beyond the beyond svâhâ! (...)"
The monotonous dong, dong of the deep-voiced drums became slower and finally
ceased, the young ascetic seemed sunk in meditation. After a while he wrapped
himself more tightly in his zen. The kangling in his left hand, the damaru lifted high in
the right and beating an aggressive staccato, the man stood in a challenging atti-
tude, as if defying some invisible enemy.
"I, the fearless naljorpa," he exclaimed, "I trample down the self, the gods, and
the demons."
His voice sounded still louder!
"Ye lamas, spiritual teachers, Heros, Khadomas, by thousands, come join me in
the dance!"
123.Zen – The toga worn by Buddhist monks and nuns.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  97
•••

Then he began the ritualistic dance, turning successively towards the four quarters,
reciting,
"I trample down the demon of pride, the demon of anger, the demon of lust, the
demon of stupidity."
Each exclamation "I trample down" was accompanied by actual stamping and ritual
vociferations of "tsem shes tsem!" which grew louder and louder, till the last ones
were thundered out in truly deafening tones.
He rearranged his toga, which trailed on the ground, and having put aside his dam-
aru and the bone trumpet, he spread the tent, seized a peg in one hand, a stone in
the other one, and drove home the pegs while chanting the liturgy.
The tent stood there now, a puny thing made of a thin cotton fabric that had once
been white and appeared grayish under the moonlight. It was ornamented with the
words Aum, A, Hum, cut out in blue and red material and sewn on its three closed
sides. Several frills of the five mystic colours – red, blue, green, yellow and white –
hung from the little roof. The whole thing was faded and shabby.
Apparently agitated by disturbing thoughts, the lean ascetic looked at the pieces of
the corpse scattered on the ground and then turned his head as if inspecting the
surroundings. He seemed hesitating and, heaving a deep sigh, he passed his hand
twice or thrice over his forehead. Then, shaking himself as if summoning up his
courage, he seized his kangling, blew loudly a number of times, first slowly, then
accelerating the rhythm as if for an exasperated summons, and entered his tent.
The nocturnal landscape that had been animated by the performance recovered its
serenity.
What was I to do? The naljorpa, I knew, would not leave his tent before daybreak.
Nothing more was to be seen. I was not in a meditative mood, I might as well go
away. But there was no hurry. I continued to listen.
At intervals, I heard a few words of the ritual, then low indistinct muttering and
moaning.
It was useless to remain there any longer. I moved cautiously out of my hiding-
place. Then, as I took a few steps forward, I heard a low growl. An animal quickly
passed in front of me. It was a wolf. The noise made by the naljorpa had kept it away
and now, since all was silent, it had ventured to approach the feast laid there for
those of its kind.
As I began to round the hillock, and climb down, a sudden exclamation stopped me.
"I pay my debts! "shouted the naljorpa. "
As I have been feeding on you so feed upon me in your turn!
"Come, ye hungry ones, and you that ungratified desires torment!
"In this banquet offered by my compassion,
my flesh will transform itself into the very object of your craving.
"Here, I give you fertile fields, green forests, flowery gardens,
both white and red food, clothes, healing medicines! (...)
Eat! eat! (...)"
•
•
98
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

The excited ascetic blew furiously his kangling, uttered an awful cry and jumped on
his feet so hastily that his head knocked against the low roof of the tent and the latter
fell in on him. He struggled a while under the cloth, and emerged with the grim, dis-
torted face of a madman, howling convulsively with gestures betokening intense
physical pain.
Now I could understand what chöd means for those who work themselves up until
they are absolutely hypnotized by its ritual.
No doubt that the man felt the teeth of some invisible ghouls in his body.
He looked around him in all directions and addressed unseen bystanders as if he
had been surrounded by a host of beings from other worlds. Most likely he beheld
some kind of ghastly vision.
The sight was deeply interesting. But I could not look at it with complete indiffer-
ence. This poor fellow would kill himself with his dreadful ritual. I had dis covered the
secret of his sickly appearance and why he had deemed my medicines of no avail in
his case.
I felt most anxious to awaken him from his night mare. Yet I hesitated because I
knew that my intervention would go against the established rule. Those who have
engaged in such training must fight it out unaided.
As I remained undecided, I heard the wolf growling again. It had stopped on the top
of the hillock. From there, as if petrified, and in an attitude of intense terror the ani-
mal looked fixedly in the direction of the tumbledown tent as if it, too, beheld some
appalling sight.
The naljorpa continued to groan in agony.
I could not bear it any longer. I rushed towards the poor mad fellow. But, as soon as
he caught sight of me he called to me with a vehement gesture, shouting:
"Come, angry one, feed on my flesh (...) drink my blood! (...)
This was too absurd indeed! He took me for a ghost! (...) In spite of the pity which I
felt, I nearly laughed.
"Do be quiet," I said. "There are no demons here. I am the reverend lady-lama
whom you know."
He did not appear even to hear my voice but continued to address me in the words
of the ritual.
I thought that the toga in which I was wrapped gave me, perhaps, a somewhat
ghost-like aspect. So throwing it on the ground
I spoke again.
"Now, do recognize me!"
It was of no use. The poor novice was utterly out of his mind. He stretched his arms
towards my innocent zen and addressed it as if it were a new-comer among the
troop of phantoms.
Why had I not let him alone and gone away without interfering with his performance!
I had only made things worse. As I pondered over the matter the young man, who
was staggering round his tent, stumbled on one of the pegs and fell heavily to the
ground. He remained immobile as if he had fainted, and I watched him to see if he
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
•  99
•••

would get up, but I did not dare to approach, for fear I should frighten him even more.
After a while he moved and I deemed it better to withdraw before he looked at me
again.
I decided to inform the lama of what was happening to his disciple. Though I
guessed that the latter often went into such a state while performing chöd, and
probably his teacher did not ignore it, still he might be particularly mad to-night.
Rabjoms could send the other trapa to fetch him and spare the poor young man sev-
eral hours of suffering. As I had failed in my attempt to help him directly, I did not see
any better way.
I went down to the thang. All the way I continued to hear, at intervals, the sound of
the kangling to which the howling of the wolf sometimes made answer. Then the
noise gradually decreased until I heard it no more, and I plunged with delight into
the great silent peace of the desert.
The feeble light of a small altar lamp, a tiny star on the slope of the hill, indicated the
lama's dwelling-place.
I avoided the tent where his attendant was likely to be asleep and climbed up quickly
to the cave.
Rabjoms Gyatso was seated cross-legged, in meditation. Without moving, he only
lifted his eyes, when I opened the curtain and addressed him. In a few words, I told
him in what condition I had left his disciple.
He smiled faintly.
"You appear to know chöd, Jetsunma.124
“Do you really? (...)" he inquired calmly.
"Yes," I said," I have practiced it too."
He did not reply.
After a while, as the lama remained silent, and seemed to have forgotten my pres-
ence, I tried again to appeal to his pity.
"Rimpoche,"125
I said, "I warn you seriously. I have some medical knowledge; your disciple may
gravely injure his health and be driven to madness by the terror he experiences.
He really appeared to feel himself being eaten alive.
"No doubt he is," answered the lama, with the same calm, "but he does not
understand that he is himself the eater. May be that he will learn it later on. (...)"
I was about to reply, arguing that the poor novice might, before that time came, give
other candidates for secret lore the opportunity of performing chöd before his own
corpse. Perhaps the lama guessed what I was about to say, for without allowing me
time to utter a word, he added, slightly raising his voice:
124.Jetsunma, "reverend lady." A very polite term of address for a nun of high rank. One says also, Jelsun
Kushogs.
125.Rinpoche, "precious one,." A very polite word to address a lama.
•
•
100
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

"You seem to imply that you have had some kind of training in the 'Short Path.'
Did your spiritual teacher not inform you of the risks and did you not agree that
you were ready to run these three: illness, madness and death? (...)
"It is hard to free oneself from delusion," he continued, "to blot out the mirage of the
imaginary world and to liberate one's mind from fanciful beliefs. Enlightenment is a
precious gem and must be bought at a high price. Methods to reach tharpa126 are
many. You may follow another one, less coarse than that suited to the man whom
you pity, but I am certain that your way must be as hard as that of my disciple. If it is
easy it is a wrong one.
"Now, pray, go back to your camp. You may come to see me to-morrow in the
afternoon if you wish to.''
It was useless to add another word. The ideas expressed by the lama are current
among Tibetan mystics. I bowed my parting "good night" and returned to my tent.
The next afternoon, I availed myself of the permission which Rabjoms Gyatso had
given me to pay him a visit, and during the few days that I still spent at that place, I
saw him again several times. He was not a great scholar, but had a rather deep
insight into a number of subjects and I was glad to have met him.
Inborn tendencies to distrust and incredulity prevent me from granting full faith to
the many dreadful stories told by Tibetans regarding the practice of chöd. I persist in
believing that such a dramatic performance as that which I chanced to witness is
exceptional. Yet the feeling of being devoured during the celebration of this rite, and
the wasting away of the novices, are not very rare occurrences. I have personally
known two or three cases of the kind beside that related above, and like Rabjoms
Gyatso, the masters of these unfortunate candidate naljorpas also decline to reas-
sure their disciples by disclosing to them the subjective nature of their sensations.
Moreover, as I have already mentioned, a number of mystic masters hold that these
sensations are not in fact always entirely subjective.
The liturgic text of chöd and its scenic part are said to be the work of a certain lama,
Padma Rigdzin, head of the Dzogschen sect,127 who lived about two hundred years
ago.
In 1922 I paid a visit to his successor or rather – according to the Tibetan belief – to
himself, who, having several times died and been reborn, still occupied the seat of
the abbot in the Dzogschen gompa.
The wild aspect of the site where the monastery stands at the border of the
immense northern grassy solitudes, is well fitted to incline the mind to fantastic, dis-
mal broodings. Yet the good Padma Rigdzin, who was my host, did not in the least
appear to indulge in melancholy musing. Mercantile schemes, together with child-
ish whims, occupied his mind. He questioned me at length on French Indo-China
and Burma, inquiring about import and export in these countries. He especially
wanted to know if he could get peacocks from there, as he had a great desire to add
some of these birds to his little zoological collection of live animals.
126.Tharpa – Supreme liberation.
127.Sect of the "Great accomplissement." The last in date of the "Red hat" sects. Nowadays, it is practically
divided in two branches. The Southern, original one, whose head has his seat at Mindoling monastery,
near the Brahmaputra's bank; and the northern one, with the Tulku of Padma Rigdzin at its head.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
101
•

•••

However, far away from the sumptuous apartments of the Lama Tulku, isolated,
small dwellings sheltered monks whose grave look and mysterious demeanour
matched the surrounding scenery more harmoniously.
Some of these tsam khangs128 were inhabited by strict recluses who had inter-
course with nobody. Among them, some aimed at obtaining supernormal psychic
faculties or magic powers, while others were absorbed in mystic contemplations
which – according to the views held in their sect – should lead them to spiritual
enlightenment.
For long, the monastery of Dzogschen has been famous as a centre where secret
methods of psychic training are taught and practiced.
Those who have obtained the fruit of chöd may dispense with the theatrical side of
the rite. Its different phases are, then, called to mind only, in the course of silent
meditation, and soon even this exercise becomes unnecessary.
Nevertheless, either because they enjoy remembering through that performance,
the exertions of their novitiate days or for other reasons known to themselves alone,
certain gomchens sometimes meet to celebrate chöd together. But, then, the dis-
mal rite changes its character and becomes a mystic feast in which the exulting nal-
jorpas rejoice over their utter freedom.
I have had the rare opportunity of beholding some of these ascetics, tall men of
Kham, clad in the picturesque garb of the hermits, their plaited hair falling to their
feet. Under the starry sky, they danced to the strange music of hand-drums and
femur-trumpets, in these majestic wilds which lay at the summit of our globe. On
their ecstatic faces shone the proud joy of having trampled down the feelings that
keep the mind feverish through hopes and fears, through "the burning thirst," "the
distressing race towards mirages."
And then they sank in endless meditations that kept them till late after dawn sitting
cross-legged, the body erect, the gaze cast down, motionless, like stone images.
It was a sight never to be forgotten.
; ; ;
128.Houses for recluses, see Chapter VII
•
•
102
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

Chapter V: Disciples of Yore and their Contemporary
Emulators
The incidents connected with the admission of a disciple by a mystic teacher, the
first years of his novitiate, the tests imposed on him, the peculiar circumstances in
which spiritual illumination dawns upon him, might in many cases supply the mate-
rial for a most curious novel.
Hundreds of such wonderful stories, either ancient or of recent date, handed down
by oral tradition, written in the biographies of famous lamas or even told by living wit-
nesses, are circulated all over Tibet.
Translated into a foreign language, read in countries whose customs, thoughts and
physical aspect are so different from those of Tibet, the charm of that strange
"Golden Legend" largely vanishes. But when told with the pathetic accent of a
believer, in the chiara oscura of a monastic cell or under the rocky ceiling of a cave-
hermitage, the very soul of Tibet reveals itself in all its mystic powerful originality,
athirst for occult knowledge and spiritual life.
I shall, first, tell briefly the fantastic and symbolic story of Tilopa's initiation. Though
he himself was a native of Bengal and never crossed the border of Tibet, he is con-
sidered as the spiritual ancestor of one of the most important of the "Red hat" sects,
that of the Kagyudpas.
I may add, by the way, that it is in a monastery of this sect that the lama Yongden
began his novitiate at the early age of eight.
Tilopa is seated reading a philosophic treatise when an aged beggar woman
appears behind him, reads or makes a pretence of reading a few lines over his
shoulder and asks him abruptly: "Do you understand what you are reading?"
Tilopa feels indignant. What does this witch mean by putting him such an imperti-
nent question? But the woman does not allow him the time to express his feelings.
She spits on the book.
This time, the reader jumps up. How can that diabolical wretch dare to spit on the
Holy Scriptures?
In answer to his vehement reproaches, the woman spits a second time on the book,
utters a word that Tilopa cannot understand and disappears.
Strangely enough, that word which was nothing to him but an unintelligible sound,
yet suddenly calmed Tilopa's anger. An uncomfortable sensation spreads all over
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
103
•

•••

his frame. Distrust, doubt of his knowledge arise in his mind. After all, it may be true
that he has not understood the doctrine expounded in than treatise, or any doctrine
whatever, and that he is but an utter ignoramus.
What did that strange woman say? – What word has she pronounced that he has
not been able to catch? He wants to know it. He feels that he must know it.
And so Tilopa started in search of the old woman. After much wandering and exer-
tion he found her at night in a solitary wood (others say in a cemetery). She was
seated alone, her ''Red129 eyes shining like live coals in the darkness."
There are two kinds of Khadomas:
•
The spiritual ones who do not belong to our world and are called "Khadomas
of wisdom," and
•
the Khadomas who, either incarnated as woman or not, belong to our world.)
eyes shining like live coals in the darkness."
In the course of the conversation that followed, Tilopa was directed to go to the
Dâkinîs's land, in order to meet their queen.
On the road, dangers of countless kinds awaited him: abysses, roaring torrents,
ferocious animals, delusive mirages, ghastly apparitions, hungry demons. If he
allowed himself to be overpowered by fear, or missed the narrow, thread-like path
winding across that terrible region, he would fall a prey to the monsters. If, driven by
thirst or hunger, he drank at the clear springs or ate the fruits hanging at hand on the
trees by the road, if he yielded to the fair maidens inviting him to sport with them in
pleasant groves, he would become bewildered and incapable of finding his way.
For his protection, the woman gave him a magic formula. This he must repeat all
along the road, keeping his mind entirely concentrated on it, uttering no word, listen-
ing to nothing.
Some believe that Tilopa actually achieved the phantasmagoric journey. Others,
better informed regarding the various experiences that may be undergone during
certain peculiar states of trance, see in it a form of psychic phenomena.
Anyhow, Tilopa saw the countless frightful or alluring sights, he struggled across
steep rocky slopes and foaming rivers, he felt himself freezing amidst snows,
scorched on burning sandy steppes, and never departed from his concentration on
the magic words.
At last, he reached the castle whose bronze walls were glowing with heat. Mon-
strous gigantic females opened wide mouths to devour him. Trees, with branches
holding weapons, barred his way. Yet he entered the enchanted palace. There innu-
merable sumptuous rooms formed a labyrinth. Tilopa wended his way through them
and reached the queen's apartment.
There was the beautiful fairy seated on her throne adorned with precious jewels,
and she smiled at the daring pilgrim as he crossed the threshold.
129. It must be understood that the strange woman is a dâkinî. Tibetans call them Khadoma, but in mystic ter-
minology they often use the Sanskrit name dâkinî or its abbreviation dâkî. These are a kind of fairies who
play a great part in mystic lamaism, as teachers of secret doctrines, and are styled "mothers." They often
appear in the shape of an aged woman and one of their peculiar signs is that they have red or green eyes.
There are two kinds of Khadomas: The spiritual ones who do not belong to our world and are called "Khad-
omas of wisdom," and the Khadomas who, either incarnated as woman or not, belong to our world.
•
•
104
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

But he, unmoved by her loveliness, ascended the steps of the throne and, still
repeating the mantra, wrenched from her the glittering jewels, trampled under foot
the flowery garlands, tore away her precious silk and golden robes, and as she lay
naked on her wrecked throne, he violated her.
Such conquests of a dâkinî, either by sheer violence or by magic devices, are a cur-
rent theme in Tibetan mystic literature. They are an allegory referring to the realiza-
tion of truth and to some psychic process of self-spiritual development.
Tilopa handed down his doctrine to Narota, a learned Kashmiri, and a Tibetan pupil
of the latter – the lama Marpa – brought it to his own country. The foremost disciple
of Marpa, the famous anchorite poet Milarespa, in his turn, communicated it to his
disciple Dagpo Lhajee. And the lineal succession still continues nowadays under
the name of the Kagyudpa sect.
We find in the biography of Narota an amusing description – not as fantastic as
might be supposed – of the tests devised by a master of the "Short Path" to train and
direct his disciple.
A brief summary will give an idea of it.
Narota – or Naropa, as Tibetans call him – was a Brahmin of Kashmir who lived in
the tenth century A.D. Deeply learned in philosophy, he was also believed to be an
adept in magic.
Having been greatly offended by a rajah to whom he was chaplain, he resolved to
kill the prince by an occult process. For this purpose, he shut himself up in an iso-
lated house and began a dragpoi dubthab.130
As he was performing the rite, a mother fairy appeared at a corner of the magic dia-
gram and asked Naropa if he deemed himself capable of sending the spirit of the
rajah towards a happy place in another world, or of bringing it back into the body
which it had left and resuscitating it. The magician could only confess that his sci-
ence did not extend so far.
Then the mother fairy assumed a stern mien and reproached him for his heinous
undertaking. She told him that no one had the right to destroy who could not build
up again the being destroyed or establish it in a better condition. The consequence
of his criminal thought, she added, would be his own rebirth, in one of the purgato-
ries.
Terror-stricken, Naropa inquired how he could escape that terrible fate. The
Khadoma advised him to seek the Sage named Tilopa and to beg, from him, initia-
tion into the secret doctrine of "tsi chig lus chig sangyais."
That is to say the mystic doctrine of the "Short Path" which frees a man from the
consequences of his actions, whatever they may be, by the revelation of their true
nature, and ensures the attainment of buddhahood "in one single life.''131
If he succeeded in grasping the meaning of that teaching and realizing it, he would
not be reborn again and, consequently, would escape a life of torment in the purga-
tories.
130.A magic rite to bring about death or injury.
131.That is to say that buddhahood is attained in a short time, during the very life in which one has begun the
training, instead of the usual course which requires many centuries, during which death and re-birth take
place several times.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
105
•

•••

Naropa stopped the performance of the rite, and hastened towards Bengal, where
Tilopa lived.
Tilopa, whose fantastic initiation by a dâkinî I have just related, enjoyed a great rep-
utation when Naropa started to meet him.
He belonged to a tantric sect and was one of those avadhutas,132 of whom it is said
that
"they like nothing, hate nothing, are ashamed of nothing, do not glorify in
anything, are utterly detached from all things, having cut off all family, social and
religious bonds.”133
As for Naropa, history shows him to have been a man of refinement, deeply con-
vinced of his superiority as a member of the Brahmin caste and a learned doctor.
The meeting of these two different characters brought about a series of incidents
which may well appear to us rather like rough practical jokes, but must have been a
heartbreaking drama for Naropa.
The first meeting of Naropa with Tilopa occurred in the courtyard of a Buddhist
monastery. The cynic ascetic, naked, or nearly so, was seated on the ground, eat-
ing fish. As the meal went on, he put down beside him the fishes' backbones. In
order not to defile his caste purity, Naropa was on the point of passing by at some lit-
tle distance from the eater, when a monk started to reproach Tilopa for parading his
lack of compassion for the animals134 in the very premises of a Buddhist monas-
tery. And so saying, he ordered him to depart at once.
Tilopa did not even condescend to answer. He muttered some magic words.135 We
read in Milare-spa's biography that the lama Chösrdor of Gnog resuscitated, in the
same way, a number of birds and field mice which had been killed during a hail-
storm. A still queere story was told me by a Korean. A holy monk, so runs the story,
met on his way a man who was boiling, near a river, a broth made with the fishes he
had just caught. The monk, without uttering a word, took the pot and swallowed the
boiling broth. The man was astonished to see how he could bear the touch of the
boiling liquid, but yet scoffed at him, reproaching him for his sinfully gluttony136.
But the monk, still keeping silent, entered the river and micturated. And then with his
water, the fishes came out living and went away swimming in the river.) snapped his
fingers, and behold! ... The fish bones were again covered with flesh, the fishes
moved as if living, they went up in the air for a while and vanished. No vestige
remained of the cruel meal on the ground.
Naropa was petrified, but suddenly an idea flashed through his mind. This strange
wonder-worker, no doubt, was the very Tilopa whom he was seeking. He hurriedly
inquired about him, and the information given by the monks agreeing with his own
intuition, he ran after the yogin, but the latter was nowhere to be found.
132.An ascetic who has cut himself entirely off from the world and has renounced all social and moral rules
and laws, believing that he has reached a state of enlightenment where the distinction between good and
evil does not exist any more.
133.Mahânirvâna tantra. It is a current description of the Sage which is found in countless texts.)
134.Because the food he ate had been obtained by killing the fish.
135.Such resurrections are a favourite theme in Oriental stories
136.Chinese and Korean Buddhist monks never eat animal food.
•
•
106
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

Then, in his eagerness to learn the doctrine that could save him from the purgato-
ries, Naropa wanders from town to town, with the only result that each time he
reaches a place where Tilopa is said to be staying, the latter has, invariably, just left
it a little before his arrival.
It is quite probable that Naropa's biographers have lengthened and exaggerated his
peregrinations, but their account is certainly grounded on actual facts.
Sometimes – so goes the story – Naropa met, as if by chance on his way, singular
beings who were phantoms created by Tilopa. Once, knocking at the door of a
house, to beg food a man comes out who offers him wine. Naropa feels deeply
offended and indignantly refuses the impure beverage.137
The house and its master vanish immediately. The proud Brahmin is left alone on
the solitary road, while a mocking voice laughs –
"That man was I: Tilopa."
Another day, a villager asks Naropa to help him to skin a dead animal. Such work, in
India, is only done by untouchable outcastes. The mere approach of such men
makes a Hindu, belonging to one of the pure castes, unclean. Naropa flees, utterly
disgusted, and the invisible Tilopa scoffs at him:
"That man was myself."
Again, the traveller sees a brutal husband who drags his wife by her hair, and when
he interferes, the cruel fellow tells him:
"You had better help me, I want to kill her. At least, pass your way and let me do
it."
Naropa can hear nothing more. He knocks the man down on the ground, sets free
the woman (...) and lo! once more the phantasmagoria disappears while the same
voice repeats scornfully:
"I was there, I: Tilopa."
The adventures continue in this same vein.
Proficient magician though he may be, Naropa has never even conceived the idea
of such display of supernormal powers: he stands on the brink of madness, but his
desire to become Tilopa's disciple grows still stronger. He roams at random across
the country, calling Tilopa aloud and, knowing by experience that the guru is capa-
ble of assuming any form, he bows down at the feet of any passer-by and even
before any animal he happens to see on the roads.138
One evening, after a long tramp, he reaches a cemetery. A crumbled-down pyre is
smouldering in a corner. At times, a dark reddish flame leaps from it, showing shriv-
elled-up carbonized remains. The glimmer allows Naropa to vaguely discern a man
137.Orthodox Brahmins are not allowed to drink strong drink. To offer wine or spirit to them is to treat them
like a low-caste man and is, consequently, an insult.
138.In one of the deceitful apparitions, Tilopa had taken the shape of a hare. To be able to show oneself
under various shapes is one of the supernormal powers with which Tibetans credit their great naljorpas. It
is related that Milarespa showed himself as a snow leopard and as a crow to people who visited him in his
snow-buried hermitage of Lachi Kangs. The legend of Gesar of Link contains numbers of such prodigies.
Suggestion, no doubt, plays an important part in visions of this kind which are not all mere tales. I have
been able to see something of them myself.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
107
•

•••

lying beside the pyre. He looks at him (...) a mocking laugh answers his inspection.
He has understood, he falls prostrate on the ground, holding Tilopa's feet and plac-
ing them on his head. This time the yogin does not disappear.
During several years, Naropa follows Tilopa without being treated as of any impor-
tance. His master teaches him nothing, but by way of compensation, he tests his
faith in him by means of twelve great and twelve small ordeals.
Space is lacking to describe each of the twenty-four tests which, in fact, often repeat
the same details. I shall confine myself to a few.
According to the custom of Indian ascetics Naropa went on a begging round. Com-
ing back to his master he offered him the rice and curry which he had received as
alms. The rule is that a disciple eats only after his guru is satisfied, but far from leav-
ing something for his follower, Tilopa ate up the whole contents of the bowl, and
even declared that the food was so much to his taste that he could have eaten
another bowlful with pleasure.
Without waiting for a more direct command, Naropa took the bowl and started again
for the house where generous householders bestowed such tasty alms. Unfortu-
nately, when he arrived there, he found the door closed. Burning with zeal, the
devoted disciple did not let himself be stopped for so little. He kicked the door open,
discovered some rice and various stews keeping warm on the stove in the kitchen,
and helped himself to more of what Tilopa had so much enjoyed. The masters of the
house came back as he was plunging a spoon in their pots and gave him a first-rate
thrashing.
Bruised from head to feet, Naropa returned to his guru, who showed no compas-
sion whatever for his suffering.
"What an adventure has befallen you on my account!" he said with mocking
calm. "Do you not regret having become my disciple?"
With all the strength that his pitiful condition left at his disposal, Naropa protested
that far from regretting having followed such a guru, he deemed the privilege of
being his disciple could never be paid for too dearly, even if one was to purchase it at
the cost of one's life.
Another day Tilopa, passing by an open drain, asked the disciples who walked with
him:
"Which of you would drink of that drain water if I ordered him to?"
It must be understood that it was not here only a question of overcoming natural dis-
gust for the filthy liquid, but of being defiled according to the religious Hindu Law139.
Nevertheless, while his companions hesitated, the Brahmin Naropa ran forward
and drank the foul beverage.
Another test was still more cruel.
Master and disciple lived at that time in a hut, near a forest. Once, returning from the
village with Tilopa's meal, Naropa saw that during his absence, the latter had fabri-
139.At that time, tenth century A.D., Buddhism had already greatly degenerated, reverting to a number of
Hindu superstitions strongly condemned by the Buddha.
•
•
108
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

cated a number of long wooden needles and hardened them in the fire. Greatly
astonished, he inquired about the use Tilopa meant to make of these implements.
The yogin smiled queerly.
"Could you," he asked, "bear some pain if it pleased me?"
Naropa answered that he belonged entirely to him and that he could do whatever he
liked with him.
"Well," replied Tilopa, "stretch out your hand."
And when Naropa had obeyed, he thrust one of the needles under each of the nails
of one hand, did the same to the other, and finished with the toes. Then he pushed
the tortured Naropa into the hut, commanded him to wait there till he returned,
closed the door, and went away.
Several days elapsed before he came back. He found Naropa seated on the
ground, the needles still in his flesh.
"What did you think while alone?" inquired Tilopa "Have you not come to believe
that I am a cruel master and that you had better leave me?"
"I have been thinking of the dreadful life of torments which will be mine in the purga-
tories if I do not succeed, by your grace, in becoming enlightened in the mystic doc-
trine, and so escaping a new rebirth," answered Naropa.
As years went by, Naropa threw himself down from the roof of a house, crossed a
blazing fire and performed a number of other fantastic feats which often put his life
in jeopardy.
To conclude, I shall relate one more of these curious tests, the story being rather
amusing.
Master and disciple were strolling in the streets when they happened to meet a
wedding procession accompanying a bride to her husband's house.
"I desire that woman," said Tilopa to Naropa. "Go, bring her to me."
He had scarcely finished speaking before Naropa joined the cortège.
Seeing that he was a Brahmin, the men of the wedding party allowed him to
approach the bride, thinking that he meant to bless her. But when they saw that he
took her in his arms and intended to carry her away, they seized on everything they
could find – the palanquin's sticks, the torches that lighted the way of the procession
and other implements – to belabour poor Naropa. So soundly was he cudgelled that
he fainted and was left for dead on the spot.
Tilopa had not waited for the end of the performance to pass quietly on his way.
When he came to his senses again and had painfully dragged himself along until he
overtook his whimsical guru, the latter, as welcome, asked him once more the usual
question, "Do you not regret (...) "
And, as usual also, Naropa protested that a thousand deaths seemed to him but a
trifle to purchase the privilege of being his disciple.
At last, Naropa got the reward of his long tribulations. But not in the form of regular
teaching and initiation.
If we trust the tradition, Tilopa seems to have used,
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
109
•

•••

on that occasion, a queer method somewhat akin to that patronized by the Chinese
teachers of the Ts'an sect. There is no doubt that, though left apparently untaught,
Naropa had been able to grasp a number of points in the "Short Path's doctrine,"
during his lively period of probation. However, the manner of his full enlightening is
related as follows:
Naropa was seated near a fire in the open with his master. Quite unexpectedly, the
latter took off one of his shoes and soundly slapped the disciple's face with it.
Naropa saw all the stars of heaven, and at the same time the inner meaning of the
"Short Path's doctrine" flashed into his mind.
Naropa, had later on, a large number of disciples, and, according to the tradition,
was a most kind master, sparing his pupils the painful ordeals which he had himself
so bitterly experienced.
Already advanced in age, he left the monastery of which he was a reputed doctor
and, retiring in solitude, devoted twelve consecutive years to uninterrupted contem-
plation. He is said to have finally reached "the excellent success"140 that is to say
Buddhahood.
Naropa is especially known in Tibet as the spiritual teacher of the Lama Marpa, who
was himself the master of the famous ascetic poet Milarespa whose religious songs
are most popular all over Tibet.
If Naropa showed himself a mild spiritual father, such was not the case with Marpa,
who tortured the poor Milarespa for years, commanding him to build a house
unaided and then ordering him several times to pull it down when nearly finished,
and rebuild it again.
Milarespa was to dig out the stones alone and to carry them on his back. The
repeated rubbing of these hard loads caused sores which became infected on
account of the earth and dirt that entered them. Marpa pretended to ignore the mar-
tyrdom which his disciple endured. When, at last, yielding to the supplications of his
wife Dagmedma,141 the lama condescended to look at the bleeding back of Mila-
respa, he coldly advised him to place a piece of felt on it with holes to isolate the
sores. This is a process commonly used in Tibet for the sore backs of pack animals.
The house built by Milarespa still exists in Lhobrag Southern Tibet.
Tibetans do not entertain the least doubt regarding the complete authenticity of
such stories. If we cannot vie in faith with them, we must, however, beware of con-
sidering all traditional account of the novice naljorpas' exertions as mere fictions. It
would be also an error to believe that such facts belong to a remote past and cannot
occur again nowadays. The Tibetan mind has not changed since the time of Marpa.
In the house of many lamas I have recognized the very picture of his home and cus-
toms, as they are depicted in Tibetan literature, while Marpa himself appeared to
me personified by the master of the house.
The young monk in quest of a spiritual guide has also remained the image of his
predecessors. If not quite equal in zeal to Naropa and Milarespa, who have been, in
all times, exceptional characters, he is still ready to bear uncommon hardship, make
140.Mchog gi dnos grub.
141.Marpa, who lived before the reform of Tsong Khapa, was a married lama.
•
•
110
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

a number of sacrifices and see many prodigies. And so the fantastic adventures of
yore are lived over again every day at the four corners of the "Land of Snows."
However barbarous the physical ordeals with which the hermits think useful to test
the quality of their disciples may appear, these are, nevertheless, the lightest part of
the training. The really dreadful trial is the purely mental one.
This begins when the first idea arises in the candidate for initiation of begging the
guidance of a mystic anchorite. So many things are rumoured about these gom-
chens, their life is so mysterious, their appearance and the rare words they utter are
so exceedingly strange that, for Tibetans already inclined to superstitious terror,
they seem a thousand times more to be feared than gods and demons. Indeed, they
must be so, for they are credited with the power of enslaving gods and demons. Lost
travellers or hunters have more than once related that while wandering across soli-
tary hills they have had a glimpse of inhuman beings attending on some of these
hermits.
To betake oneself to such a master, to put one's present life and one's fate hereafter
in his hands is a hazardous step. It is easy to imagine the hesitations, the conflicting
feelings, and the anguish which prey on the mind of the aspirant to secret lore.
The long distances which the candidate generally has to travel through desert
regions to reach the hermitage of the master whom he has chosen, the wild majesty
of the site in which such hermitages are generally situated, all these again contrib-
ute to deeply impress the young monk.
Psychic training undertaken in such a disposition, in such surroundings, and under
such a master cannot help being fantastic. Around the disciple abandoned to pro-
longed solitary meditations, heaven and earth quake and whirl so that he can
nowhere find a firm footing. Gods and demons mock him with visions at first appall-
ing, then ironical and disconcerting when he has conquered fear. The maddening
succession of impossible occurrences may continue ten or twenty years. It may tor-
ture the disciple until his death, unless, one day, he awakes from the nightmare,
having understood that which was to be understood, and, bowing at the feet of his
impassive master, takes leave of him without asking for any more teaching.
Among several stories which I have heard from anchorites and naljorpas, regarding
their initiation, the following is typically Tibetan.
When he betook himself to a lama gomchen, Yeshes Gyatso was not quite a novice
in mystic training. He had spent several fairly long periods in strict seclusion,
endeavouring to find an answer to a question which puzzled him painfully.
What is the mind? he asked himself. And he tried to catch his mind in order to exam-
ine and analyse it. But the fugitive thing – "as the water that a child endeavours to
keep in its closed hand" – always escaped.
His guru, a lama from the monastery to which Yeshes belonged, seeing him tor-
tured by his unsuccessful efforts, directed him to an anchorite whom he knew.
The journey was not very long. Only about three weeks – which is reckoned a short
time in Tibet – but the track went across desert regions and passes 18,000 feet
high. Yeshes started, carrying on his back a few books, a blanket and the usual pro-
visions: roast barley flour, butter and tea. It was in the second month of the Tibetan
year.142
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
111
•

•••

Deep snow covered the ground and all along his way the traveller could behold
those aweinspiring frozen landscapes of the high summits which seem to belong to
another world.
One evening, at sunset, he reached the gomchen hermitage, a vast cave, in front of
which extended a small natural terrace that had been enclosed by a wall.
Some distance below, a few huts sheltered those disciples who, for a short time,
were allowed to stay near the lama. The anchorites' dwellings stood on the upper
heights of a mountain formed by blackish rocks, commanding a view of the emer-
ald-green water of a smal rippleless lake.
I arrived there once, at dusk, as Yeshes had done many years before, and looking at
the desolate scenery lighted by the dim twilight, I could understand how strong an
impression it had made on him.
Yeshes asked one of the lama's disciples to beg for him the permission to be admit-
ted to his master.
The gomchen did not allow him to climb to his cave. This is habitual and did not
astonish Yeshes, who had never expected to be received immediately. He shared
the cell of a novice and waited.
After a week had elapsed he timidly ventured to have the hermit reminded of his
request. The answer came at once. He was ordered to leave the place immediately
and to return to his monastery.
He cried out his despair to the eyrie of the teacher, and prostrated himself at the foot
of the rocky slope. But no compassionate answer broke the dead silence of the
desert. Yeshes had to go.
The same evening, a hail-storm swept across a barren tableland which he had to
cross. He distinctly saw giant threatening phantoms, lost his way in the darkness
and was wandering about all the night. The following days brought nothing but trou-
ble. The weather remained awful, the traveller had exhausted his provisions, he was
nearly drowned in crossing a mountain stream and reached his gompa, at last, a
victim of disease and despair.
Yet, the faith which he had intuitively put in the stern gomchen remained unshaken.
Three months later he started again. As during his previous journey, he met terrible
storms on the high passes. The credulous Yeshes did not fail to ascribe them to
supernormal cause. Either, he thought, the lama had let the winds loose to test his
steadiness of purpose, or evil spirits had stirred them up to prevent him from reach-
ing the gornchen's hermitage and being initiated by him in the mystic doctrine.
That second journey did not prove more successful than the first one. Yeshes was
not even allowed to bow at the feet of the hermit, but was sent back immediately.
He made two more journeys to the anchorite during the next year and the second
time he was at last admitted before him.
"You are mad, my son," the gomchen told him.
142.In March. Tibetan New Year (Losar) fell early in February.
•
•
112
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

"Why are you so obstinate? I do not accept new disciples. I have also got some
information about you; you have already pursued philosophic study and spent a
long time in meditation. What do you hope for, from an old, ignorant man?
"If you really wish to learn the secret mystic lore, go to the lama N... at Lhasa. He
is conversant with all works of the more learned authors and is fully initiated in
the esoteric traditions. Such a master is just what a young well-read man like
you needs."
Yeshes knew that this way of speaking is usual with gurus. It is a way of testing the
degree of confidence and esteem in which the candidate disciples hold them. More-
over, he was full of faith.
So he remained obstinate, testified in various manners of his sincere devotion and
earnestness, and was finally accepted by the lama.
Another monk whom I have known had sought an anchorite teacher for reasons
that had nothing to do with philosophic or mystic pursuits. If I relate his case it is
because it contrasts with that of Yeshes and shows another aspect of the Tibetan
mind.
Karma Dorjee was low born. As a little boy, in the monastery where he was a
geyok,143 he had been the butt of ridicule and contempt of the young novices of his
age who belonged to a higher social class. These vexations had embittered his
young mind and he confessed to me that he was but a little over his tenth year when
he had sworn that he would rise above those who humiliated him.
When he was grown up, his companions had at last to refrain from too open mani-
festations of their scorn but they revealed it clearly enough by their silence and their
aloofness. Karma Dorjee was proud and possessed a strong will, he still dreamed
of keeping the oath taken in his early youth. His low birth and his monastic condition
left him only one way of reaching his aim.
He must become a famous naljorpa, a magician, one of those who coerce the
demons and make them their retainers. In this wav he could revenge himself on his
tormentors and make them tremble before him.
In this not very pious frame of mind, Karma Dorje applied to the head of his monas-
tery for a two years' leave, being desirous, he said, to retire to the forest for medita-
tion. Permission he knew is never refused to such requests.
Karma climbed high up on the hills, found a convenient place near a spring and built
a hut there with branches and mud. Immediately in order to imitate the reskyang-
pas,144 he discarded all clothes and let his hair grow. Those who brought him sup-
plies of food at long intervals found him seated cross-legged and naked even in the
heart of winter, apparently sunk in a deep trance.
People began to talk about him, but he was still far from the fame he desired. He
realized that his hermitage in the forest and his nakedness were not sufficient to
obtain it for him. So he went down to his monastery, and this time asked permission
143.A young novice of poor parentage whose family cannot maintain him, and who does menial work at a
lama's house for his living. “A Famous Tibetan Monastery” on page 58
144.The naljorpas who have acquired the power of developing tumo, the internal heat, and wear but a single
cotton dress (reskyang) or even remain naked. See: “Psychic Sports” on page 122
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
113
•

•••

to leave the country in search of a spiritual teacher. No one endeavoured to detain
him.
Karma's peregrinations were much more fertile in incidents than those of Yeshes,
for the latter at least knew where he was going and under which lama he wished to
practice the mystic life, while Karma had no idea of either and tramped at random.
After a time, as he did not succeed in discovering a magician whom he thought
capable of leading him to the topmost heights of the secret lore, he resolved to seek
one by an occult process.
Karma was a staunch believer in gods and demons. He knew by heart the story of
Milarespa who, with their help, had caused a house to fall down on his enemies, and
remembered many other tales of terrible deities who brought the bloody heads
which he had claimed into the middle of the kyilkhor145 constructed by the magi-
cian. He had acquired himself a certain knowledge regarding kyilkhors. So he drew
one with stones in a narrow gorge and began his conjurations in hopes that the
mighty wrathful Lords Towos would direct him to one of the masters whom they
serve.
In the course of the seventh night a mountain stream that flowed in the gorge sud-
denly rose with startling rapidity. An enormous quantity of water – probably due to
the breaking of a natural dam or to a cloudburst higher up the hill – suddenly swept
across the defile and the young monk was swept away with his kyilkhor and his
small luggage. Whirled along amongst the rocks, Karma was lucky enough to
escape being drowned and came aground at the end of the gorge in an immense
valley. When day broke he saw at a distance, a ritöd146 that stood sheltered by a
rocky wall on the spur of a mountain range.
The sun rose bright as it does on the tableland of Central Asia, and the little white-
washed house appeared rosy and luminous under its first touch. Karma could
clearly discern the rays of light that flashed from it and rested on his head.
Certainly his long-sought-for master lived there. The help of the deities answering
his summons was not to be doubted. He had intended to walk up the gorge and to
cross the mountain range, but they had brought him down to the ritöd. The interven-
tion had manifested itself in a somewhat rough way, Karma admitted, but he
ascribed this to a cause that could not but flatter his vanity. The Towos, he thought,
have not been able to resist the strength of my conjuration, but foreseeing what a
powerful magician I shall become, after I have received proper teaching, felt
angered at the idea of eventually becoming my slaves.
Rejoicing in his glorious future, Karma did not give a thought to the loss of the provi-
sions and clothes that had been carried away by the flood. And as he had stripped
himself of all garments, to resemble Heruka147 when officiating before his kyilkhor,
he now confidently marched toward the hermitage in a state of nature.
As he neared it, a disciple of the anchorite came down to fetch water at a stream.
The trapa almost let fall the bucket he carried when he caught sight of the strange
apparition.
145.Magic diagram
146.Hermitage
147.A deity represented as a naked ascetic.
•
•
114
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

Tibetan climate greatly differs from that of India, and if unclad ascetics, or pseudo-
ascetics, are legion in the latter country, it is not so on the heights of the "Land of
Snows." There, only a very few naljorpas adopt that simple fashion, and as they live
far away from all tracks, in the recesses of wild mountains, one has few opportuni-
ties of catching a glimpse of them.
"Who lives in that ritöd?" inquired Karma.
"My master, the geshes148 Tobsgyais," answered the trapa.
The aspirant magician did not put a second question.
What information did he now require? He knew all that he needed to know. The dei-
ties had led him to his very tsawaü lama.149
"Tell the lama that the Chöskyongs150 have brought him a disciple," said the
naked traveller.
Quite bewildered, the water-carrier reported his words to the hermit, who com-
manded him to show in the strange visitor.
Lama Tobsgyais was a well-read man, the grandson of a Chinese official and of his
Tibetan wife. According to Karma's account he appears to me to have been a gentle
agnostic, who had perhaps adopted a hermit's life by the desire to study without
being disturbed by troublesome people and by an aristocratic taste for solitude. This
is rather frequent in Tibet. In fact, Karma really knew very little about his guru. As we
shall learn, by his own story, he did not see much of him, and the few particulars he
could tell me about his parentage and character he had learnt from two disciples of
the lama who were inmates of the ritöd.
In situation Kushog Tobsgyais' hermitage followed the rule set down in Buddhist
Scriptures:
"Not too near to a village. Not too far from a village."
From his small window the anchorite saw a wide uninhabited valley, while crossing
the hill on which his dwelling was built, was a hamlet, at a distance of half a day's
march.
The hermitage was furnished with an ascetic simplicity; but a large library and some
beautiful scrolls of painting on the walls showed that the hermit was neither poor nor
ignorant of art.
As Karma Dorjee, a tall athletic fellow, clad only in his long plaited hair, stood before
the thin refined scholar he has described to me, they must have formed a curious
picture.
After having prostrated himself with the utmost fervour before the lama, he once
more announced himself as a disciple brought by the deities to the very feet of the
master.
The lama allowed him to relate the story of the kyilkhor, the "miraculous" flood and
so on, without interruption. Then, as Karma once more repeated that he had been
brought "to his feet," Kushog Tobsgyais remarked simply that the place where the
148.A high graduate monk scholar.
149.The spiritual guide.
150.According to Lamaists, deities who have taken an oath to protect the Buddhist doctrine and its followers.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
115
•

•••

water had carried him was rather far from them. Then he inquired the reason of his
wearing no clothes.
When Karma, full of his own importance, had mentioned Heruka and the two years
which he had spent naked in the forest, the hermit looked at him silently for a while,
then, calling one of his attendants, he said calmly:
"Take that poor man into the kitchen that he may sit near the fire and drink very
hot tea. Find him also an old fur robe and give it to him. He has been shivering for
two years."
And with these words he bid him leave.
Karma put on the shabby pagtsa151 with pleasure. The flaming fire, the generously
buttered hot tea refreshed him agreeably after his nocturnal bath. Yet his physical
comfort was diminished by the mortification of his pride.
The lama, he thought, had not welcomed him as he ought to have welcomed a dis-
ciple brought to him "miraculously." However, he intended, after having satisfied his
hunger and taken a little rest, to make the gomchen understand who he was and
what he expected from a teacher. But Kushog Tobsgyais did not give him the oppor-
tunity of further explanations. He seemed even to have entirely forgotten his pres-
ence in the ritöd, though no doubt he had given instructions about him, for the two
disciples continued to feed him well and the very same place, next the fire, was
always put at his disposal.
Days and weeks went and Karma grew impatient. The kitchen, however comfort-
able it was, now seemed to him a prison. He wanted to work, to go out to fetch water
or fuel, but the lama's disciples did not allow him to leave the hermitage. The lama's
orders were positive: He had to eat and warm himself, that was all his duty.
Karma felt more and more ashamed at being treated like a pet animal that is not
expected to do anything in return for its food. At the beginning of his stay he had
repeatedly asked his companions to remind the lama that he expected an audience,
but the latter had always declined to take any message, saying that they would not
dare to trouble their lama, and that when Rinpoche152 wanted to see him he would
send for him.
After a time, Karma gave up asking useless questions. His only comfort was to
watch for the lama's appearance on a small balcony where he sometimes sat, or to
listen when at long intervals, he explained a philosophical treatise to his disciples or
to an occasional visitor. Beside these rare gleams, the empty hours dragged on
while he revolved the various circumstances which had led him where he was again
and again, in his mind.
A little more than one year passed in this way. Karma became a prey to despair. He
would gladly have borne the most cruel ordeals the lama could have had devised,
but this complete forgetfulness amazed him.
Though during his first and only interview with the hermit, he had carefully avoided
telling him anything regarding his low birth, he now suspected that the latter,
through his supernormal powers, had discovered it. Thus he explained the way in
151.Sheep skin.
152.Rinpoche, "precious one." The most reverential title of address for a lama.
•
•
116
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

which he had been treated. Probably the master despised him, did not consider him
worthy to be taught, and fed him only out of pity. Every day this idea took firmer foot-
ing in his mind, and cruelly tortured the proud Karma.
Still convinced that a miracle had brought him to lama Tobsgyais and that no other
guru existed for him in the world, he did not think of undertaking a new journey to
find another master, but the thought of committing suicide sometimes came into his
mind.
Tibetans believe that in order to progress on the mystic path, one must meet one's
true tsawai lama, that is to say the spiritual teacher of whom one has already been
the disciple during previous lives, or if this cannot be contrived, the lama of whom
one has been the loving relative, supporter or faithful servant. The tie formed in that
way is that of the "past deeds"153 as Tibetans call it.
Karma was sinking in despondency when a nephew of the anchorite arrived at the
ritöd. The visitor was a lama Tulku, head of a monastery and travelled with a large
retinue. Clad in shining robes of yellow brocade, wearing a gilt glittering hat shaped
like a pagoda, the lama and his attendants stopped in the plain at the foot of the her-
mitage. Beautiful tents were pitched and after having refreshed himself with tea that
the hermit had sent in an enormous silver teapot, the Tulku went up to his uncle's
dwelling.
During the following days, the Tulku noticed the strange figure of Karma with his
ragged sheep skin robe and his hair which reached to the floor. He asked him why
he was always seated next the fire, doing nothing.
The aspirant magician took time by the forelock. He had at last found favour with the
deities. There could be no doubt that they had aroused this interest in the Tulku 's
mind.
He introduced himself with all his titles, told about his long retreat naked in the for-
est, the conjuration and the kyilkhor in the gorge, the flood, the rays of light which,
springing from the hermitage, rested on his head. He ended by relating the forget-
fulness of Kushog Tobsgyais and entreating the Tulku to plead on his behalf.
From the account which I have heard, it appears probable that the lama to whom
Karma now told his story was of the same stamp as his uncle. He does not appear
to have been in the least moved by pity and merely inquired about the kind of teach-
ing which his interlocutor craved from the hermit.
The question gladdened Karma. Now he had found somebody who would speak to
him about the matter he had so much at heart. He boldly declared that he wished to
acquire magic powers, such as that of flying in the air, of causing the earth to quake.
(...) But he prudently avoided confessing why he wanted to work wonders.
The Tulku – Karma realized later on – was only amused
by such childish ambitions, but he promised to convey his request to Kushog Tob-
sgyais. Then during the two weeks of his visit he did not even look in the young
man's direction again.
The day came when the Tulku took leave of his uncle. Karma looked sadly at the tra-
pas attendants at the foot of the hill, who were holding by the bridle the richly capar-
153.Sngon Las.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
117
•

•••

isoned horses ready to start. The man whom he had considered as a Heaven-sent
protector was to depart without having obtained any answer to his request. Most
likely Kushog Tobsgyais had not granted it.
Despair again overwhelmed him. (...)
The Tulku passed the hermitage's door and Karma was about to salute him with the
usual triple bowing down, when the latter gave him this laconic order:
"Follow me."
Karma Dorjee felt rather astonished. He had never been asked to do any service.
What could the lama want?
When he reached the foot of the hill the Tulku turned toward him:
"I conveyed to Kushog Rinpoche your desire of acquiring the various magic
powers which you mentioned," he said. "
Rimpoche's reply was that he has not got the books which you must study in his
ritöd. A full collection of them exists in the library of my monastery, so Rinpoche has
desired me to take you there, in order that you may begin work. There is a horse for
you, you will travel with my trapas."
Then he left Karma and joined the small group of the dignitaries of his gompa who
had accompanied him in his journey. All turned towards the hermitage, respectfully
bowed their farewell to the invisible anchorite, vaulted into the saddle, and started at
full trot.
Karma remained motionless, lost in amazement. A trapa gave him a push and put
the bridle of a horse in his hand. (...) He found himself on the back of the beast trot-
ting fast with the lama's attendants before he had realized what happened.
The fourth day after his arrival at the gompa, a trapa informed Karma that, accord-
ing to the Tulku 's order, the collection of books mentioned by Kushog Tobsgyais
had been carried in to a tsham khang. He could begin his study at once. Food would
be sent regularly to him from the monastery.
Karma followed his guide and was led up hill to a tiny pleasantly situated white-
washed house. From the window he could look down on the monastery with its
gilded roofs and beyond it a valley enclosed by woody slopes. Inside the cell, next a
small altar, thirty big potis154 carefully wrapped in their "robes"155 and tied between
carved boards, were placed on several shelves.
A wave of joyful pride swept across Karma's mind. At last, some one had begun to
treat him with proper respect.
The trapa informed him that the Tulku did not wish him to remain in strict seclusion.
He was at liberty to live as he liked, to fetch his water at the stream near by, and to
walk outside wherever and whenever he wished. Left alone, Karma buried himself
in the books. He learnt by heart a large number of magic formulas, built scores of
kyilkhors, using more tsampa and butter to make the tormas than for his meals. He
also practiced the many various meditations described in the treatises.
154.Poti, a volume.
155.Tibetan books are made of detached oblong sheets of paper and usually wrapped in a piece of cloth –
cotton or often silk – which is called their robe: "namza." Spelt: nabzah.
•
•
118
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

For about eighteen months, his zeal did not slacken. He went out only to fetch water,
did not speak a single word to the trapas who twice a month brought him his food
and fuel supply, and never so much as glanced through his window at the world out-
side.
Then, slowly, thoughts that had never occurred to him crept into his mind during his
meditations. Certain words of the books, certain figures of the mystic diagrams
appeared to him as pregnant with significations formerly unsuspected. He often
stood long in front of his window, watching the monks going in and out of the monas-
tery. Finally, he walked across the hills, examining the plants and pebbles, looking
attentively at the clouds travelling in the sky, observing the ever-flowing water of the
stream, the play of the lights and shadows. He also spent hours watching the vil-
lages scattered in the valleys below, the peasants working in the fields, the animals
passing loaded on the roads and those who roamed free across the pasture
grounds.
Every evening after lighting the altar lamp, Karma Dorjee sat in meditation, but he
gave up trying to follow the practices taught in the books. Late in the night, and
sometimes till dawn, he remained sunk in a trance, dead to all sensations, to all cog-
itations, seeing himself as on a shore, watching the slowly mounting tide of a white
luminous ocean ready to submerge him.
Several months elapsed and then one day or one night, he did not know which,
Karma Dorjee felt that his body was being lifted from the cushion on which he was
seated. Without changing his usual cross-legged attitude of meditation, he passed
through the door and, floating in the air, travelled a long time. At last he arrived in his
country, in his monastery. It was morning, the monks were coming out of the assem-
bly hall. He recognized a number of them: officials, Tulkus, certain of his old mates.
They appeared tired, painfully preoccupied, with dull, joyless faces and heavy gait.
Karma examined them with curiosity. How puny and insignificant they seemed from
the height where he now stood. How astonished, how awe-struck they would be
when in a moment he would appear to them enthroned in mid-air! And how those
who had treated the low-born monk with contempt would prostrate themselves,
trembling before the triumphant dubtob, the magician who baffled the apparent laws
of nature! (...)
Then, as he dwelt on these ideas of victory, scorn awakened in the inmost depth of
his mind and his elation subsided. He smiled in derision at the meanness of a
revenge on such paltry puppets. They did not interest him any longer. (...) His
thoughts went out to the bliss of watching the flowing tide of the strange rippleless,
white, luminous ocean.
No, he would not show himself to the monks. That Karma Dorjee who had suffered
in the monastery was as contemptible as those who had wickedly humiliated him.
He rejected them all together. (...)
Thus thinking, he started to leave the place. Then, suddenly, the monastery build-
ings were shaken and cracked. The neighbouring mountains pitched and tossed in
confusion, their summits tumbled on each other, while new ones arose. The sun
crossed the sky like a thunderbolt and fell on the earth, another sun sprang out,
piercing the heavens, and the rhythm of the phantasmagoria went on with increas-
ing speed till Karma discerned nothing but a kind of furious torrent whose foaming
waves were made of all beings and things of the world.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
119
•

•••

Visions of this kind are not very rare among Tibetan mystics. They must not be mis-
taken for dreams. The visionary is not asleep. Often, in spite of his imaginary pere-
grinations, the sensations he experiences and the scenery he perceives, he
remains quite clearly conscious of his actual surroundings and of his own personal-
ity. Often, also, when going into a trance where they are liable to be interrupted, they
quite consciously hope that none come by, or speak to them and trouble them in any
other manner. Though they may be themselves incapable of speaking or moving,
they hear and understand what is going on around them; but they do not feel con-
nected with any material objects, all their interest being absorbed in the events and
sensations of the trance. If that state of trance is abruptly broken by any exterior
agent, or if he who experiences it has to break it himself by a strong effort, the shock
that ensues is peculiarly painful and leaves a prolonged feeling of discomfort.
It is to avoid these unpleasant effects and the consequences which they may have
on the general health of those who suffer them, that rules have been devised for
coming out of a period of ecstatic meditation, or even of ordinary meditation, if it has
lasted for any length of time.
As an instance, one is advised to turn the head slowly from one side to another, to
massage the forehead and the crown of the head, to stretch the arms while clasping
the hands behind the back and bending the body backward. There are numbers of
similar exercises, and each one may choose whichever suits him best.
The followers of the Zen sect in Japan, who meditate together in a common hall,
appoint a kind of superintendent who is skilled in detecting when a monk is over-
come by fatigue. He refreshes the fainting and revives their energy by striking them
on one shoulder with a heavy stick. Those who have experienced it agree that the
ensuing sensation is a most pleasant relaxation of the nerves.
When he returned from his strange journey, Karma Dorjee found himself seated at
his usual place in his cell. He curiously inspected the objects around him. His small
room, with the books on the shelves, the altar, the hearth, was the same that he had
seen the day before; nothing had changed during the years that he lived in the
tshams khang.
He got up, looked through the window. The monastery, the valley, the woods wore
their usual appearance. Nothing had changed, yet everything was different.
Karma calmly lighted the fire and when the wood burnt brightly he cut his long hair
and threw it into the flames. Then he made tea, drank and ate without haste, put
some provisions in a bag and went out, carefully closing the tshams khang's door
behind him.
In the monastery he walked straight to the Tulku 's mansion, and meeting a servant
in the courtyard, he told him to inform his master that he was leaving and to convey
him his gratitude for his kind hospitality. Then he left the gompa.
He had already gone some way when he heard somebody calling him. One of the
young monks belonging to the Tulku household ran after him.
"Kushog Rinpoche wishes to see you," he said. Karma Dorjee returned with
him.
"You leave us?" asked the lama politely. "Where are you going to?"
"To bow down at the feet of my guru and thank him," answered Karma.
•
•
120
•
The Dreadful Mystic Banquet
•••

The Tulku remained silent for a while and then said sadly:
"My worshipful uncle is 'gone beyond sorrow'156 six months ago."
Karma Dorjee did not utter a single word.
"If you wish to go to his ritöd," continued the lama "I will give you a horse, it shall
be my parting gift. You will find one of Kushog Tobsgyais' disciples living in the
hermitage."
Karma thanked his host but accepted nothing.
A few days later, he again beheld the white little house from which he had seen the
light springing and coming towards him.
He entered the lama's small private room where he had been admitted but once,
remained long prostrated before the seat of the departed anchorite and spent the
night in meditation.
In the morning he took leave of his master's successor. The latter handed him a
monastic toga that had belonged to the late hermit. Before he died Kushog Tob-
sgyais had expressly commanded that it should be given to him when he came out
of his tshams khang.
From that time on Karma Dorjee led the life of an itinerant ascetic, somewhat like
that of the famous Milarespa whom he deeply venerated. When I happened to meet
him he was already old, but he did not appear to be thinking of settling anywhere.
Few are the anchorites or other naljorpas whose novitiate has proved so strange as
that of Karma. It is because it is, indeed, quite peculiar that I have ventured to give
so long an account of it. Nevertheless, the spiritual training of a disciple always
includes a number of curious incidents. Many strange descriptions which I have
heard, and my own experiences as a "disciple" on the heights of the "Land of
Snows," incline me to believe that most of them are perfectly authentic.
; ; ;v v v
156.A reverential expression to say that a lama is dead six months ago."
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
121
•

•••

Chapter VI: Psychic Sports
The Lung-gom-pas Runners
Under the collective term of lung-gom Tibetans include a large number of practices
which combine mental concentration with various breathing gymnastics and aim at
different results either spiritual or physical.
If we accept the belief current among the Lamaists we ought to find the key to thau-
maturgy in that curious training. Keen investigations do not, however, lead to
extraordinary enthusiasm for the result obtained by those who have practiced it,
seeking to acquire occult powers. Nevertheless, it would also be an error to deny
that some genuine phenomena are produced by the adepts of lung-gom.
Though the effects ascribed to lung-gom training vary considerably, the term lung-
gom is especially used for a kind of training which is said to develop uncommon
nimbleness and especially enables its adepts to take extraordinarily long tramps
with amazing rapidity.
Belief in such a training and its efficacy has existed for many years in Tibet, and
men who travelled with supernormal rapidity are mentioned in many traditions.
We read in Milarespa's biography that at the house of the lama who taught him
black magic there lived a trapa who was fleeter than a horse. Milarespa boasts of
similar powers and says that he once crossed in a few days, a distance which,
before his training, had taken him more than a month. He ascribes his gift to the
clever control of "internal air."
However, it should be explained that the feat expected from the lung-gom-pa is one
of wonderful endurance rather than of momentary extreme fleetness. In this case,
the performance does not consist in racing at full speed over a short distance as is
done in our sporting matches, but of tramping at a rapid pace and without stopping
during several successive days and nights.
Beside having gathered information about the methods used in training lung-gom-
pas, I have been lucky enough to catch a glimpse of three adepts. In this I was
extremely fortunate as, though a rather large number of monks endeavour to prac-
tice some kind of lung-gom exercises, there is no doubt that very few acquire the
desired result, and in fact true lung-gom-pas must be very rare.
I met the first lung-gom-pa in the Chang thang157 of Northern Tibet.
Towards the end of the afternoon, Yongden, our servants and I were riding leisurely
across a wide tableland, when I noticed, far away in front of us, a moving black spot
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
122
•

•••

which my field-glasses showed to be a man. I felt astonished. Meetings are not fre-
quent in that region, for the last ten days we had not seen a human being. Moreover,
men on foot and alone do not, as a rule, wander in these immense solitudes. Who
could the strange traveller be?
One of my servants suggested that he might belong to a trader's caravan which had
been attacked by robbers and disbanded. Perhaps, having fled for life at night or
otherwise escaped, he was now lost in the desert. That seemed possible.
If such was really the case, I would take the lone man with us to some cowherds'
encampment or wherever he might wish to go if not far out of our route.
But as I continued to observe him through the glasses, I noticed that the man pro-
ceeded at an unusual gait and, especially, with an extraordinary swiftness. Though,
with the naked eyes, my men could hardly see anything but a black speck moving
over the grassy ground, they too were not long in remarking the quickness of its
advance. I handed them the glasses and one of them, having observed the traveller
for a while muttered:
"Lama lung-gom-pa chig da.''158
These words "lama lung-gom-pa" at once awakened my interest. I had heard a
great deal about the feats performed by such men and was acquainted with the the-
ory of the training. I had, even, a certain experience of the practice, but I had never
seen an adept of lung-gom actually accomplishing one of these prodigious tramps
which are so much talked about in Tibet.
Was I to be lucky enough to witness such a sight?
The man continued to advance towards us and his curious speed became more
and more evident. What was to be done if he really was a lung-gom-pa ? I wanted to
observe him at close quarters, I also wished to have a talk with him, to put him some
questions, to photograph him. (...) I wanted many things. But at the very first words I
said about it, the man who had recognized him as a lama lung-gom-pa exclaimed:
"Your Reverence will not stop the lama, nor speak to him. This would certainly
kill him. These lamas when travelling must not break their meditation. The god
who is in them escapes if they cease to repeat the ngags, and when thus leaving
them before the proper time, he shakes them so hard that they die."
Put in that way, the warning seemed to express pure superstition. Nevertheless it
was not to be altogether disregarded. From what I knew of the "technique" of the
phenomena, the man walked in a kind of trance. Consequently, a sudden awaken-
ing, though I doubt if it could cause death, would certainly painfully disturb the
nerves of the runner. To what extent that shock would harm him I could not guess
and I did not want to make the lama the object of a more or less cruel experiment.
Other reasons also forbade me to gratify my curiosity. Tibetans had accepted me as
a lady-lama, they knew that I was a professed Buddhist and could not guess the dif-
ference existing between my philosophic conception of the Buddha's doctrine and
lamaist Buddhism.
157.An immense wild grassy region at a high level, inhabited only by a few tribes of nomad herdsmen living in
tents. Literally chang thang means "northern plain," but this term is used to designate any large tract of
wild land, similar to the solitudes of Northern Tibet.
158.Written: blama rlung sgom pa chig hdrah. “It is like a lama lung-gom-pa.”
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
123
•

•••

Common Tibetan folk completely ignore the fact that the term Buddhism includes a
number of sects and views. So, in order to enjoy the confidence, respect and inti-
macy which my religious garb brought me, I was compelled to behave in close
accordance with Tibetan customs, especially with religious ones. This was a seri-
ous hindrance, and often deprived my observations of a great part of their scientific
interest, but it was the unavoidable price I had to pay for being admitted on ground
still much more jealously guarded than the material territory of Tibet. This time,
again, I had to repress my desire for full investigation and remain satisfied with the
sight of the uncommon traveller.
By that time he had nearly reached us; I could clearly see his perfectly calm impas-
sive face and wide-open eyes with their gaze fixed on some invisible far-distant
object situated somewhere high up in space. The man did not run. He seemed to lift
himself from the ground, proceeding by leaps. It looked as if he had been endowed
with the elasticity of a ball and rebounded each tine his feet touched the ground. His
steps had the regularity of a pendulum. He wore the usual monastic robe and toga,
both rather ragged. His left hand gripped a fold of the toga and was half hidden
under the cloth. The right held a phurba.159 His right arm moved slightly at each
step as if leaning on a stick, just as though the phurba, whose pointed extremity was
far above the ground, had touched it and were actually a support.
My servants dismounted and bowed their heads to the ground as the lama passed
before us, but he went his way apparently unaware of our presence.
I thought I had done enough to comply with local customs by suppressing my desire
to stop the traveller. I already began to vaguely regret it and thought that at any rate
I would see some more of the affair. I ordered the servants to remount their beasts
at once and follow the lama. He had already covered a good distance; but without
trying to overtake him, we did not let that distance increase and, with the glasses as
well as with our naked eyes, my son and I looked continually at the lung-gom-pa.
It was no longer possible to distinguish his face, but we could still see the amazing
regularity of his springy steps. We followed him for about two miles and then he left
the track, climbed a steep slope and disappeared in the mountain range that edged
the steppe. Riders could not follow that way and our observations came to an end.
We could only turn back and continue our journey.
I wondered if the lama had, or had not, noticed that we were following him. Of
course, though we were a good distance behind him, anyone in a normal state
would have been aware of the presence of a troop of six riders. But, as I said, the
traveller seemed to be in a trance and I could not therefore tell whether he was only
pretending not to have seen us and climbed the hill to escape our inquisitive looks,
or if he really did not know that he was being followed, and merely went in that direc-
tion because it was his way.
On the morning of the fourth day after we had met the lung-gom-pa, we reached the
territory called Thebgyai, where there are a number of scattered dokpas160
encampments. I did not fail to relate to the herdsmen how we had approached a
lama lung-gom-pa as we joined the track that led to their pasture ground. Now some
of the men had seen the traveller when gathering their cattle together at sunset the
159.Magic dagger
160.Dokpas, literally "men of the solitudes," herdsmen.
•
•
124
•
The Lung-gom-pas Runners
•••

day before we had met him ourselves. From that information I made a rough reckon-
ing. Taking into account the approximate number of hours we had actually travelled
each day at the usual speed of our beasts – leaving out the time spent camping and
resting – I came to the conclusion that in order to reach the place where we met him,
the man, after he had passed near the dokpas, must have tramped the whole night
and next day, without stopping, at about the same speed as he was going when we
saw him.
To walk for twenty-four hours consecutively cannot be considered as a record by the
hillmen of Tibet who are wonderful walkers. Lama Yongden and I, during our tour-
ney from China to Lhasa, have sometimes tramped for fully nineteen hours, without
stopping or refreshing ourselves in any way. One of these marches included the
crossing of the high Deo pass, knee deep in the snow. However, our slow pace
could not in any way be compared to that of the leaping lung-gom-pa, who seemed
as if carried on wings.
And the latter had not started from Thebgyai. Whence had he come and how far
was he still going when we lost sight of him?
Both were a mystery to me. The dokpas thought that he might have come from
Tsang, some monasteries of that province having a reputation as colleges for lung-
gom training in swiftness. Yet they had not spoken to him, and tracks coming from
various directions join up on the Thebgyai territory.
Methodical investigations were impossible in these immense solitudes, or would
have required several months of research without any certainty of obtaining a satis-
factory result. To undertake them was out of the question.
I have just mentioned that monasteries in the Tsang province are renowned for
training in swiftness. There is a legend which recounts the circumstances by which
the most important of them – Shalu gompa – was led to undertake the instruction
and exercise of lung-gom-pas runners.
The heroes of that legend are two prominent lamas: Yungtön Dorje Pal and the his-
torian Bu-stön. The former was famous as a powerful magician who specialized in
the coercion of terrible deities. Born about A.D. 1284 he is said to be the seventh of
the successive reincarnations of Subhuti161 the line of whose reincarnations was
continued, later on, by the Tashi Lamas, the present being the sixteenth reincarna-
tion. Yungtön Dorje Pal lived for a time at the court of the Emperor of the Mongol
dynasty which then ruled in China. His guru is said to have been a mystic lama
whose name was Zurwang Senge162 of whom nothing seems to be known except
through legends and rather fantastic traditions. Yungtön Dorje Pal died at the age of
92 years.
Bu-stön was born at Tho phug in the vicinity of Shigatze in 1288. He wrote several
books of history and arranged the Buddhist Scriptures, translated from Sanskrit,
into the present collection called Kahgyur.
Now the magician Yungtön had decided to perform a solemn dubthabs to coerce
Shinjed,163 the Lord of Death. This rite had to be accomplished every twelve years,
161.A disciple of the historical Buddha
162.Spelt: Zur dwang byampa sengge.
163.Spelt: gshin rje.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
125
•

•••

or the deity would slay a sentient being every day to satisfy his hunger. The effect of
the dubthabs is to bring Shinjed under the control of the Lama magician and to
extort from him a promise, on his oath, to give up the slaughter of human beings for
the twelve years. Some offerings are presented to him during the rite, and daily wor-
ship is instituted as a substitute for the lives which he has sworn to spare.
Bu-stön heard of Yungtön's intention and wishing to ascertain if his friend really pos-
sessed the power of coercing the terrible deity, he proceeded to the latter's temple
accompanied by three other learned lamas. There he found that Shinjed had
already answered Yungtön's summons. His fearful form was "as large as the sky,"
says the story.
The magician told the lamas that they had just come in time to prove the extent of
their love and compassion, He had, he said, coerced the god for the sake of human-
ity, now it was necessary to feed him so that he might be propitiated, and he sug-
gested that one of the lamas should offer himself as victim. The three companions
of Bu-stön declined the invitation under various pretexts and took hasty leave.
Bustön remained alone with Yungtön and declared that if the success of the rite
really required the sacrifice of a human life which would prevent the daily slaughter
of a being for twelve years, he was ready to walk into the wide-open mouth of Shin-
jed.
To this generous proposal the magician replied that he could manage to secure the
purpose of the dubthabs without his friend sacrificing his life. But he would entrust
to him and his lineal successors, the charge of performing the prescribed rite every
twelve years. Bu-stön having accepted the responsibility, Yungtön, by his magic
power, created countless phantom doves and threw them into Shinied's mouth.
Since then, the successive incarnations of Lama Bu-stön who ruled over Shalu
gompa, have kept up the celebration of the propitiating ceremony. It seems that, as
time went on, Shinjed acquired some companions, for the Shalu lamas now speak
of many demons who are evoked upon that occasion.
A runner is required to gather these demons from various parts. This runner is
called Maheketang. The name "mahe" is taken from the buffalo on which Shinjed
rides. This animal is said to be fearless and consequently dares to call the evil spir-
its. At least, such is the explanation given at Shalu.
The elected runner is alternatively a monk from Nyang töd kyid phug or one from
Samding.
Those who aspire to play the part of Maheketang undertake a preliminary training in
either of the above-mentioned monasteries. The training consists in breathing exer-
cises practiced during a strict seclusion in complete darkness, which lasts three
years and three months.
Amongst these exercises the following one enjoys the greatest favour amongst
those many Tibetan ascetics who are not of an especially intellectual type.
The student sits cross-legged on a large and thick cushion. He inhales slowly and
for a long time, just as if he wanted to fill his body with air. Then, holding his breath,
he jumps up with legs crossed, without using his hands and falls back on his cush-
ion, still remaining in the same position. He repeats that exercise a number of times
during each period of practice.
•
•
126
•
The Lung-gom-pas Runners
•••

Some lamas succeed in jumping very high in that way. Some women train them-
selves in the same manner.
As one can easily believe the object of this exercise is not acrobatic jumping.
According to Tibetans, the body of those who drill themselves for years, by that
method, become exceedingly light; nearly without weight. These men, they say, are
able to sit on an ear, of barley without bending its stalk or to stand on the top of a
heap of grain without displacing any of it. In fact the aim is levitation.
A curious test has been devised, and the student who passes it with success is
believed capable of performing the feats here above mentioned or, at least, of
approaching proficiency.
A pit is dug in the ground, its depth being equal to the height of the candidate. Over
the pit is built a kind of cupola whose height from the ground level to its highest point
again equals that of the candidate. A small aperture is left at the top of the cupola.
Now between the man seated cross-legged at the bottom of the pit and that open-
ing, the distance is twice the height of his body. For instance, if the man's height is 5
feet 5 inches, the top hole will be at 10 feet 10 inches from the pit's bottom.
The test consists in jumping cross-legged, as during the training exercises which I
have described, and coming out through the small opening at the top of the cupola.
I have heard Khampas declare that this feat has been performed in their country, but
I have not myself witnessed anything like it.
According to information which I have gathered on the spot, the final test that con-
secrates the success of candidate "Calling buffalos"164 is accomplished somewhat
differently.
After their seclusion in darkness for three years, those monks who deem them-
selves capable of going successfully through the test, proceed to Shalu where they
are immured in one of the grave-like huts which I have already described. But, at
Shalu, the opening is in the side of the cell. The candidate does not have to leap
through the roof. A stool is left him, so that he can climb out of the pit where he has
remained for seven days. He must crawl out through the square hole in the side of
the cell. The size of this hole is calculated in proportion to the span between the
second finger and thumb of the candidate's hand.
He who succeeds is qualified to become Maheke-tang.
It is difficult to understand that a training which compels a man to remain motionless
for years can result in the acquisition of peculiar swiftness. However, this is the spe-
cial training of Shalu, and in other places we meet with different and apparently
more rational methods, including the actual practice of marching. Moreover, it must
be understood that the lung-gom method does not aim at training the disciple by
strengthening his muscles, but by developing in him psychic states that make these
extraordinary marches possible.
The Maheketang starts on the eleventh day of the tenth month of the Tibetan
year;165 after visiting Lhasa, Samye, and several other places, he is back at Shalu
on the 25th of the same month. He immediately sets out again, goes to Shigatze,
164.Maheketang
165.corresponding to November
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
127
•

•••

makes an extended tour in the highlands of Tsang (Tsang töd) and returns to Shalu
after one month's time. Then the lineal successor of Bu-stön performs the propitia-
tion rites, as Maheketang's invitations to the demons are, apparently, always
accepted without demur.
I, by chance, caught a glimpse of another lung-gom-pa in the region inhabited by
some independent tribes of Tibetan origin in the Szetchuanese Far West. But this
time I had not the opportunity of watching him tramp.
We were travelling in a forest, Yongden and I walking ahead of our servants and
beasts, when at the turning of the path, we came upon a naked man with iron chains
rolled all round his body.
He was seated on a rock and seemed so deeply buried in thoughts that he had not
heard us coming. We stopped, astonished, but he must have suddenly become
aware of our presence, for after gazing at us a moment, he jumped up and threw
himself into the thickets more quickly than a deer. For a while we heard the noise of
the chains jingling on his body growing rapidly fainted and fainter, then all was
silence again.
"That man is a lung-gom-pa," said Yongden to me. "I have already seen one like
him. They wear these chains to make themselves heavy, for through the practice
of lung-gom, their bodies have become so light that they are always in danger of
floating in the air."
My third meeting with a lung-gom-pa happened in Ga, a region of Kham, in Eastern
Tibet. I was again travelling with my small caravan. The man appeared under the
familiar and commonplace figure of an arjopa, that is to say a poor pilgrim carrying
his luggage on his back. Thousands of such fellows may be seen on all the tracks of
Tibet, so we did not pay much attention to a member of such a large tribe.
These needy, solitary pedestrians have the habit of attaching themselves to any
trader's caravan or to any rich traveller whom they happen to meet on their way and
following them. They walk beside the pack animals, or if these are few and lightly
loaded, so that they trot together with the riders, the beggars who, of course, fall
behind, tramp on till they join the party at the evening camping. This is not generally
difficult, for during long journeys Tibetans start at daybreak and stop at about mid-
day in order that their beasts may rest and graze during the whole afternoon.
The trouble that the arjopa gives himself to hurry after the horsemen, or any odd
help he is always ready to give the servants, are rewarded by a daily evening meal
and occasional buttered tea and tsampa from the travellers themselves.
According to this custom, the man whom we had met attached himself to our party.
We learnt from him that he had been staying at the Pabong monastery in Kham, and
was going to the Tsang province. A pretty long journey which, done on foot and beg-
ging on the way, would take three or four months. However, such tramps are under-
taken by thousands of Tibetan pilgrims.
Our companion had already spent a few days with us when, in consequence of a
slight break-down, it was nearly noon before we started. Thinking that the pack-
mules would be late in crossing a ridge that lay ahead of us, I rode on with my son
and a servant, to look for water and a grassy place where we could camp before
dusk.
•
•
128
•
The Lung-gom-pas Runners
•••

When the master travels ahead, the man who accompanies him always carries a
vessel to make tea and some provisions, so that the gentleman or the lama may
have a meal while waiting for the arrival of the luggage and tents. My servant had
not failed to comply with this habit, and it was this point so trivial in itself which
caused the display of the lung-gom-pa's abilities.
The way to the pass was longer than I had suspected, and I soon realized that the
pack-mules would not reach the top of the ridge before nightfall. It was out of the
question to let them attempt going down the other side of the range in the dark, so
having reached a grassy spot near a brooklet, I stopped there. We had already
drank tea and were collecting dry cow-dung to feed the fire166 when I saw the arjopa
climbing the slope at some distance below us, progressing with extraordinary rapid-
ity. As he came nearer, I could see that he was walking with the same peculiar nim-
ble springing gait which I had noticed in the lama lung-gom-pa of Thebgyai.
When he reached us, the man stood quite still for a while staring straight before him.
He was not at all out of breath, but appeared only half conscious and incapably of
speaking or moving. However, the trance gradually subsided and the arjopa came
back to his normal state. Answering my questions, he told me that he had begun the
lung-gom training for acquiring fleetness with a gomchen who lived near the
Pabong monastery. His master having left the country, he intended to go to Shalu
gompa in Tsang.
He did not tell me any more and looked sad the whole evening. On the morrow, he
confessed to Yongden that the trance had come on him involuntarily and had been
produced by a most vulgar thought.
As he was walking along with the servants who led my mules, he had begun to feel
impatient. They were going so slowly, he thought, and during that time we were, no
doubt, grilling on the fire the meat he had seen my servant carry with him. When the
three other servants and he himself would have overtaken us they would have to
pitch the tents, to look after the beasts, and so there would only be time to drink tea
and eat tsampa before retiring to sleep.
He visualized our little party. He saw the fire, the meat on the red embers, and sunk
in contemplation gradually became unconscious of his surroundings. Then,
prompted by the desire of sharing our meal, he accelerated his pace and in so doing
mechanically fell into the special gait which he was learning. The habitual associa-
tion of that peculiar gait with the mystic words his master had taught him, caused
the mental recitation of the proper formula. The latter led to the regulation of the
breath in the prescribed rhythm, and the trance followed. Nevertheless, the concen-
tration of his thoughts on the grilled meat dominated everything.
The novice regarded himself as a sinner. The mixture of gluttony, holy mystic words
and lung-gom exercises seemed to him sacrilegious.
My lama-son did not fail to report the confidences he had received. I felt interested
and put different questions to the novice. He was most unwilling to answer, but I
managed to obtain some information which confirmed what I knew already. He had
166.With the exception of woody regions, the cattle dung is the only fuel used in Tibet. In the parts of the
country inhabited by dokpas, travellers collect what is left by the animals on the pasture grounds to light
their camp fire.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
129
•

•••

been told that sunset and clear nights were favourable conditions for the walker. He
had also been advised to train himself by looking fixedly at the starry sky.
I suppose that, like most Tibetan mystics, he had taken an oath not to divulge the
teaching imparted by his master and that my questions troubled him.
The third day after his racing performance, when we awoke, at daybreak, he was no
longer in the tents. He had fled at night, perhaps using his power of lung-gom and,
this time, for a more worthy purpose than that of sharing a "bonne bouche."
The information which I obtained from different sources regarding the peculiar prac-
tice of lung-gom may be summarized as follows:
The first step before undertaking the training is, as usual, to acquire power by
the angkur rite. One must then, under the guidance of an experienced teacher,
drill oneself for several years in various kinds of breathing exercises. It is only
when the disciple has acquired a sufficient degree of proficiency that he is
permitted to attempt the racing performance itself.
A new angkur is conferred at this stage and a mystic formula167 imparted by the
master to the novice. The latter is advised to concentrate his thoughts on the
cadenced mental recitation of that formula with which, during his walk, the in and
out breathing must be in rhythm, the steps keeping time with the breath and the syl-
lables of the formula. The walker must neither speak, nor look from side to side. He
must keep his eyes fixed on a single distant object and never allow his attention to
be attracted by anything else.
When the trance has been reached, though normal consciousness is for the greater
part suppressed, it remains sufficiently alive to keep the man aware of the obstacles
in his way, and mindful of his direction and goal.
Wide desert spaces, flat ground, and especially evening twilight are said to be
favourable conditions. Even if one has already made a long tramp during the day
and feels tired, the trance is often easily attained at sunset. Fatigue is then no longer
felt and the traveller can continue walking for miles.
The first hours of the day are also favourable, but in a lesser degree.
Noon and early afternoon, narrow valleys, woodlands uneven ground are consid-
ered unfavourable conditions and only adepts in lung-gom are deemed capable of
overcoming the adverse influences which emanate from them.
These explanations seem to imply that uniformity in the landscape and absence of
near-by conspicuous objects are helpful in attaining the trance. It is certain that a
wide, desert plain offers fewer occasions of distracting attention from the formula
and the movement of the breath, than a ravine half obstructed with rocks and
bushes, noisy mountain streams, etc. As for the regularity of the pace it cannot be
easily kept up on a rough uneven path.
From my own superficial experience of the practice, though desert tablelands are
choice ground, I feel convinced that a forest of tall straight trees, devoid of under-
growth and crossed by tolerably even paths, may be quite favourable to the trance,
perhaps also on account of the uniformity of the landscape. However, this is my own
167.The formula differs according to the tradition of the mystic school to which the lama belongs.
•
•
130
•
The Lung-gom-pas Runners
•••

idea and is based on a single personal observation which I made in the primeval for-
ests of Poyul.
Any clear night is deemed good for the training of beginners, but strong starlight is
especially favourable. One is often advised to keep the eyes fixed on a particular
star. This appears connected with hypnotic effects, and I have been told that among
novices who train themselves in that way, some stop walking when "their" star sinks
below the skyline or rises above their head. Others, on the contrary, do not notice its
disappearance because, by the time that the star has passed out of sight, they have
formed a subjective image of it which remains fixed before them.
Some initiates in the secret lore also assert that, as a result of long years of practice,
after he has travelled over a certain distance, the feet of the lung-gom-pa no longer
touch the ground and that he glides on the air with an extreme celerity.168
Setting aside exaggeration, I am convinced from my limited experiences and what I
have heard from trustworthy lamas, that one reaches a condition in which one does
not feel the weight of one's body. A kind of anaesthesia deadens the sensations that
would be produced by knocking against the stones or other obstacles on the way,
and one walks for hours at an unaccustomed speed, enjoying that kind of light
agreeable dizziness well known to motorists at high speed.
Tibetans distinguish between the regular prolonged tramps accomplished by the
lung-gom-pas and those of the pawos possessed mediums, who go into trances
involuntarily and walk with no definite goal in view.
Intellectual lamas do not deny the reality of the phenomena brought about, in the
long run, by lung-gom practices, but they care little for them.
Their attitude reminds us of that ascribed to the Buddha, in an old story.
It is said that the Buddha was once journeying with some of his disciples and met an
emaciated Yogin, all alone in a hut in the middle of a forest.
The Master stopped and inquired how long the man had been living there, practic-
ing austerities.
"Twenty-five years," answered the Yogin. "And what power have you acquired by
such long and arduous exertion?" asked the Buddha. "I am able to cross a river
by walking on the water," proudly replied the anchorite.
"My poor fellow!" said the Buddha with commiseration.
"Have you really wasted so many years for such trifling result? Why, the ferry
man will take you to the opposite bank for a small coin."
The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire up in the Snows
To spend the winter in a cave amidst the snows, at an altitude that varies between
11,000 and 18,000 feet, clad in a thin garment or even naked, and escape freezing,
is a somewhat difficult achievement. Yet numbers of Tibetan hermits go safely each
168.Mentions of such accomplishments are repeatedly found in the Padma bkah thang and in various other
books. It is styled rkang mgyogs ngo sgrubs, pronounced kang gyog ngo dub, "success in swiftness of
foot."
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
131
•

•••

year through this ordeal. Their endurance is ascribed to the power which they have
acquired to generate tumo.169
The word tumo signifies heat, warmth, but is not used in Tibetan language to
express ordinary heat or warmth. It is a technical term of mystic terminology, and
the effects of that mysterious heat are not confined to warming the anchorites who
can produce it.
Tibetan adepts of the secret lore distinguish various kinds of tumo: exoteric tumo,
which arises spontaneously in the course of peculiar raptures and, gradually, folds
the mystic in the "soft, warm mantle of the gods"; esoteric tumo, that keeps the her-
mits comfortable on the snowy hills; mystic tumo, which can only claim a distant and
quite figurative connection with the term "warmth," for it is the experience of "para-
disiac bliss" in this world.
In the secret teaching, tumo is also the subtle fire which warms the generative fluid
and drives the energy in it, till it runs all over the body along the tiny channels of the
tsas.170
Superstition and odd physiological ideas have contributed to give birth to many
extraordinary stories on this subject, one of which I will venture to briefly relate.
The famous ascetic, Reschungpa, anxious to become an erudite, left his master
Milarespa, against the latter's advice, to study the philosophic literature at Lhasa.
Lacking his spiritual father's blessing, things turned badly for him – at least from a
religious point of view. A rich man became quite enthusiastic about the young
lama's learning and mastery of occult lore and, in order to attach him to his house,
he gave him his only child as wife. This happened before the reform of Tsong Khapa
at a time when all lamas were allowed to marry. The girl did not in the least share her
father's admiration for Reschungpa, but she was obliged to obey him, and in
revenge made life rather hard for her poor husband, who might well regret having
yielded to the attraction of wealth.
His meekness in bearing ill-treatment did not soften his wife's heart. She went so far
as to stab him with a knife. And lo! instead of blood, generative fluid ran out of the
wound. By the practice of tumo – so said the lama who told me the story with abso-
lute conviction – the body of Reschungpa had been filled with the seed of life.
To do justice to Tibetans, I must add that another lama scoffed at the tale and thus
explained it. Truly, through tumo practices one may fill one's body with generative
force which allows psychic creations, but this is subtle, invisible energy171 and not
gross material substance.
However, only a few, even in mystic circles, are thoroughly acquainted with these
several kinds of tumo, while the wonderful effects of the tumo that warms and keeps
alive the hermits in the snowy wilds are known to every Tibetan. It does not follow
that the process by which that mysterious heat is produced is equally familiar to all
of them. On the contrary. It is kept secret by the lamas who teach it, and they do not
fail to declare that information gathered by hearsay or by reading is without any
169.Written: gtumo.
170.Written: rtsa, which means at once vein, artery and nerve.
171.shugs
•
•
132
•
The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire
•••

practical result if one has not been personally taught and trained by a master who is
himself an adept.
Moreover, only those who are qualified to undertake the training may hope to enjoy
its fruit. The most important qualifications required are:
•
to be already skilled in the various practices connected with breathing;
•
to be capable of a perfect concentration of mind, going as far as the trance in
which thoughts become visualized;
•
and to have received the proper angkur from a lama possessed with the power
of conferring it.
Tumo initiation172 is preceded by a long period of probation.
Among other objects, I think probation aims at testing the robustness of the candi-
dates. As great as may be my confidence in the tumo method, I still doubt whether it
could be safely practiced by people of weak constitution. It is probable, however,
that tumo's teachers, wisely, endeavour to avoid failures that might prove harmful to
presumptuous disciples and lower their own repute.
I do not know whether, when yielding to my pressing requests and shortening my
time of probation, the venerable lama who "empowered" me only wanted to get rid
of me or not. He simply told me to go to a lonely spot, to bathe there in an icy moun-
tain stream, and then, without drying my body or putting on my clothes, to spend the
night motionless in meditation.
Winter had not yet begun, but the level of the place, about 10,000 feet high, made
the night rather chilly, and I felt very proud of not catching cold.
Later on I took another bath of the same kind, this time involuntarily, when I lost foot-
ing as I was fording the Mekong River, near Rakshi in Northern Tibet. When I
reached the shore, in a few minutes my clothes froze on me. (...) I had no spare
ones.
One may easily understand that Tibetans, who are frequently exposed to accidents
caused by a hard climate, hold a method that protects them against the cold in high
esteem.
Once initiated, one must renounce all fur or woollen clothing and never approach
the fire to warm oneself.
After a short period, during which he exerts himself under the close supervision of
his master, the novice must retire to a very remote, absolutely solitary place situ-
ated high up on the hills. In Tibet "high up" means generally an altitude well above
10,000 feet. According to tumo teachers and adepts, one must never practice the
training exercises inside a house, or near inhabited places. They believe that foul air
produced by smoke and smells, together with various occult causes, impede the
success of the student and may even harm him.
Once conveniently settled, the disciple must see nobody besides his lama, who
may visit him occasionally, or to whose hermitage he may repair at long intervals.
172.Or more exactly and literally "empowerment," angkur: the rite by which a peculiar power is communicated
by the master to his disciple.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
133
•

•••

The novice must begin his training each day befored dawn and finish the special
exercise relating to tumo before sunrise, because as a rule he has to perform one or
another meditation at that time. The practice must be done in the open, and one
must be either naked or clothed in a single cotton garment.
Beginners may sit on a straw mat, if they own one, or on a piece of hard sackcloth or
a wooden stool. More advanced disciples sit on the bare ground, and at a still higher
degree of proficiency, on the snow or the ice of a frozen pond or stream.
They must not breakfast or even drink anything, especially any hot drink, before
practicing.
Two postures are allowed. Either the usual meditation posture cross-legged or
seated in Western fashion, each hand placed on the corresponding knee, the
thumb, the forefinger and the little finger being extended, and the middle and fourth
fingers bent under the palm.
Various breathing drills are first performed which aim at clearing the passage of the
air in the nostrils.
Then pride, anger, hatred, covetousness, sloth, stupidity are mentally rejected with
the rhythmic breathing out. All blessings from saintly beings, the Buddha's spirit, the
five wisdoms, all that is good and lofty in the world are attracted and assimilated
while drawing in the breath.
Now, composing oneself for a while one dismisses all cares and cogitations. Having
become perfectly calm, one imagines that a golden lotus exists in one's body, on a
level with the navel. In this lotus, shining like the sun, stands the syllable Ram.
Above Ram is the syllable ma. From Ma Dorjee Naljorma173 issues.
These mystic syllables, which are called "seed," must not be regarded as mere writ-
ten characters, or symbolic representations of things, but as living beings standing
erect and endowed with motive power. For instance ram is not the mystic name of
the fire, it is the seed of fire. Hindus attach great importance to the right pronuncia-
tion of these "seed formulas."174 They think that their power resides in the sound
which they believe to be creative. Certain Tibetan mystics agree that ram correctly
pronounced, may produce fire, yet these mystic syllables are not generally used in
Tibet as sound, but rather as representations of elements, deities, etc. Tibetans
identifying ram with the fire, think that he who knows how to make mental use of the
subjective image of that word, can set anything ablaze or even produce flames with-
out apparent fuel.
As soon as one has imagined Dorjee Naljorma springing from the syllable ma, one
must identify oneself with her. When one has "become" the deity, one imagines the
letter A placed in the navel and the letter Ha175 at the top of one's head.
Slow, deep inspirations act as bellows and wake up a smouldering fire, the size and
shape of a minute ball.176
173.A feminine deity
174.bija mantes
175.A letter of the Tibetan alphabet.
176.Tibetan literal similitude is, "the size and shape of goat dung."
•
•
134
•
The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire
•••

This fire exists in A. Each inspiration produces the sensation of a breath of wind
penetrating the abdomen at the height of the navel and increasing the force of the
flames.177
Then, each deep inspiration is followed by a retention of the breath. Gradually the
time spent holding in the breath is increased more and more.
One's thoughts continue to follow the waking up of fire which ascends along the
uma vein arising in the middle of the body.
Tibetans have borrowed from India the three mystic nadi178 which play an important
part in the various yoga psychic trainings. In Tibetan, nadis are called tsas and
respectively named roma, kyangma and uma.
These so-called "arteries" are not supposed to be true arteries containing blood, but
exceedingly thin nerves that distribute currents of psychic energy. The three tsas
just mentioned are the most important, but there exist countless others.
However, enlightened mystics consider the tsa system as devoid of any physical
reality. According to their opinion it is but symbolical imagery.
The exercise goes on, through ten stages, but one must understand that there
exists no pause between them. The different subjective visions, as well as the sen-
sations which accompany them, succeed each other in a series of gradual modifi-
cations.
Inhalations, retentions of the breath and expirations continue rhythmically, and a
mystic formula is continually repeated. The mind must remain perfectly concen-
trated and "one pointed" on the vision of the fire and the sensation of warmth which
ensues.
The ten stages may be briefly described as follows:
1.   The central artery uma is imagined – and subjectively seen – as thin as the
thinnest thread or as a hair, yet filled with the ascending flame and crossed by
the current of air produced by the breath.
2.    The artery has increased in size and become as large as the little finger.
3.    It continues to increase and appears to be the size of an arm.
4.    The artery fills the whole body, or rather the body has become the tsa itself, a
kind of tube filled with blazing fire and air.
5.    The bodily form ceases to be perceived. Enlarged beyond all measure, the
artery engulfs the whole world and the naljorpa feels himself to be a storm-
beaten flame among the glowing waves of an ocean of fire.
Beginners whose mind has not yet acquired the habit of very protracted
meditation go more quickly through these five stages than more advanced
disciples, who progress slowly from one to another, sunk in deep
contemplation. Yet, even the quickest ones take about an hour to reach the
fifth stage.
Now the subjective visions repeat themselves in reverse order.
177.In other tumo exercises, drops of oil must be imagined as oozing from Ha and falling into the fire situated
in A, to feed it.
178.Arteries, veins
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
135
•

•••

6.    The stormy wind abates, the fiery waves sink lower and are less agitated, the
blazing ocean narrows and is absorbed in the body.
7.    The artery, which is reduced to the size of an arm, is seen again with the fire
enclosed in it.
8.    The artery decreases to the size of the little finger.
9.    It becomes as thin as a hair.
10.   It entirely disappears: the fire ceases utterly to be perceived, as well as all
forms, all representations whatsoever. All ideas of any kind of objects vanish
likewise. The mind sinks into the great "Emptiness" where the duality knower
and the object perceived does not exist any longer.
It is a trance which, according to the spiritual and psychic development of the nal-
jorpa, is more or less deep and more or less prolonged.
The exercise, either with or without the five last stages, may be repeated during the
day or whenever one is suffering from cold. But the training, properly speaking, is
done during the early practice before dawn.
It is probable that Milarespa resorted to it when he happened to be unexpectedly
surrounded by the snow in a cave of the Lachi Kang (near the mount Everest) and
found himself compelled to stay there till the next spring. He made his adventure the
subject of a poem part of which is freely translated below.
Disgusted with the worldly life
sought solitude on the slopes of Lachi Kang.
Heavens and earth having held a council,
Sent me the tempest as their messenger
The airy and watery elements
Associated with the Southern dark clouds.
They imprisoned the sun and the moon,
Blew the small stars away from the sky
And shrouded the large ones in the mist.
Then, it snowed continually for nine days and nights,
The biggest flakes were as big as the fleece of wool,
They came down flying like birds.
The small ones were the size of peas and mustard seeds,
They came down rolling and whirling.
The greatness of the snowfall was beyond all expression,
High up it covered the crest of the glacier ranges,
Low down it buried, up to their tops, the trees of the forest.
The black hills appeared to be whitewashed.
The frost flattened the billowy lakes
And the blue running streams were hidden under the ice.
The mountains and the valleys were levelled and looked like a plain.
Men were prisoners in the villages,
Domestic animals suffered from famine,
Birds and wild beasts fasted,
Mice and rats were sealed under ground like a treasure
During that time of calamity.
•
•
136
•
The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire
•••

The snow, the wintry blast and my thin cotton garment
fought against each other on the white mountain.
The snow as it fell on me, melted into a stream,
The roaring blast was broken against the thin
cotton robe which enclosed fiery warmth,
The life and death struggle of the fighter could there be seen
And I, having won the victory, left a landmark for the hermits
Demonstrating the great virtue of tumo.
Milarespa describes his impressions as a poet, but excepting the fact that he was
shut up unexpectedly in the snows, without sufficient provisions and a proper shel-
ter, there is nothing exceptional in his experience.
Many Tibetan hermits spend the winter in surroundings resembling those that he
depicts.
I am not so presumptuous as to compare my wintry "villegiatures" on the Tibetan
hills with the exertions of anchorites of Milarespa ilk, yet scenery like that of which
he tells is familiar to me.
I, too, have lived in caves and huts on high altitudes. Though I did not lack provi-
sions, and had fuel enough to light a fire whenever I wished it, I yet know the hard-
ships of that life. But I also remember the perfect silence, the delightful aloofness
and the wonderful peace in which my hermitage was bathed, and I do not think that
those who spend their days in such wise need to be pitied. I would rather say they
are to be envied.
Beside the exercises which I have outlined, there exist a few others aiming at pro-
ducing tumo. However, they are all more or less alike. The process always com-
bines prolonged retention of the breath and visualization of fire. This, in fact,
amounts to auto-suggestion.
One of the six occult doctrines taught by Narota (About Narota, See “Disciples of
Yore and their Contemporary Emulators” on page 103.) is said to have included
tumo.
Here is an abridged account of Narota's method. One must bear in mind that – as it
has already been stated – such exercises were devised for the use of disciples who
had already thoroughly drilled themselves for years in preparatory breathing and
other gymnastics.
The posture of the body is described as follows:
Squatting with the legs crossed, the hands passing under the thighs and then
clasped together.
In that posture, one must
1.   turn the stomach from right to left thrice, and from left to right thrice;
2.    churn the stomach as hard as possible;
3.    shake the body in the way "a restive horse shakes himself," and perform a
short leap while keeping the legs in the same crossed position. These three
exercises must be repeated thrice successively and concluded with a leap,
jumping as high as possible.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
137
•

•••

It does not seem to me very wonderful that a man should feel warm after performing
this feat. The exercise is borrowed from Indian hatha yoga practices, but in hatha
yoga treatises it is not connected with the kind of tumo known to Tibetans.
The process continues by holding in the breath, until the abdomen becomes "the
shape of a pot."179
Next comes the visualization of Dorjee Naljorma as in the exercise previously
described. Then a sun is imagined in the palm of each hand, on the sole of each foot
and below the navel.
By rubbing together the suns placed in the hands and in the feet, fire flares up and
strikes the sun below the navel, which flares up in its turn and fills the whole body
with fire.
With each expiration of the breath, the world is visualized as being filled with fire.
The exercise ends by twenty-one big leaps180.
Though there are certain resemblances in the images visualized in these two meth-
ods the difference between them is nevertheless considerable, for while the second
includes leaps and gesticulations, the former requires complete immobility.
It is not impossible that here, as in many other cases, certain elements of the train-
ing have been borrowed from the autochthonous Bönpos occultists. One of the lat-
ter once told me that it is the visualization of the fire, rather than the motion of the
breath, which produces warmth during the trance. As I did not agree, he added: "A
man may be killed by suggestion, he may kill himself by auto-suggestion.181
If death can be produced in that way, so much more easily may heat be generated."
Inhalations, retentions and expirations of the breath are accomplished mechani-
cally, in the prescribed order, by those who are already well trained in the tumo prac-
tice. They do not break the concentration of the mind on the mirage of the fire, nor
the repetition of the mystic formula which must accompany the contemplation.
These advanced students do not need to make any effort of imagination to see the
growing intensity of the fire. In their case, the process goes on by itself as a result of
habit which they have acquired, and a pleasant feeling of warmth spreads gradually
all over the body, which is the aim of the practice.
Sometimes, a kind of examination concludes the training of the tumo students.
Upon a frosty winter night, those who think themselves capable of victoriously
enduring the test are led to the shore of a river or a lake. If all the streams are frozen
in the region, a hole is made in the ice. A moon-light night, with a hard wind blowing,
is chosen. Such nights are not rare in Tibet during the winter months.
The neophytes sit on the ground, cross-legged and naked. Sheets are dipped in the
icy water, each man wraps himself in one of them and must dry it on his body. As
soon as the sheet has become dry, it is again dipped in the water and placed on the
novice's body to be dried as before. The operation goes on in that way until day-
179.That very expression I have also heard from Tibetan anchorites.
180. From Chös drug bsdus pahi zin bris, "Treatise of the six doctrines," ascribed to Narota.
181.I need not to say that the terms suggestion and auto-suggestion are mine. The Tibetan used the words,
"killed by the power of mind"; kill himself "by his own imagination."
•
•
138
•
The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire
•••

break. Then he who has dried the largest number of sheets is acknowledged the
winner of the competition.
It is said that some dry as many as forty sheets in one night. One should perhaps
make large allowances for exaggeration, or perhaps for the size of the sheets which
in some cases may have become so small as to be almost symbolical. Yet I have
seen some respas dry a number of pieces of cloth the size of a large shawl.
According to the old rule, one must have dried at least three sheets to be a true
respa entitled to wear the white cotton skirt, insignia of proficiency in tumo. But I
doubt if the rule is strictly observed nowadays.
Respa means one who wears but a single cotton garment in all seasons and at any
height. Yet respas who slip warm clothes on under their cotton robes are not lacking
in Tibet. They are either complete frauds or monks who have really gone through
tumo training, but have not pursued it long enough to obtain its full benefits.
Nevertheless, though there are frauds and mediocrities, some tumo adepts go
beyond the respa and, rejecting even their cotton garment, live entirely naked in the
recesses of the high mountain ranges for long periods, sometimes it is said even for
life.
Tibetans feel rather proud of such feats and do not fail to scoff at the naked Indian
yogins whom they meet when going on a pilgrimage to India. They do not under-
stand that, with Indians, nakedness is the symbol of absolute renunciation and not a
display of extraordinary physical endurance.
One of these super-respas who had trained himself in tumo near Kang Tise,182
while journeying over the plains of India with another respa and a lay servant, from
Nepal to Gaya, happened to see a pretentious-looking sadhu lying naked and sun-
baked on a mat.
"Old chap, you should go naked like that and lie on tso Mophang's shore,183 then
you will surely pull another face" said the Tibetan anchorite mockingly to the Indian
who, of course, did not understand his language, nor why the three travellers irrev-
erently burst out laughing at him.
This was related to me by the hermit himself who, in his old age, still enjoyed this lit-
tle joke of his younger days.
In fact, when one begins the training, the phenomenon of increasing heat, or per-
haps in some cases, the subjective sensation of warmth, only lasts while practicing
the exercise. When the concentration of mind and the breathing gymnastics cease,
cold is again gradually felt. On the contrary, it is said that, with those students who
have persevered in the training practice for many years, the production of heat
becomes a natural function of the organism, which works all by itself, as soon as the
weather grows cold.
Beside drying wet sheets on one's body, there exist various other tests to ascertain
the degree of heat which the neophyte is able to radiate. One of these tests consists
in sitting in the snow. The quantity of snow melted under the man and the distance
at which it melts around him are taken as measures of his ability.
182.Tibetan name of Kailas mountain, in Western Tibet.
183.A sacred lake near Kailas mountain, about 15,000 feet high.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
139
•

•••

It is difficult for us to get a perfectly correct idea about the extent of the results
obtained through tumo training, but some of these feats are genuine. Hermits really
do, live naked, or wearing one single thin garment during the whole winter in the
high regions I have mentioned. I am not the only one who has seen some of them. It
has been said that some members of the Mount Everest expedition had an occa-
sional glimpse of one of these naked anchorites.
In conclusion I may say that I have myself obtained remarkable results from my
small experience of tumo.
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
Tibetan mystics are not talkative; those of them who accept disciples teach them
according to methods in which discourses have but little place. The disciples of the
contemplative hermits seldom see their master and only at intervals determined by
the spiritual attainment and needs of the novice.
A few months or a few years may elapse between these meetings. But in spite of
their seeming aloofness, master and disciples – especially advanced disciples – do
not lack means of communication when they deem it necessary.
Telepathy is a branch of the Tibetan secret lore and seems, in the "Land of Snows,"
to play the part that wireless telegraphy has recently taken in the West. Yet, while
apparatus for wireless transmissions are, in Occidental countries, at the public's
disposal, the subtler ways of sending messages "on the wind" remain the privilege
of a small minority of adepts in that art in Tibet.
Telepathy is not altogether a novelty to Westerners, psychic research societies
have, more than once, called attention to telepathic phenomena. These, however,
usually seem to have occurred by chance. The author of the phenomenon was not
aware of his part in it. Under such peculiar circumstances, he had sent forth the
mysterious waves that had reached, at a greater or lesser distance, a human
receiver, but he had not done this knowingly and on purpose. On the other hand, the
experiments made to transmit volitional telepathic messages have given doubtful
results, for they could not be repeated successfully as often as desired.
Things are different among Tibetans. They assert that telepathy is a science, which
can be learnt like any other science, by those who have proper teaching and are fit
instruments to put the theory into practice.
Various ways are mentioned for the acquisition of telepathic power, though Tibetan
adepts of secret lore are unanimous in ascribing the cause of the phenomena to an
intense concentration of thought.
One may remark that as far as telepathy has been observed and studied in Western
countries, its cause has seemed identical with that discovered by Tibetans.
Mystic teachers declare that mastery in telepathy requires a perfect command over
the mind, in order to produce, at will, the powerful "one-pointedness of thought" on
which the phenomenon depends.
The part of conscious "receiver," always ready to vibrate at the subtle shock of the
telepathic waves, is considered almost as difficult as that of the sender. To begin
with, the intended receiver must have been "tuned" with him from whom he espe-
cially expects messages.
•
•
140
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

Now, volitional perfect concentration of mind on one single object, until every other
object vanishes from the field of consciousness, is the basis of the lamaist spiritual
training, and this training also includes psychic exercises that aim at developing the
power of detecting the various "currents of energy" that are crossing each other in
every direction.
So some affirm that telepathy, as well as tumo and other kindred accomplishments,
is a natural by-product of the spiritual training and, consequently, need not be stud-
ied separately. This also explains the power with which all great gomchens and dub-
chens184 are credited, of communicating with their disciples, whatever may be the
distance that separates them. However, some see the matter in another light.
Though they agree that proficiency in the spiritual training brings in its train profi-
ciency in minor accomplishments, such as telepathy, they think that those who are
not able to reach the high stages of the mystic path may rightly cultivate telepathy or
other byproducts separately.
Mystic masters agree to this to a certain extent and, in fact, a number of them train
their disciples in telepathy.
A number of Tibetan anchorites have become able, without having undergone any
special training, to catch the telepathic messages of their guru. This is commonly
considered as proof of their great devotion to him. A few have spontaneously
acquired the power to emit messages.
As for those who cultivate telepathy, the main lines of the training may be sketched
as follows.
First, it is necessary to go through all the practices devised to produce the trance of
"one-pointedness," the concentration of thought on one single object and complete
oblivion of all other things.
The complementary practice which consists in "emptying" the mind from all cogita-
tions, establishing in it complete silence and blankness, must also be mastered.
Then comes the analysis and discrimination of the various influences which cause
sudden, apparently inexplicable, psychic or even physical sensations or moods of
the mind, such as abrupt feelings of joy, of melancholy, of fear, and also sudden
memories of persons, things or events apparently unconnected with anything going
on around one.
When the pupil has exercised alone for a time, he may sit in meditation with his mas-
ter in a silent and darkened room, the thoughts of both being concentrated on the
same object. At the end of a given period, the student tells his teacher the phases of
his meditation and these are compared with those of the master; concordances and
discrepancies are noted.
Now, stopping, as far as he can, the activity of his mind, emptying it of all ideas,
reflections and mental representations, the novice watches the thoughts which
arise involuntarily and unexpectedly in him without being apparently linked with any
of his present pre-occupations or feelings. He notes the subjective images which
appear. And, again, at the end of the meditation, thoughts and images are made
184.Literally "a great successful one." This must be understood as "one who is possessed with supernormal
powers." The equivalent of our term magician.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
141
•

•••

known to the lama teacher who sees whether or not they correspond to those he
mentally suggested to his disciple.
Then, the master sends mental orders to his disciple, while the latter is at a short
distance from him. If these are duly received and the student answers by acting
accordingly, the exercise continues, the distance between master and disciple
being gradually increased.
It is believed in Tibet that dubchens are capable of reading the thoughts of others at
will. The master being credited with such a power, it would be absurd to train any-
one to send him telepathic messages. The very intention of sending them would be
detected by him before the messages had actually been sent. Whether this power is
real or not, the master is compelled to act as if he possessed it. Consequently, his
disciples practice the exchange of telepathic messages among themselves. Two
novices or a number of them associate for that purpose under their teacher's super-
visions and the training is very much like that described above.
Novices test their progress in dispatching unexpected telepathic messages to one
another at a time when the person designated is likely to be busy and not thinking
about receiving communications.
They also try to convey messages to people with whom they have never been con-
nected through training in common, and who know nothing about telepathy. Some
make experiments with animals.
Years are devoted to these practices. It is impossible to guess how many of the stu-
dents who pursue this study really obtain results from it.
Whatever may be the fruits they reap, the most worshipful among mystic teachers
do not encourage this kind of exertion. The efforts made to acquire supernormal
powers are considered by these masters as uninteresting childish sports.
It seems proved that great contemplative anchorites are able to communicate by
telepathy with their disciples, and some even say, with any sentient being, but that
power – as already stated – is considered as a mere byproduct of deep insight into
psychic laws, and of spiritual perfection.
It is said that, when on account of the enlightenment acquired through various con-
templative meditations one has ceased to consider "one's self" and "others" as
entirely distinct entities, devoid of points of contact, then telepathy is easily prac-
ticed.
The discovery – during prolonged introspections – of these "points of contact" leads
to a sphere in which delimited beings vanish and only continual exchanges are per-
ceived.
These are psychic and mystic experiences which words cannot describe. Whatever
may be the share of truth or fancy in such theories, I prefer to avoid discussing them.
One thing I may say, however, is that communications from mystic masters to their
disciples through gross material means, such as letters falling from the ceiling or
epistles one finds under one's pillow, are unknown in lamaist mystic circles. When
questions regarding such facts are put to contemplative hermits, erudite lamas or
high lamaist dignitaries, they can hardly believe that the inquirer is in earnest and
not an irreverent joker.
•
•
142
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

I remember the amusing reflection of a lama from Tashilhunpo when I told him that
some "Philings''185 believed in such ways of communicating with departed ones or
even with Tibetan mystic teachers:
"And these are the men who have conquered India!" he exclaimed, utterly
amazed at such simplicity in these otherwise redoubtable Englishmen.
Relying on observations which extend over a large number of years, I shall venture
to say that Tibet seems to offer peculiarly favourable conditions for telepathy – as
well as for psychic phenomena in general. What are exactly, these "conditions"?
It would be presumptuous to attempt defining them while the very nature of psychic
phenomena is still so mysterious.
Maybe the very high level of the country is helpful. Perhaps we may, also, take into
account the great silence in which the country is bathed, that extraordinary silence
of which – if I dared to use so strange an expression – I would say that it is heard
above the loudest voices of the most furiously roaring torrents.
Again, solitude might be reckoned with: the absence of big crowds whose mental
activity creates many whirlpools of psychic energy which trouble the ether. And per-
haps the placidity of Tibetans whose minds are not filled, like ours, with cares and
cogitations is another of these favourable conditions.
Whatever may be the causes at work, telepathic transmissions, either conscious or
unconscious, seem to occur rather frequently in Tibet.
Regarding my own experience, I am certain that I did receive on several occasions
telepathic messages from lamas under whom I had practiced mental or psychic
training. It may even be that the number of these messages has been larger than I
suspect. However, I have only retained a few cases in which the lama afterwards
inquired if I had understood what he meant to tell at a given time.
Beside communications regarding spiritual matters, which may not be entirely due
to telepathy, but to a certain identity in the trend of thoughts between a master and
his pupil, I may relate two incidents of an entirely different kind.
One of them happened in the Dainshin River valley, during my journey to Lhasa.
The lama, who produced what seemed to me a characteristic telepathic transmis-
sion, belonged to the monastery of Chösdzong.
Yongden and I had spent the night in the open, sleeping in a ditch dug by the waters
during successive rainy seasons, but for the moment dry and hardened by the frost.
The lack of fuel had compelled us to start our daily tramp without drinking our usual
hot buttered tea. So, hungry and thirsty, we walked till about noon when we saw,
seated on his saddle carpet,186 near the road, a lama of respectable appearance
who was finishing his midday meal. With him were three young trapas of distin-
guished mien, who looked more like disciples accompanying their master than
common servants. Four fettered horses were trying to graze on some dry grass
near the group.
185.Philing means a foreigner in general, but Tibetans apply the term specially to Englishmen, the only white
foreigners they know excepting Russians. The latter they call Urusso and not Philing.
186.Tibetans ride on a padded saddle with a carpet over it. When a traveller alights to rest on the road, this
carpet is often spread on the ground for him to sit on.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
143
•

•••

The travellers had carried a bundle of wood with them and kindled a fire, a teapot
was still steaming on the embers.
As befitted our assumed condition of beggarly pilgrims,187 we respectfully saluted
the lama. Most likely the desire that the sight of the teapot awakened in us could be
read in our faces.
The lama muttered: "ñingje!"188 and, aloud, told us to sit down and bring out our
bowls189 for tea and tsampa.
A trapa poured the remaining tea in our bowls, placed a bag of tsampa near us and
went to help his companions who had begun to saddle the beasts and make ready
to start. Then, one of the horses suddenly took fright and ran away. This is a com-
mon occurrence, and a man went after the animal with a rope.
The lama was not talkative, he looked at the horse that ran in the direction of a ham-
let and said nothing. We continued to eat silently. Then, I noticed an empty wooden
pot besmeared with curd and guessed that the lama had got the curd from a farm
which I could see at some distance away from the road.
The diet of daily tsampa without any vegetables proved rather trying for the stomach
and I availed myself of all opportunities to get milk food.
I whispered in Yongden's ear:
"When the Lama is gone, you shall go to the farm and ask for a little curd."
Though I had spoken very low and we were not seated very near to the lama, he
appeared to have heard my words. He cast a searching glance at me and again
uttered sotto voce: "ñingjed!"
Then he turned his head in the direction where the horse had run away. The animal
had not gone far, but was apparently in a playful mood and did not permit the trapa
to capture it easily. At last it let him throw the rope round its neck and followed him
quietly.
The lama remained motionless, gazing fixedly at the man who advanced toward us.
Suddenly, the latter stopped, looked around and went to a boulder near by, where
he tied his horse. Then he retraced his steps a little way and leaving the road,
walked to the farm. After a while I saw him come back to his horse carrying some-
thing. When he reached us the "something" turned out to be a wooden pot full of
curd. He did not give it to the lama, but held it in his hand, looking interrogatively at
his master as if saying
"Was that what you wanted? What am I to do with this curd?"
To his unspoken question the lama answered by an affirmative nod, and told the
trapa to give me the curd. The second incident which I will relate did not occur in
Tibet itself, but on the borderland territory that has been annexed to the Chinese
provinces of Szetchuan and Kansu.
187.See My Journey to Lhasa. This journey was effected in disguise.
188.A current exclamation which expresses compassionate feelings and may be rendered as: "How sad!"
"The poor things!" etc.
189.Tibetan travellers always carry a wooden bowl in the breast pocket formed by their dress tied with a belt.
Wealthy travellers keep the bowl in a case which is carried by an attendant.
•
•
144
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

At the skirt of the immense primeval forest that extends from Tagan to the Kunka
pass, six travellers had joined my small party. The region is known as being haunted
by daring Tibetan robbers, and those who must cross it look for opportunities of
forming as large and as well armed a company as possible. Five of my new com-
panions were Chinese traders, the sixth was a Bön-po ngagspa, a tall man whose
long hair, wrapped in a piece of red material, formed a voluminous turban.
Anxious to glean anything that I could, regarding the religion of the country, I invited
the man to share our meals in order to find an opportunity of chatting with him. I
learned that he was going to join his master, a Bönpo magician, who was perform-
ing a great dubthab on a neighbouring hill. The object of this rite was to coerce a
malignant demon who habitually harmed one of the small tribes which live in that
region. After diplomatic preambles I expressed my desire of paying a visit to the
magician, but his disciple declared the thing utterly impossible. His master must not
be disturbed during the full lunar month necessary to perform the rite.
I understood that it was useless to argue with him, but I planned to follow him when
he parted with us, after crossing the pass.
If I succeeded in coming unexpectedly upon the magician, I might perhaps have a
glimpse at him and at his magic circle.
Consequently, I ordered my servants to keep good watch on the ngagspa so that he
could not leave us unnoticed.
Probably they spoke too loudly among themselves about the matter. The ngagspa
saw through the trick I intended playing upon his guru and told me that it was no use
attempting it.
I replied that I did not harbour any evil intention against his master and only wanted
to have a talk with him for the sake of enlightenment. I also commanded my ser-
vants to keep a still closer watch on our companion. The ngagspa could not but be
aware that he had become a prisoner. But as he also understood that no harm
would be done to him and that he was well fed – a thing to which Tibetans are keenly
alive – he took his adventure good humouredly.
"Do not fear that I shall run away," he said to me. "You may bind me with ropes if
it please you. I need not go ahead to inform my master of your coming. He
already knows all about it. Ngais lung gi teng la len tang tsar"190
Ngagspas are in the habit of boasting of so many and such various miraculous pow-
ers that I did not pay any more attention to his words than to those of his colleagues
in the black art.
This time, I was wrong.
When we had crossed the pass, we entered a region of pasture land. Robbers were
not much to be feared on these wide tablelands. The Chinese traders, who had
clung to us day and night while in the forest, recovered their assurance and took
leave. I still intended to follow the ngagspa, when a troupe numbering half a dozen
riders emerged from an undulation of the ground. They rode at full speed toward
me, then dismounted, saluted, offered "kha-tag”191 and a present of butter. After the
190.Spelt: ngas rlung gi steng la len btang tsar – I have sent a message on the wind.
191.Khata – complimentary scarves
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
145
•

•••

polite demonstrations were ended, an elderly man told me that the great Bönpo
ngagspa had sent them and begged me to renounce my intention of visiting him, for
no one but an initiated disciple ought to approach the place where he had built his
secret magic kyilkhor.
I had to give up my plan. The ngagspa, it seemed, had really informed his master by
"sending a message on the wind." To persist would have been useless.
Even if, in spite of the proof of his strange ability the disciple had given me, I still
doubted that the master's occult power was strong enough to prevent my progress,
I could not ignore the sturdy armed hillmen that surrounded me. They were most
respectful and certainly meant to be as pleasant as they could be, but their attitude
might change if my obstinacy should jeopardize the success of a rite that interested
a whole tribe. So, I gave a complimentary scarf and some silver to the ngagspa to
be presented to his master. I congratulated the Tibetans on their good luck in having
secured the service of a first-rate magician and we parted on friendly terms.
Visual telepathy seems also to be known in Tibet. If we could rely on the stories told
about famous lamas by Tibetans, we should find in them many examples of such
phenomena. But truth and fiction mingle freely in these tales, and one feels inclined
rather to doubt than give credence to any specially unusual event.
However, there exist men to-day who affirm they have beheld visions transmitted to
them by a kind of telepathic process.
These are quite different from the images seen in dreams. Sometimes the vision
appears during the period of meditation, but at other times it is seen while the
observer is busy about his ordinary affairs.
A lama tsipa192 told me that once when taking his meal he saw a gyud lama,193 a
friend of his whom he had not met for several years. The gyud lama stood at the
door of his house side by side with a young trapa, who carried a small load on his
back, as if ready to start on a journey. The traveller bowed his farewell at the feet of
the lama and then the latter smilingly spoke a few words and pointed with his hand
towards the north. The trapa turned in that direction and bowed down again thrice.
As he got up, he arranged his monastic toga more tidily and the tsipa noticed that it
was badly torn at one end. After this, the vision vanished.
A few weeks later, the same young man whom he had seen, arrived from the gynd
lama, who wished him to be taught some astrological calculations.
The trapa related that, when taking leave of his former teacher, after he bowed to
him, the latter said "As you are now going to your new master you had better bow
down to him also." And he had pointed towards the north, the tsipa's dwelling being
situated in that direction.
The lama also noticed the large rent in his pupil's toga, which he had already seen
in his vision.
I inquired if the gyud lama had meant to convey to his friend the news that he was
sending him the young trapa. No answer could be given to my question, because
192.Lama tsipa – Astrologer
193.Gyud Lama – A fellow of a college of magic ritual.
•
•
146
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

the event was recent, and since it happened, the tsipa had had no opportunities of
despatching a message to the gyud lama.
I may add that the average Tibetans are much less eager than we are to investigate
psychic phenomena. They take them as certainly uncommon, but not altogether
extraordinary occurrences. They have no fixed ideas about the laws of Nature or
what is possible and impossible, to be disturbed by such phenomena. Educated or
ignorant, all implicitly admit that everything is possible to him who knows the way of
doing it, and consequently supernormal feats do not, as a rule, awaken any special
emotion beyond admiration for the competent wonder worker.
; ; ;
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
147
•

•••

Chapter VII: Mystic Theories and Spiritual Training
The religious world in Tibet, generally speaking, is divided into two sections. The
first includes those who advocate the strict observance of moral precepts and
monastic rules as the means of salvation, the second is formed of those who prefer
an intellectual method which frees its followers from all laws whatsoever.
Nevertheless there exists no rigid division between these two categories. Though
their respective theories are always a favourite subject of controversy between the
followers of the two schools, it seldom happens that one stands in the position of a
harsh, pugnacious adversary towards those in the opposite camp.
Even the monks attached to morality acknowledge that a virtuous life and the
monastic discipline, though of great value and advisable for the many, are but a
mere preparation to a higher path. As for the adepts of the second system, they all
believe in the beneficial results of a faithful adherence to the moral laws and the
rules laid down for members of the religious Order.
Moreover, all are unanimous in declaring the first method the safer of the two. A
pure life, the performance of good deeds, righteousness, compassion, detachment
from worldly cares, selflessness and quietness of mind act – they say – as a cleans-
ing process which gradually removes the "impure dust that covers the mental
eyes,''194
As for the method which mystics call the "Short Path," the "Direct Path,''195 it is con-
sidered as most hazardous. It is – according to the masters who teach it – as if
instead of following the road which goes round a mountain ascending gradually
towards its summit, one attempted to reach it in straight line, climbing perpendicular
rocks and crossing chasms on a rope. Only firstrate equilibrists, exceptional ath-
letes, completely free from giddiness, can hope to succeed in such a task. Even the
fittest may fear sudden exhaustion or dizziness. And there inevitably follows a
dreadful fall in which the too presumptuous alpinist breaks his bones.
By this illustration Tibetan mystics mean a spiritual fall leading to the lowest and
worst degree of aberration and perversity to the condition of a demon.
194.A favourite Buddhist illustration. We read in the Mahãvagga (1,10): "Bhagavan, looking over the world
with his eyes of a Buddha, saw beings whose mental eyes were darkened by scarcely any dust and beings
whose eyes were covered by much dust, beings sharp of sense and blunt of sense, of good disposition
and bad disposition, easy to instruct and difficult to instruct. (...)"
195.Technically, in mystic parlance: tse gchig, lus gchig sang rgyais, to attain Buddhahood in one life, one
body. That is to say, in the very life in which one has begun one's spiritual training. Tibetans say also: lam
chung ("the short road").
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
148
•

•••

I have heard a learned lama maintain that the bold theories regarding complete
intellectual freedom and the enfranchisement from all rules whatever, which are
expounded by the most advanced adepts of the "Short Path," are the faint echo of
teachings that existed from time immemorial in Central and Northern Asia.
The lama was convinced that these doctrines agree completely with the Buddha's
highest teaching as it was made evident in various passages of his discourses.
However, said the lama, the Buddha was well aware that the majority do better to
abide by rules devised to avert the baleful effects of their ignorance and guide them
along paths where no disasters are to be feared. For that very reason, the all-wise
Master has established rules for the laity and monks of average intelligence.
The same lama entertained serious doubts as to the Aryan origin of the Buddha. He
rather believed that his ancestors belonged to the Yellow race and was convinced
that his expected successor, the future Buddha Maitreya, would appear in Northern
Asia.
Where did he get these ideas? – I have not been able to find out. Discussion is
hardly possible with Oriental mystics. When once they have answered: "I have seen
this in my meditations," little hope is left to the inquirer of obtaining further explana-
tions.
I have also heard similar ideas expressed by Newars from Nepal. Their argument
was that the native land of the Buddha was their own country. "The great Sage of
India," they said, "belonged to the same stock as ourselves. And as for us, we are of
the same race as the Chinese."
It is, of course, only the learned lamas and mystics who hold the theories just men-
tioned, regarding the "Path of the Rules" and the "Short Path." Now, in Tibet, as
elsewhere, scholars and thinkers are few. So while amongst the partisans of the
"rules" the many merely vegetate in the monasteries, the doctrine of "complete free-
dom" affords a raison d'être to countless people scarcely capable of haunting any
summit, but whose originality cannot be denied.
Most magicians shelter themselves under the flag of the latter party. Not that many
of them seek rapid spiritual achievement.
That which appeals to them in the "Short Path" is freedom from the bondage of dis-
cipline and the permission thus granted to proceed with whatever experiments may
be useful for their own advancement. The formula is vague enough to allow inter-
pretations that fit all kinds of characters.
A broad classification of Tibetan professed magicians and students of the magic art
divides them into two categories.
The first includes all those who do not seek direct mastery over nature, but only the
power of coercing certains gods and demons to secure their help. The men who
practice that method believe in the real existence of the beings of the other worlds
as entities completely distinct from them. They also think that their own ability and
power are much inferior to those of the personalities whom they endeavour to
enslave, and that they would be incapable of obtaining the results which they expect
from the latter's help by their own efforts.
Again, whatever other means they use: spells, charms, etc., they also implicitly rec-
ognize that their active power, though put into motion by the man who uses them,
does not emanate from him.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
149
•

•••

In the second category only a small number of adepts are to be reckoned.
These employ, at times, the very same means as their less enlightened colleagues,
but they do it for different reasons. They hold the view that the various phenomena
which the vulgar consider as miracles, are produced by an energy arising in the
magician himself and depend on his knowledge of the true inner essence of things.
Most of them are men of retired habits, even hermits, who do not exhibit any singu-
larity in their ways and appearance. They make no attempt to exhibit their powers
and often remain entirely unknown.
On the contrary, the magicians of the first group are fond of indulging in many kinds
of showy and bewildering eccentricities. Sorcerers, soothsayers, necromancers,
occultists from the meanest beggarly class to those of high social standing, can be
met with among them. A lover of odd discourses and deeds may enjoy himself lis-
tening to the theories regarding "integral freedom" and its practice that are current
in such society. But behind these absurd extravagances there are elements of
knowledge regarding old traditions, forgotten history and the handling of psychic
forces to be gleaned. But in these circles, as elsewhere in Tibet, the great difficulty
is to gain a footing.
It is unnecessary to be an ordained monk to enter the "Short Path to Deliverance."
According to its adepts, only initiations are of value. So any layman, if recognized as
fit to undertake the spiritual climbing, may be accepted by a mystic master and in
due time initiated by him. The same rule applies to students of magic. Nevertheless,
most mystics and magicians have begun their career as youths in the religious
Order.
The choice of the master who is to guide him along the mystic path, arduous and
fraught with deceitful mirages, is a momentous decision for the candidate to initia-
tion. The course which his life will follow depends to a great extent upon the charac-
ter of the lama he elects.
For having asked admittance at a door from which they ought to have turned away,
some have met with fantastic adventures. Yet, if the young monk is satisfied with
begging the spiritual guidance of a lama who is neither an anchorite nor an "extrem-
ist" of the "Short Path," his novitiate will probably not include any tragic incidents.
During a probation period of undetermined length the master will test the character
of his new disciple. Then he may simply explain some philosophical treatises and
the meaning of a few symbolic diagrams,196 teaching him the methodic meditations
for which they are used.
If the lama thinks his pupil capable of proceeding farther, he will expound him the
programme of the mystic training.
The latter includes three stages, namely:
•
Tawa – to look, examine,
•
Gompa – to think, meditate
•
Chyöd pa – to practice, realize.
This is the fruit of accomplishment through the two former stages.
196.Kyilkhors
•
•
150
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

Another less current enumeration makes use of four terms to convey the same
meaning, as follows:
First Stage:
Tön – "meaning," "reason."
That is to say investigation of the nature of things, their
origin, their end, the causes upon which they depend.
Lob – "study" of various doctrines
Second Stage:
gom – thinking or meditating on that which one has
discovered and learnt. practising introspective meditation.
Third Stage:
Togs – Understanding.
In order that the novice may practice in perfect quietness the various exercises
which that programme requires, it is nearly certain that the lama will command him
to shut himself in tsams.197
The word tsams signifies a barrier, the border of a territory. In religious parlance, to
"stay in tsams" means to live in seclusion, to retire beyond a barrier which must not
be passed.
That "barrier" may be of different kinds. With advanced mystics it becomes purely
psychic and it is said that the latter need no material contrivances to isolate them-
selves while meditating.
There exist several categories of tsams, each one being subdivided into a number
of varieties.
Proceeding from the less austere towards the most severe forms, we find the follow-
ing ones:
A lama or a lay devotee shuts himself in his room or private apartment. He does
not go out or only does so at fixed time, to perform some devotional practices
such as walking around religious edifices making repeated prostrations before
sacred objects, or the like.
According to the rule which he has adopted, the tsamspa198 either may be seen or
must remain invisible. In the first case, he is generally permitted to talk briefly with
the members of the household, his relatives or servants, and even to receive a few
visitors. In the second case, he may only be seen by those who attend him. If a visi-
tor is admitted, he must remain within hearing outside the tsamspa's room. A cur-
tain screens the entrance and the interlocutors remain invisible to each other as in
some Roman Catholic contemplative Orders of nuns.
A number of Tibetans resort occasionally to one or another of these mild forms of
seclusion for non-religious motives, seeking merely to avoid disturbance while
engaged in the study of any branch of Tibetan learning: grammar, philosophy,
astrology, medicine, etc.
Next comes the recluse who sees but one attendant.
He who renounces speaking and makes known his needs by writing.
197.Written: mtshams and pronounced tsam.
198.He who practices tsams. Not to be mistaken for tsampa: flour of roast barley, written rtsampa.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
151
•

•••

He who partly covers his window, so that he cannot see the surrounding landscape,
nor any outside object except the sky.
He who renounces the sight of the sky, covering his window entirely, or living in a
windowless room which, nevertheless, admits the daylight indirectly.
He who sees no one at all.
In this case, if the tsamspa enjoys the use of a suite of rooms, his meals are brought
into one of them, while he retires into another. When he lives in a single room, food
is placed next the entrance. Someone knocks at the door to inform the recluse that
what he needs is ready, and then the inmates of the house leave the adjacent room
or corridors for a moment to allow the tsamspa to come out without being seen. Any
object is returned in the same way, the tsamspa calling attention by knocking at the
door or ringing a bell.
Among those who practice this particular kind of tsams, some ask by writing for the
things which they require, but others renounce this facility. Consequently, whatever
may be their needs, they cannot make them known. Even if those who attend on
them forgot to give them their meal, they ought to fast in silence.
Generally tsams in one's own house do not last long, especially of the strict kind.
One year seems to be an exceptional period. One usually hears of people who live
in seclusion for three months, one month and even a few days only. Laymen rarely
shut themselves in their apartment for more than one month.
It is easy to understand that prolonged and severe tsams cannot be practiced in an
ordinary residence. There, whatever care is taken, the moving about of people busy
with worldly affairs and the noise inevitably reach the tsamspa, through the thin bar-
rier of his closed door.
The silence and quiet surroundings which may be enjoyed to a high degree in the
monasteries are not even deemed sufficient by some, and many gompas own spe-
cial small houses built for the use of their members who wish to live in strict seclu-
sion.
These houses are called tsams khang.199
They are sometimes situated in an out-of-the-way spot, inside the monastery's
walls, but more frequently stand aloof on some hill, at a little distance outside the
walled enclosure. It is not unusual to find groups of these meditation houses stand-
ing in the solitude, at a few days' march from their parent monastery.
The plans of the tsams khangs correspond to the various rules and requirements
here above mentioned.
From the windows of some of them, the recluse may end of the sight of beautiful
landscapes, while others are surrounded by walls that cut off the view on all sides.
In at case, the enclosure often forms a small courtyard or terrace where the tsam-
spa may sit or walk in the open, without being seen, or himself seeing anything of
the outside world.
Most tsams khangs are divided into two rooms. In one of them, the recluse sits and
sleeps, the other one is the kitchen in which an attendant may live.
199.From mtshams and khang, house: "a house where to live in seclusion."
•
•
152
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

When the tsampa must see no one and keep the rule of silence, his attendant lives
in a separate hut. A double wicket is then built in he wall or the door of the recluse's
room, and through it meals are given to him.
Solid food is generally served only once a day, but buttered tea is brought several
times. If the lama belongs to one or another of the "Red cap" sects, beer200 alter-
nates with the tea. Tibetans having the custom of keeping a small bag of barley flour
at hand, the recluse is at liberty to eat some with his tea or beer, whenever he likes.
Only members of the religious Order retire in the cottages specially built to be used
as meditation houses. Some remain in seclusion during several consecutive years.
A canonic period is three years three months three weeks and three days. Some
repeat that long retreat twice or thrice in the course of their life, and a few shut them-
selves in tsams for life.
There exists a still more austere form of tsams: that of dwelling in complete dark-
ness.
Meditation in darkness is not a practice peculiar to Lamaism. It is known in all Bud-
dhist countries. I have seen different kinds of rooms in Burma, specially built for the
purpose, and made use of them myself during my stay on the Sagain hills. But while
Burmese and other Buddhist monks only spend a few hours at a time there, certain
Tibetan ascetics bury themselves for years, and even till death, in such grave-like
dwellings. However, these extreme cases are rare.
When complete night is desired and the sojourn in the tsams khang is to be long,
the latter is often established in a grotto or a partly underground building, ventilated
by chimneys constructed in such a way that they do not allow the light to penetrate
into the recluse's cell. This, however, is very seldom done. Usually the dark hermit-
age is aerated in a natural – and, indeed, very imperfect – way, through fissures and
the like. Though these must, perforce, admit some light together with air, that light
seems often of a purely theoretical kind, for in some of these obscure abodes it is
impossible to distinguish any object.
Yet, after a time, the eyes of the tsamspas get accustomed to dark, and succeed in
vaguely seeing their surroundings.
According to what I have heard from men who have spent long periods of seclusion
in darkness, these hermits enjoy, at times, wonderful illuminations. Their cell
becomes bright with light or, in the darkness, every object is drawn with luminous
outlines; or again, a phantasmagoria of shining flowers, landscapes and person-
ages arises before them.
Optic phenomena of that kind are certainly common, for they have also been
described to me in Burma, by bhikkhus who practiced meditation in darkness, and I
suppose that everybody has seen something of the kind at night.
200.Chang. Though drinking fermented beverages is strictly prohibited by Buddism, Tibetan "Red Caps"
declare that Padmasambhava, their founder, allowed it. Nevertheless, some of them seem to know better.
Padmasambhava, they say, allowed the drinking of alcohol when performing certain rites, and then the
quantity to be drunk was that which fills the hollow of the palm. Padmasambhava, who was a Western
Indian and an adept of Tantrism, taught his Tibetan converts the form of worship of his sect and, as with
many tantrikas, the two drops of wine to be drunk in sacramental fashion led to habitual drinking.
An Indian saying goes: "Some drink to perform the rite, and some perform the rite in order to drink." But
Tibetans addicted to drinking do not seek a religious excuse any more than their Western brethren in
drunkenness..
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
153
•

•••

Tibetans see in this a way of testing the degree of fixity attained by the mind. The
kaleidoscopic mirage is considered by them as entirely subjective. It is, they think,
caused by the uncontrolled agitation of the mind.
When the latter is brought near stillness, the phantasmagoria vanishes. There
remains only a spot which may be either dark coloured or like a diminutive globe of
light. At first that spot moves and the aim of the practice is to fix it.
The stage in which the spot remains motionless, without undergoing any change in
size, colour, etc., is the moment when the mystic is able to concentrate his thoughts
on any object he chooses without any other ideas breaking his "one-pointedness"
of mind. The next stage is marked by the disappearance of the spot which sinks in
utter darkness. This however is not always attained; many continue to proudly enjoy
the fairy-scene, thinking that they have obtained a glimpse of paradise.
Besides recreations of this kind, a number of subtler enchantments await the tsam-
spa in his hermitage. These, according to religious teachers, are traps which catch
the unintelligent disciple who ventures on the mystic path.
When the tsamspa, who has spent a long time in darkness, is nearing the end of his
retreat, he gradually accustoms his eyes to see the daylight again. For that purpose,
a hole, the size of a pin's head, is pierced in a mud part of the wall and is enlarged
each day till the aperture forms a small window. This operation may take several
months and is either done by the recluse himself or by another person: his guru or a
friend. The longer the time spent in obscurity the slower is the admission of light into
the cell.
Novices who shut themselves up entirely for the first time, either in light or dark
tsams khangs, generally receive instructions from their guru during their seclusion.
The lama speaks to them from outside, through the double wicket which is used to
pass in the recluse's meal. The guru of a tsamspa who must see nobody, often
shuts the entrance of the latter's cell with his own seal. A religious ceremony is per-
formed on that occasion and another one when the master breaks the seal and the
recluse steps out.
If the tsams is not of the severe kind, a flag may be placed at the recluse's door, on
which are written the names of the persons who are allowed to enter his rooms:
attendants or visitors allowed by the tsamspa's teacher.
A dry branch is sometimes driven in the earth or stuck in a pot, near the hermitage
of a tsamspa who shuts himself up for life.
The term tsams khang is more generally applied to meditation – cottages built in the
vicinity of a monastery. Those standing in more remote places are called ritöd.201
Ritöds are never built at the bottom of a valley, they are always perched on a domi-
nating spot, and the choice of the site is made in accordance with special rules. Two
well-known Tibetan verses depict the main conditions required.
Gyab rii tag
Dun rii tso202
201.Written: Ri khrod.
202.Spelt: rgyab rihi brag, mdun rihi mtsho.
•
•
154
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

The mountain rock, behind.
The mountain lake in front.
That is to say that the hermitage should be built on the hillside with a background of
rocks, or better still against the rock itself, looking down on a lake or, at least, a
stream.
Various other regulations have been laid down, in accordance with the require-
ments of peculiar spiritual and psychic trainings. Thus, some dwellings must permit
an extended view so that the anchorite can see the sun rising and setting. The
noises produced by running water or wind must be muffled as far as possible. The
vicinity of woodland is advised or a barren landscape deemed more suitable, etc.
Ritödpas do not remain continually shut in their houses. Outside the periods of strict
tsams, most of them go out between the hours which they devote to meditation or
other practices. According to the rule imposed by their guru, or self-imposed, they
are either allowed, or forbidden, to talk with their neighbours while fetching water,
collecting fuel or taking a walk around their cabin. Meditation in the open is some-
times advised by the ritödpa's spiritual guide or some practice it from their own incli-
nation.
Though the term ritöd, properly speaking, means a "group of hermitages," current
usage applies it to all single isolated anchorite abodes: huts or caves.
It is to such primitive dwellings far away from inhabited regions, that staunch naljor-
pas who aim at climbing the rugged rocks of spiritual heights, retire.
Those who are still at the novice stage, tramp at long intervals to their guru's place
to tell him about their psychic experiences, the ideas to which their meditation have
given birth, and also to receive his advice and communication of spiritual power.203
Several years may elapse between such meetings.
As for the hermits who are teachers, some of them allow a few promising beginners
to live in their vicinity. "Vicinity" is, however, a wide term. The disciple may stay on
the same hill as his master at a spot situated lower down than the latter's dwelling,
or at one or two days' march.
One can well imagine that all of the many tsams khangs and ritöds' dwellers are not
saints or sages.
False presence and sham mysticism have long ago crept into the world of Tibetan
anchorites. Even on the shining snowy ranges, one can meet the hypocrite. Under
the guise of gomchens, boasting of secret knowledge and supernormal powers,
they deceive simple-minded peasantry or tent-dwelling herdsman. It may appear to
a Westerner that they pay dearly for the material advantages or the fame they enjoy,
by purchasing them at the cost of the hardships of hermit life. But one must appreci-
ate the bargain from a Tibetan, and not from a Western, point of view.
Tibetans are a strong and sturdy people; the cold, sleeping on the ground in the
open, solitude, and many other things from which the average Westerners would
shrink, do not frighten them in the least. There are but a few of them, even among
the upper classes, who have not experienced something of the kind whilst travelling
or on other occasions. Adventurous clerical charlatans often illiterate and of poor
203.Angkur Rite
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
155
•

•••

parentage, who cannot expect any standing in their monastery, enjoy a much more
agreeable life in a ritöd than they could hope for elsewhere.
The more ambitious among them may, indeed, submit to uncommon austerities, in
order to gain repute, but they give up all these after a few years, when their fame is
sufficiently well established. Then, they may settle in some private abode, relying
on the gifts of the laity to enable them to spend their days in comfort.
Others make no attempt at calling attention to themselves. They merely settle down
in a cabin or a cave conveniently situated at a few miles from a prosperous village or
herdsman's tribal ground. Things may be a little hard at first and food not always
plentiful, for Tibetans are not hasty in giving their confidence and faith to "uncom-
missioned" lamas. But if the man is clever and knows "the ways" he will gradually
succeed. He must play the soothsayer of course and drive away the demons which
cause illness. If chance favours him, a few of the oracles he delivers may prove true,
man or beast recover after he has exorcised the evil one. Nothing more is needed to
secure quite brilliant prospects.
I suppose that few Westerners would enjoy the life of a pseudo-ascetic in the
Tibetan wilds, but Tibetans do. Frauds of this kind always end by being caught at
their own tricks. Of course, they do not attain the bliss which awaits true mystics; but
they live free, respected, without any occasion for working; and they receive enough
tea, butter, and tsampa for all their daily wants.
Beyond this any cabin or cave roughly fitted up as a dwellingplace satisfies the
unsophisticated craving of these ingenious, yet simple, rogues. Many of them are
far from being bad characters and altogether unsympathetic. They nearly always
struck me as practical jokers, and the fun I derived from their naïve cunning inclined
me to kindly judgment.
The current idea in the West is that a man cannot maintain seclusion or absolute
solitude for a considerable length of time. It is believed that these unavoidably bring
in their train, brain disorders, finally leading to stupidity and madness.
This is perhaps true about the individuals on whom the effects of isolation have
been studied: lighthouse guards, travellers thrown on to desert island after a ship-
wreck, explorers lost in uninhabited regions, prisoners in solitary confinement, etc.
But such observations do not apply to Tibetan hermits. The latter after ten or twenty
years, or even a longer time, in the wilderness or in tsams khangs, are far from
being insane. One may dispute the theories which they have conceived during their
protracted meditations, but it is impossible to question their sanity.
There is nothing really remarkable about this. These men are prepared for loneli-
ness. Before shutting themselves in their tsams khang or settling in a ritöd, they
have accumulated in their mind a store of ideas which keep them company. More-
over, they are not inactive during their retreat, long as it may be. Their days are
occupied by methodical exercises in spiritual training, the search for occult knowl-
edge or meditations on philosophic problems. And so, often passionately interested
in these manifold investigations and introspections, they are actually very busy and
hardly notice their solitude.
I have never heard a Tibetan hermit say that, even at the beginning of his retreat, he
had suffered from lack of associations with men. Generally, those who have tasted
•
•
156
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

the anchorite life find it difficult, if not impossible, to resume life among other people
or to enjoy regular social intercourse.
Whatever those unacquainted with it may think, solitude and utter loneliness are far
from being devoid of charm.
Words cannot convey the almost voluptuous sweetness of the feelings experienced
when one closes the door of one's tsams khang, or when one looks down from the
heights at the first wintry snow heaping up in the lower valleys, creating for months
around the hermitage an impassable white and cold rampart.
But, most likely, only those who have lived through it themselves can understand
the irresistible attraction that hermit life exerts on many Orientals.
The practices to which Tibetan recluses apply themselves while shut in their tsams
khang or ritöds are many and of a various nature. Any attempt to compile a com-
plete list of them would be vain, for most probably nobody in the world knows them
all.
One finds in the Tibetan mystic literature more or less exhaustive descriptions of a
few practices, but, as a rule, they are reticent on the points which interest us most,
that is to say the purpose of the practices. Reliable information can only be obtained
from those who are acquainted with traditional oral teaching for each particular
exercise. One must, especially, beware of remaining satisfied with interpretations
obtained of only one initiate, for they vary not only among different sects, but among
individual teachers.
It would be a mistake to fancy that all Tibetans who live in seclusion in a tsams
khang or betake themselves to solitude, are endowed with uncommon intelligence
and ponder over transcendental problems.
I have already spoken of the sham gomchens who have taken to religious life as to a
profession. There also exists a very large number of well-meaning simpletons and
men of average mental power who bring the superstitions of popular lamaism to
their retreat.
Amongst those, many devote the time of their seclusion repeating thousands and
even millions of times one single formula: generally a Sanskrit mantra which is unin-
telligible to them. Others recite a Tibetan text, but often they understand no more of
its meaning than if they were uttering words in a foreign language.
The most ordinary formula is the well-known Aum Mani Padme Hum! I say, well
known as far as the words are concerned, because foreigners have read it in many
books. It does not follow that its meaning has been made clear to them.
Lay travellers and even Orientalists are sometimes a little too quick to declare that
meaningless which they do not at once understand. Erudite authors, even to-day,
translate the first word of the formula, aum, by our commonplace exclamation ah!
and hum, the last word, by amen.
There exists an immense literature in India devoted to the explanation of the mystic
word Aum.
The latter has exoteric, esoteric and mystic meanings. It may signify the three per-
sons of the Hindu Trinity:
•
Brahma.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
157
•

•••

•
Vishnu,
•
Shiva.
It may signify the Brahman, the "One without a second" of the adwaita philosophy. It
stands as a symbol of the Inexpressible Absolute, the last word to be uttered in mys-
ticism, after which there follows only silence. It is, according to Shri Sankarâ-
charya,204
"the support of the meditation," or, as declared in the Mundakopanishad's text
itself, "it is the bow by the means of which the individual self attains the universal
self."205
Again, Aum is the creative sound whose vibrations build the worlds. When the mys-
tic is capable of hearing all in one the countless voices, cries, songs, and noises of
all beings and things that exist and move, it is the unique sound Aum which reaches
him. That same Aum vibrates also in the utmost depth of his inner self. He who can
pronounce it with the right tone, is able to work wonders, and he who knows how to
utter it silently, attains supreme emancipation.
Tibetans who have received the word Aum from India together with the mantras
with which it is associated, do not appear to have been acquainted with its many
meanings among their Southern neighbours, nor do they know the very prominent
place it occupies in their religions and philosophies.
Aum is repeated by lamaists along with other Sanskrit formulas, without having a
special importance by itself, while other mystic syllables as hum! and especially
phat! are supposed to possess great power and are much used in magic and mystic
rites.
So much for the first word of the formula.
Mani padme are Sanskrit terms that mean "jewel in the lotus." Here we come, it
seems, to an immediately intelligible meaning, yet the current interpretation does
not take any account of that plain meaning.
Common folk believe that the recitation of Aum Mani Padme Hum! will assure them
a happy rebirth in Nub Dewa Chen, the Western Paradise of the Great Bliss.
The more "learned" have been told that the six syllables of the formula are con-
nected with the six classes of sentient beings and are related to one of the mystic
colours as follows:
AUM
is white and connected with gods (lha)
MA
is blue and connected with non-gods (lhamayin)a
NI
is yellow and connected with men (mi)
204.In his commentary on Mundako panishad.
205."The Pranava (that is the name of the sacred syllable Aum) is the bow, the Atman (the individual self) is
the arrow and the Brahman (universal self: the Absolute) is said to be the mark."
•
•
158
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

PAD
is green and connected with animals (tudo)
ME
is red and connected with non-men (Yidag)b
HUM
is black and connected with dwellers in purgatories
a. A kind of Titans always at war with the gods.
b. The bodies of Yidags are as big as a hill, their necks are as thin as a thread.
These miserable beings are perpetually tortured by hunger and thirst. When
they approach water to drink it transforms itself into flame. Every morning the
lamas offer consecrated water to the Yidags to relieve their sufferings. This
consecrated water does not turn into flame at their approach.) or other mi-ma-
yin (In the mi ma yin class are included demi-gods, genii; spirits of various kind,
either friendly or malevolent.
There are several opinions regarding the effect of the recitation of these six sylla-
bles. Popular tradition declares that those who frequently repeat the formula will be
reborn in the Western Paradise of the Great Bliss. Others who deem themselves
more enlightened declare that the recitation of Aum Mani Padme Hum! may liberate
from a rebirth in any of the six realms.
Aum Mani Padme Hum! is used as a support for a special meditation which may,
approximately, be described as follows:
•
One identifies the six kinds of beings with the six syllables which are pictured
in their respective colours, as mentioned above.
•
They form a kind of chain without end that circulates through the body, carried
on by the breath, entering through one nostril and going out through the other.
•
As the concentration of mind becomes more perfect, one sees mentally the
length of the chain increasing.
•
Now when they go out with the expiration, the mystic syllables are carried far
away, before being absorbed again with the next inspiration. Yet, the chain is
not broken, it rather elongates like a rubber strap and always remains in touch
with the man who meditates.
•
Gradually, also, the shape of the Tibetan letters vanishes and those who
"obtain the fruit" of the practice perceive the six syllables as six realms in which
arise, move, enjoy, suffer, and pass away the innumerable beings, belonging to
the six species.
•
And now it remains for the meditator to realize that the six realms206 are sub-
jective: a mere creation of the mind which imagines them and into which they
sink.
•
Advanced mystics reach, by the way of this practice, a trance in which the let-
ters of the formula, as well as the beings and their activity, all merge into That
which, for lack of a better term, Mahâyânist Buddhists have called "Empti-
ness."
206.the whole phenomenal world
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
159
•

•••

•
Then, having realized the "Void," they become emancipated from the illusion of
the world and, as a consequence, liberated from rebirths which are but the fruit
of that creative delusion.
Another of the many interpretations of Aum Mani Padme Hum! ignores the division
in six syllables and takes the formula according to its meaning: "
A Jewel in a Lotus."
These words are considered as symbolic.
The simplest interpretation is:
In the Lotus207 exists the precious jewel of Buddha's teaching.
Another explanation takes the lotus as the mind. In the depth of it, by introspective
meditation, one is able to find the jewel of knowledge, truth, reality, liberation
nirvãna, these various terms being different denominations of one same thing.
Now we come to a meaning related to certain doctrines of the Mahâyânist Bud-
dhists.
According to them nirvâna, the supreme salvation, is not separated from samsãra,
the phenomenal world, but the mystic finds the first in the heart of the second, just
as the "jewel" may be found in the "lotus." Nirvãna, the "jewel" exists when enlight-
enment exists. Samsâra, the "lotus," exists when delusion exists, which veils
nirvãna, just as the many petals of the "lotus" conceal the "jewel" nestling among
them.
Hum! at the end of the formula, is a mystic expression of wrath used in coercing
fierce deities and subduing demons. How has it become affixed to the "jewel in the
lotus" and the Indian Aum? – This again is explained in various ways.
Hum! is a kind of mystic war cry; uttering it, is challenging an enemy. Who is the
enemy? Each one imagines him in his own way: either as powerful fiends, or as the
trinity of bad propensities that bind us to the round of rebirth, namely lust, hatred
207.which is the world
•
•
160
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

and stupidity. More subtle thinkers see him as the "I." Hum! is also said to mean the
mind devoid of objective content, etc.,
Another syllable is added to conclude the repetition of Aum Mani Padme Hum! one
hundred and eight times on the beads of a rosary. It is the syllable hri! Some under-
stand it as signifying an inner reality hidden under the appearances, the basic
essence of things.
Beside Aum Mani Padme Hum Hri! other formulas are also repeated as Aum Vajra
Sattva! That is to say, "Aum most excellent (diamond) being." It is understood that
the excellent One meant is the Buddha.
The followers of the Red cap sects often repeat:
Aum vajra guru padma siddhi hum! as praise of their founder Padmasambhava.
These words mean Aum, most excellent powerful guru Padma, miracle worker,
Hum!
Amongst longer formulas one of the most popular is that called "Kyabdo.''208
It is Tibetan without admixture of Sanskrit and its significance is plain, yet far from
crude. The text runs as follows:
"I take refuge in all holy refuges.
Ye fathers and mothers (ancestors) who are wandering in the round
of rebirths under the shapes of the six kinds of sentient beings.
In order to attain Buddhahood, the state devoid of fear and sorrow,
let your thoughts be directed towards enlightenment."
Often this formula is given to beginners for the first period of tsams. Its words are
well known and anyone can repeat them without being shut in tsams. They are held
as meritorious and efficacious under any circumstance. For this reason, I had cho-
sen them during my journey to Lhasa, to break the monotonous repetition of Aum
Mani Padme Hum! when I deemed it prudent to appear absorbed in a pious exer-
cise to avoid annoying talks and embarrassing questions that might have put my
incognito in jeopardy.
The common "kyabdo – tsams" consists in remaining in seclusion in a hut or in
one's own room and repeating the above-mentioned formula one hundred thou-
sand times, while prostrating oneself the same number of times. Any formula may
be repeated in the same way, with one hundred thousand prostrations.
Tibetans perform prostrations in two ways. One is very much like the Chinese kow-
tow. The difference is that before kneeling, one lifts the arms above the head, join-
ing the palms, and then brings the folded hands successively in front of the
forehead, the mouth and the heart.
Obeisances of that kind are repeated three times when saluting the images in the
temples, the lamas of rank, one's own guru, and the sacred books or edifices.
The second kind of prostration is called kyang chag. It is made in Indian fashion, the
body lying flat on the ground, and is only performed in a few special very devotional
exercises such as the kyabdo practice.
208."Going to the refuge."
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
161
•

•••

Tsamspas, who aspire to the title of chagbum, repeat one hundred thousand times
a kyabdo formula while prostrating themselves as many times, their foreheads actu-
ally touching the ground or the floor of the room at each prostration. This repeated
contact of the flesh with a hard surface produces a bump or even a sore. The latter
must show certain peculiarities understood by experts in the matter, which indicate
whether the object of the rite has, or has not, been obtained.
Tsamspas, who consider themselves far above the practice of kyabdo, perform
breathing exercises. These consist in taking different, often extraordinary, postures
while one trains oneself to inhale, exhale, hold the breath in and keep it out209 in
various ways.
Often the tsamspas drill themselves naked, and the shape of the belly during the
exercises is a sign that shows the degree of proficiency attained by the disciple.
Beside physical results, some of which have been described in a preceding chapter,
Tibetans affirm that through mastery over breath one may conquer all passion and
anger as well as carnal desires, acquire serenity, prepare the mind for meditation
and awake spiritual energy.
"Breath is the courser and mind is the rider," say the Tibetan mystics. So it is
essential that the courser must be well trained.
But breath, in its turn, influences bodily and mental activity. Consequently, two
methods have been devised: the most easy one which quiets the mind by control-
ling the breath and the more difficult way which consists in regulating the breath by
controlling the mind.
To the breathing drill repeated several times each day, the recluse often adds the
contemplative meditation practiced with kyilkhors.210
The latter are, also, most important and conspicuous in the magic rites called
dubthabs.211
Kyilkhors are diagrams drawn on paper or material, or engraved on stone, metal or
wood. Others are constructed with small flags, altar lamps, incense sticks and
vases containing various things such as grain, water, etc. The personalities who are
supposed to dwell in the kyilkhor and their requisites are represented by pyramidal
cakes named torma.
Kyilkhors are also drawn with coloured powders on the temple floor or on boards. I
have seen some which measured about seven feet in diameter.
The word kyilkhor means a circle, nevertheless, amongst the numberless kinds of
kyilkhors, there exist square and quadrangular forms, while those used in black
magic or for the coercion or destruction of malignant entities are triangular.
The monks who wish to become proficient in this kind of art spend years studying its
rules. One of the four high colleges which exist in all large monasteries teaches the
art of drawing the kyilkhors that are parts of the official lamaist magic rites. As for
209.That is to say after having breathed out, one remains for a while without breathing in. In technical terms,
this is called: to stay void.
210.Written: dkyilkhor
211.Method of success)
•
•
162
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

secret ones connected with mystic training or black magic, each student must learn
them privately from his own teacher.
The least mistake in the drawing of a kyilkhor or the place given to the tormas in its
construction, may have most terrible consequences, for the kyilkhor is a magic
instrument which hurts him who handles it unskilfully.
Moreover, no one should construct or draw a kyilkhor if he has not been empowered
to do so, by a proper initiation, and each variety of kyilkhor requires the correspond-
ing initiation. That which is the work of a non-initiated cannot be animated and
remains powerless.
As for the true understanding of the symbolic meaning of the kyilkhors, and the the-
ories which support their use in psychic training, very few are aware of them.
Needless to say that elaborate and large-sized kyilkhors cannot find room in the
tsams khangs. Their form, there, is very much simplified.
At the beginning of his spiritual education the novice is likely to be taught by his
teacher the way of constructing a diagram which is to be used as support212 to fix
the attention during meditation.
One of the exercises most generally practiced – either with or without a kyilkhor – at
that stage of the training, is the following:
A deity is imagined; it is first contemplated alone, then from its body spring out
other forms sometimes like its own, sometimes different. There are often four of
them, but in some meditations they become hundreds or even innumerable.
When all these personages have appeared quite clearly around the central figure,
they are one after another reabsorbed in it. Now the original deity remains again
alone and gradually begins to disappear. The feet vanish first and then slowly the
whole body and finally the head. Only a dot remains. This may be dark, coloured or
purely luminous. Mystic masters interpret this as a sign which shows the degree of
spiritual progress attained by their disciples.
Then, the dot moves towards the man who beholds it and sinks into him. One must
note the part of the body in which it seems to disappear. A period of meditation fol-
lows that exercise, which may be done again and again as many times as desired.
One may also imagine a lotus. It opens slowly and on each of its petals stands a
Bodhisatva, one of them being enthroned in the heart of the flower. After a while, as
the lotus begins to fold its petals again each one emits a ray of light that sinks into
the centre of the flower, and when it closes entirely, light escapes from its heart and
penetrates the man in meditation.
There exist many kinds of similar practices.
Many novices do not proceed farther. Thus dryly described, such visions cannot but
appear absurd, yet they constitute a somewhat fascinating puzzle on account of the
multifarious unexpected aspects they assume after a certain time of training.
They provide the recluse with spectacles which rival the most beautiful fairy-plays
that can be seen on the stage. Even those who are well aware of their illusive nature
212.rten
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
163
•

•••

may enjoy them, and as for those who believe in the reality of the divine players, it is
not surprising that they are bewitched.
However, it is not to amuse the hermits that these exercises have been invented.
Their true aim is to lead the disciple to understand that the worlds and all phenom-
ena which we perceive are but mirages born from our imagination.
"They emanate from the mind
And into the mind they sink."
In fact this is the fundamental teaching of Tibetan mystics.
If we now consider the case of a monk213 ventures to solicit the teaching of a con-
templative anchorite naljorpa the training takes another aspect. Methods become
strange, sometimes even cruel; we have seen it in a previous chapter.
The trilogy: Examination, Meditation, Understanding, takes a peculiar importance
among the followers of the "Short Path" and the intellectual activity of the disciple is
exclusively directed towards these results. Sometimes the means that are used
seem extravagant, yet when closely investigated one sees that the object aimed at
is quite reasonable. It is also clear that inventors of these curious methods perfectly
understand the mind of their brethren in religion and have devised them accord-
ingly.
Padmasambhava is said to have described the stages of the mystic path in the fol-
lowing way.
1.   To read a large number of books on the various religions and philosophies. To
listen to many learned doctors professing different doctrines. To experiment
oneself with a number of methods.
2.    To choose a doctrine among the many one has studied and discard the other
ones, as the eagle carries off only one sheep from the flock.
3.    To remain in a lowly condition, humble in one's demeanour, not seeking to be
conspicuous or important in the eyes of the world, but behind apparent
insignificance, to let one's mind soar high above all worldly power and glory.
4.    To be indifferent to all. Behaving like the dog or the pig that eat what chance
brings them. Not making any choice among the things which one meets.
Abstaining from any effort to acquire or avoid anything. Accepting with an
equal indifference whatever comes: riches or poverty, praise or contempt,
giving up the distinction between virtue and vice, honourable and shameful,
good and evil. Being neither afflicted, nor repenting whatever one may have
done and, on the other hand, never being elated nor proud on account of
what one has accomplished.
5.    To consider with perfect equanimity and detachment the conflicting opinions
and the various manifestations of the activity of beings. To understand that
such is the nature of things, the inevitable mode of action of each entity and
to remain always serene. To look at the world as a man standing on the
highest mountain of the country looks at the valleys and the lesser summits
spread out below him.214
213.Who instead of placing himself under the spiritual guidance of a lama who is a regular member of a mon-
astery
•
•
164
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

6.    It is said that the sixth stage cannot be described in words. It corresponds to
the realization of the "Void"215 which, in Lamaist terminology, means the
Inexpressible reality.
In spite of these programmes, it is impossible to establish a regular gradation of the
multifarious training exercises devised by Tibetan mystic anchorites. In practice,
these various exercises are combined. Moreover each lama adopts a peculiar
method, and it is even rare to see two disciples of the same master following exactly
the same path.
We must make up our minds to accept an apparent chaos which is a natural result
of the different individual tendencies and aptitudes which the gurus, adepts of the
"Short Path," refuse to crush. "Liberty" is the motto on the heights of the "Land of
Snows," but strangely enough, the disciple starts on that road of utter freedom, by
the strictest obedience to his spiritual guide. However, the required submission is
confined to the spiritual and psychic exercises and the way of living prescribed by
the master. No dogmas are ever imposed. The disciple may believe, deny or doubt
anything according to his own feelings.
I have heard a lama say that the part of a master, adept of the "Short Path," is to
superintend a "clearing." He must incite the novice to rid himself of the beliefs,
ideas, acquired habits and innate tendencies, which are part of his present mind,
and have been developed in the course of successive lives whose origin is lost in
the night of time.
On the other hand, the master must warn his disciple to be on his guard against
accepting new beliefs, ideas and habits as groundless and irrational as those which
he shakes off.
The discipline on the "Short Path" is to avoid imagining things. When imagination is
prescribed, in contemplative meditation, it is to demonstrate by that conscious cre-
ation of perceptions or sensations, the illusory nature of those perceptions and sen-
sations which we accept as real though they too rest on imagination; the only
difference being that, in their case, the creation is unconsciously effected.
The Tibetan reformer, Tsong Khapa, defines meditation as "the means216 of
enabling oneself to reject all imaginative thoughts together with their seed."
It is this uprooting of the present "imaginative thoughts," and the burning of their
"seed," so that no fanciful ideas may arise in the future, that constitutes the "clear-
ing" which I have just mentioned.
Two exercises are especially prescribed by the adepts of the mystic path.
The first consists in observing with great attention the workings of the mind without
attempting to stop it.
214.Compare Dhammapada: "When the learned man drives away vanity by earnestness, he, the wise one,
climbing the terraced heights of wisdom, looks down upon the fools. Free from sorrow, he looks upon the
sorrowing crowd, as one that stands on a mountain looks down upon them that stand upon the plain." The
Dhammapada is a work belonging to the Buddhist canonic Scriptures in Pali language.
215.In a general way, one must understand here, the realization of the non-existence of a permanent ego,
according to the Tibetan current fomula: "The person is devoid of self: all things are devoid of self."
216.The word used by the author is khungs, which means the "source," the "origin." The quotation is taken
from the work called The Lamp of the Way. A similar definition is found in the Yoga sûtras of Patanjali.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
165
•

•••

Seated in a quiet place, the disciple refrains as much as he can from consciously
pointing his thoughts in a definite direction.
He marks the spontaneous arising of ideas, memories, desires, etc., and considers
how, superseded by new ones, they sink into the dark recesses of the mind.
He watches also the subjective image which, apparently unconnected with any
thoughts or sensations, appears while his eyes are closed: men, animals, land-
scapes, moving crowds, etc.
During that exercise, he avoids making reflections about the spectacle which he
beholds, looking passively at the continual, swift, flowing stream of thoughts and
mental images that whirl, jostle, fight and pass away.
It is said that the disciple is about to gather the fruit of this practice when he loosens
the firm footing he had kept, till then, in his quality of spectator. He too – so he must
understand – is an actor on the tumultuous stage. His present introspection, all his
acts and thoughts, and the very sum of them all which he calls his self, are but
ephemeral bubbles in a whirlpool made of an infinite quantity of bubbles which con-
gregate for a moment, separate, burst, and form again, following a giddy rhythm.
The second exercise is intended to stop the roaming of the mind in order that one
may concentrate it on one single object.
Training which tends to develop a perfect concentration of mind is generally
deemed necessary for all students without distinction. As to observing the mind's
activity it is only recommended to the most intellectual disciples.
Training the mind to "one-pointedness" is practiced in all Buddhist sects.
In Southern Buddhist countries – Ceylon, Siam, Burma – an apparatus called kasi-
nas, which consists of clay discs variously coloured, or a round surface covered by
water, or a fire at which one gazes through a screen in which a round hole is pierced
– are used for this purpose.
Any of these circles is stared at until it is seen as clearly when the eyes are shut, as
when they are open and actually looking at it.
The process does not aim at producing an hypnotic state, as some Western schol-
ars have said, but it accustoms one to concentrating the mind. The fact that the sub-
jective image has become as vivid as the objective, indicates – according to those
who patronize that method – that "one-pointedness" has been reached.
Tibetans consider the object chosen to train oneself to be of no importance. What-
ever attracts and retains most easily the thoughts of the disciple should be pre-
ferred.
There is a story well known in the Tibetan religious vorld which illustrates a suc-
cessful result of this practice.
A young man begs the spiritual guidance of a mystic anchorite. The latter wishes
him to begin by exercising himself in the concentration of mind.
"What kind of work do you usually do?" he inquires of his new disciple.
"I keep the yaks.217 (the Tibetan wild hairy ox that has been domesticated.) on
the hills," answered the man.
217.Yak, spelt: gyak
•
•
166
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

"All right," says the gomchen. "Meditate on a yak."
The novice repairs to a cave roughly fitted up to serve as a habitation – a few such
shelters can always be found in the regions inhabited by herdsmen – and settles
down there.
After some time, the master goes to the place and calls to his pupil to come out of
the cave.
The latter hears the gomchen's voice, gets up and wants to walk out through the
entrance of his primitive dwelling. But his meditation has achieved its purpose. He
has identified himself with the object on which all his thoughts have been concen-
trated, he has forgotten his own personality, he feels himself a yak. Now, though the
opening is large enough to allow the passage of a man, it is too narrow for a big bull,
so, while struggling against an imaginary obstacle, the young man answered his
guru:
"I cannot get out, my horns prevent me."
Though deeply respectful of everything connected with religion, Tibetans always
retain a keen sense of humour. They do not fail to notice the comic effect that such
practices produce when performed by simpleminded novices.
The following story was told me in the course of a tramp with a naljorpa from Gar-
tog.
After having spent some time with his guru to receive his instruction, a zealous dis-
ciple was returning to his hermitage. While walking, he began to meditate and,
according to a well-known reverential custom, he imagined his worshipful teacher
was seated on his head.
After a time, he entered a state of trance in which he felt perfectly sure that he was
carrying his lama.
A stone or some other obstacle caused the man to fall, but so strong was his con-
centration of thought that the shock did not break it. He got up loudly apologizing:
"I beg your pardon, 'Precious One.' I am so sorry to have let you fall, I hope you
have not hurt yourself. (...) Where are you, now? (...)"
And the good disciple hurried away to examine a ravine near by in case his lama
had rolled into it.
Another story about "the lama on the head" was told me by a Dugpa218 Lama. The
joke is coarser than the former one and reflects the mind of the sturdy massive
Dugpa hillmen.
A nun, it is said, was advised by her spiritual teacher to imagine him seated on her
head when meditating. She did so accordingly and was so successful that the
weight of the venerable lama who was a well-fed, tall and stout man, gave her great
pain. Women of all countries, we must believe, are peculiarly clever at finding a way
out of their troubles.
When paying another visit to her guru he asked if she had carried out his instruction
and imagined that he was seated on her head.
218.A native of Bhutan.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
167
•

•••

"I did, 'Precious One,'" answered the nun, "and indeed, your weight became so
painful, that I changed places with you and sat on your head myself."
One variety of exercises in concentration consists in choosing some kind of a land-
scape, a garden for instance, as a subject of meditation.
First, the student examines the garden, observing every detail. The flowers, their
different species, the way in which they are grouped, the trees, their respective
height, the shape of their branches, their different leaves and so on, noting all partic-
ulars that he can detect.
When he has formed a subjective image of the garden, that is to say when he sees
it as distinctly when shutting his eyes as when looking at it, the disciple begins to
eliminate one by one the various details which together constitute the garden.
Gradually, the flowers lose their colours and their forms, they crumble into tiny
pieces which fall to dust and finally vanish.
The trees, also, lose their leaves, the branches shorten, and seem to be withdrawn
into the trunk. The latter grows thin, becomes a mere line, more and more flimsy till
it ceases to be visible.
Now, the bare ground alone remains and from it the novice must subtract the stones
and the earth. The ground in its turn vanishes. (...)
It is said that by the means of such exercises one succeeds in expelling from the
mind all idea of form and matter and thus gradually reaches the various states of
consciousness such as that of the "pure, boundless space," and that of the "bound-
less consciousness." Finally one attains to the "sphere of void," and then to the
sphere where "neither consciousness nor unconsciousness" is present. 219
These four contemplative meditations are often mentioned in early Buddhist Scrip-
tures and are recognized by all sects as part of the spiritual training. They are called
"formless contemplations."
Many methods have been devised which lead to these peculiar states of mind.
Sometimes the later states are produced by a contemplation absolutely devoid of
cogitations, while in other cases they follow a series of minute introspections or are
the result of prolonged investigations and reflections regarding the external world.
Lastly, it is said that there are people who suddenly reach one or another of these
four states of mind without any preparation, in any place or during any kind of occu-
pation.
The following exercise has already been briefly described in the story of the man
who felt himself to be a yak. However, it includes developments that were unknown
to the hero of that story.
For instance, the disciple has chosen a tree, as an object of meditation, and has
identified himself with it. That is to say that he has lost the consciousness of his own
personality and experiences the peculiar sensations that one may ascribe to a tree.
He feels himself to be composed of a stiff trunk with branches, he perceives the
sensation of the wind moving the leaves. He notes the activity of the roots feeding
219.That is to say that it is an indescribable state to which the ordinary notions of consciousness and uncon-
sciousness cannot be applied.
•
•
168
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

under the ground, the ascension of the sap which spreads all over the tree, and so
on.
Then, having mentally become a tree220 seated in front of him and must examine
this man in detail.
This done, the disciple again places his consciousness in the man and contem-
plates the tree as before. Then, transferring his consciousness once more into the
tree, he contemplates the man. This alternative transposition of subject and object
is effected a number of times.
This exercise is often practiced indoors with a statue of a stick called gom shing221
meditation wood. (Properly speaking, the gom shing is merely a stick at which one
gazes to obtain fixity of mind. The burning incense stick is a variety of gom shing.)
A burning incense stick is also used in an obscure or completely darkened room to
dispose the mind to meditation. But I must again lay stress upon the fact that it is not
intended to produce an hypnotic state.
Preparation for meditation is called niampar jagpa. It consists in bringing the mind
into perfect stillness and the contemplation of the tiny dot of fire at the top of the stick
helps in producing that state of calm.
People who habitually practice methodical contemplation often experience, when
sitting down for their appointed time of meditation, the sensation of putting down a
load or taking off a heavy garment and entering a silent, delightfully calm, region.
It is the impression of deliverance and serenity which Tibetan mystics call niampar
jagpa, "to make equal," "to level" – meaning calming down all causes of agitation
that roll their "waves" through the mind.
Another exercise which, however, seems to be seldom practiced, consists in "dis-
placing one's consciousness in one's own body." It is explained as follows.
We feel our consciousness in our "heart." Our arms seem to us to be "annexes" to
our body, and our feet seem to be a distant part of our person. In fact, arms feet and
other parts of the body are looked at as if they were objects for a subject dwelling
elsewhere.
Now the student will endeavour to make the "consciousness" leave its habitual
abode and transfer it, for instance, to his hand, then he must feel himself to have the
shape of five fingers and a palm, situated at the extremity of a long attachment222
which joins on to a big moving structure, the body.
That is to say, he must experience the sensation that we might have if, instead of
having the eyes and the brain in the head, we had them in the hand and then the
hand was able to examine the head and the body, reversing the normal process
which is to look downwards in order to see the hands or the body.
What can be the aim of such strange exercises? The most frequent answer given to
my questions will probably seem unsatisfactory by many inquirers, yet it is probably
quite correct.
220.Which has now become the subject) he must look at the man (who has now become the object
221.Properly speaking, the gom shing is merely a stick at which one gazes to obtain fixity of mind. The burn-
ing incense stick is a variety of gom shing.
222.the arm
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
169
•

•••

Some lamas have told me that the aim of these practices can hardly be explained,
because those who have not felt their effects could not understand the explana-
tions.
One attains, by the means of these strange drills, psychic states entirely different
from those habitual to us. They cause us to pass beyond the fictitious limits which
we assign to the self. The result being that we grow to realize that the self is com-
pound, impermanent; and that the self, as self, does not exist.
One of these lamas seized upon a remark I had made as an argument in support of
his theory.
When he spoke of the heart as the seat of thought and mind, I had said that West-
erners would rather place thoughts and mind in the brain.
"You see," immediately replied my interlocutor, "that one may feel and recognize the
mind in different places. Since these Philings223 experience the sensation of think-
ing in their head, and I experience it in my heart, one may believe that it is quite pos-
sible to feel it in the foot. But all these are only deceitful sensations, with no shadow
of reality. The mind is neither in the heart nor in the head, nor somewhere outside of
the body, apart, separated, alien to it. It is to help one realize this fact that these
apparently strange practices have been devised."
Here again we meet with the "clearing" process. All these exercises aim at destroy-
ing habitual notions accepted by routine and without personal investigation. The
object is to make one understand that other ideas can be put in their place. It is
hoped that the disciple will conclude that there cannot be any absolute truth in ideas
derived from sensations which can be discarded while others, even contradictory to
them, take their place.
Kindred theories are professed by the followers of the Chinese Ts'an224 sect.
They express them in enigmatical sentences such as:
"Lo, a cloud of dust is rising from the ocean and the roaring of the waves is heard
over the land."
"I walk on foot, and yet on the back of an ox I am riding."
"When I pass over the bridge, Lo! the water floweth not, but the bridge floweth."
"Empty handed I go, and behold! the spade's handle is in my hand."
And so on.
The doctrine of the Ts'an sect has been defined by one of its followers as "the art of
perceiving the polar star in the Austral hemisphere." This paradoxical saying resem-
bles that of the lama who said to me: "One must discover the white in the black and
the black in the white."
I shall cite a question, current in Tibet, which mystic hermits, as wed as philoso-
phers living in monasteries, put to their pupils.
"A flag moves, What is that which moves? – Is it the flag or the wind?"
The answer is that neither the flag nor the wind moves. It is the mind that moves.
223.Foreigners
224.Ch’an called Zen sect, in Japan.
•
•
170
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

The followers of the Ts'an sect ascribe the origin of this question to the sixth Patri-
arch of their sect. Once, in the courtyard of the monastery, he saw two monks look-
ing at a flag floating in the air. One of them declared: "It is the flag that moves." The
other affirmed: "It is the wind that moves." Then the master explained to them that
the perception of a motion which they experienced was not really due to the wind or
to the flag, but to something existing in themselves.
We are in doubt as to whether such ways of thinking have been imported into Tibet
from India or from China. I may, however, state the opinion expressed by a lama:
"The Bönpos," he said, "taught such things long before Padmasambhava came
to Tibet.''225
Abandoning further investigations on the transcendental results of transferring
one's mind to different parts of one's body, I may remark that during this exercise, a
peculiar sensation of heat is felt at the spot where one has "transported his con-
sciousness."
It is rather difficult to ascertain whether the phenomena consists in a real increase
in heat or a subjective sensation only. The very idea of undertaking such investiga-
tion would break the concentration of mind and so destroy the cause that produced
heat. As to making observation upon other people, it is almost impossible. Tibetan
hermits and their disciples have nothing in common with Western professional
mediums who work for money and allow us to examine the phenomena which they
produce. The most insignificant pupil of a gomchen would feel astonished if such a
proposal was made to him. I can hear him answer:
"I do not care whether you believe or not in these phenomena, and I have no
desire to convince you. I am not a juggler giving theatrical performances."
The fact is that Orientals, excepting vulgar charlatans, do not make a show of their
mystic, philosophic or psychic knowledge. It is most difficult to win their confidence
in these matters. A traveller in search of information may be the guest of a lama for
several months, drink tea daily with him and go away thinking his host is an ignora-
mus, while on the contrary, the lama could have answered all his questions and told
him more things than he has even thought of.
Whether the heat be actual or subjective the exercise has more than once warmed
my feet, and given me a refreshing sleep while spending the night under a tent – or
even without any tent – outdoors in the snow. But unless one has been trained for a
long time in the practice, it requires strenuous efforts which make it extremely tiring.
To conclude, I will call attention to the fact that the terms which I have translated by
"consciousness" and "mind" have not exactly the same signification in Tibetan as in
English.
Tibetans distinguish as many as eleven kinds of "consciousness" and have three
words in their language which we are compelled to translate by "mind," though each
of them bears a special philosophic meaning.
A frequent way of ascertaining the degree of the concentration of mind is to place a
small burning lamp on the head of the novice who is to remain in solitary meditation.
225.This means before Buddhism spread into Tibet.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
171
•

•••

Tibetan lamps consist of a cup-like receptacle, made of metal or mud; the base of
the lamp enlarges at the bottom, which is shaped like a second cup turned upside
down. These lamps are filled with melted butter; a wick is thrust into a small cavity
bored for that purpose at the bottom of the cup. When the butter cools it forms a
cake and the lamp is ready to be lighted.
This apparatus easily rests on the crown of the head as long as one preserves
absolute immobility, but it falls off at the slightest movement. Now as perfect con-
centration produces complete immobility, any failure is proved by the fall of the
lamp.
It is said that a lama who had once placed a lamp on the head of a pupil found him
the next day still seated in meditation, but with the lamp beside him on the ground
without any butter in it. Answering his master's question, the novice who had not
understood the aim of the exercise replied:
"The lamp did not fall down, I myself took it away when the butter was exhausted
and it went out" – "How could you know that the lamp went out, or even that you
had a lamp on your head, if you had reached true concentration of mind?"
retorted the teacher.
Sometimes a small bowl filled with water is used instead of a lamp.
Certain masters also command their disciples either before the time of their medita-
tion or immediately after it, to carry from one spot to another a bowl with water up to
the brim. This exercise aims at testing the degree of tranquillity of the mind. The
slightest agitation of the mind, whatever may be its cause – joy or sadness, memory,
desire, etc. – is likely to produce a movement of the body. Now, the least quivering of
the fingers is sufficient to shake the bowl and the quantity of water poured out, as
well as the number of times the accident happens, discloses the more or less vio-
lent movement of the mind. Such at least is the theory on which the exercise is
based.
This theory and the exercises which have been devised from it, are known all over
the East. Indians tell pretty stories about them. Here is one.
A rishi226 had a disciple whom he believed already far advanced in spiritual devel-
opment. Wishing that he might receive supplementary teaching from Janaka, the
kingly Sage of great repute, he sent the young man to him. At first Janaka left the
new-comer for several days outside his palace gate without allowing him even to
enter the courtyard. Nevertheless, the well-trained disciple, though he was of noble
descent, did not show the least sign of being grieved, offended, or displeased by
this humiliating treatment.
When he was finally admitted to the presence of the king, he was given at the door
of the throne hall a bowl filled with water up to the brim and ordered to walk with it in
his hand all round the hall.
Janaka, though his mind was utterly indifferent to all worldly things, was surrounded
by true Oriental splendour. Gold and precious stones glittered on the walls of the
great hall, the courtiers wearing costly jewels surrounded their sovereign, and the
palace dancing girls, as beautiful as goddesses and scantily clad, smiled at the
young stranger passed before them.
226.A Sage often possessed with supernormal powers.
•
•
172
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

Nevertheless the disciple went through the prescribed ordeal without spilling a drop
of water. Nothing offered to his eyes had been capable of producing the slightest
movement in his mind.
Janaka sent him back to his guru saying that he did not need any lessons.
Tibetans are acquainted with the theory regarding the khorlos227 which is classic
among the followers of Hindu Tantrism. Most likely it has been imported into Tibet
from India or Nepal, but the interpretation given by the lamas differs on a number of
points from that which is current in Hindu circles.
The khorlos are said to be centres of energy that are situated in various parts of the
body. They are often called 'lotus.' The practices connected with the khorlos belong
to the esoteric teaching. The general aim of the training in which the khorlos play a
part is to direct a stream of energy to the higher lotus: the dabtong – lotus with a
thousand petals) which is situated at the top of the head. The different kinds of exer-
cises in this training aim at utilizing the energy naturally expressed in animal mani-
festations connected with sex, for the development of intelligent and supernormal
powers.
The lamas belonging to the Dzogschen sect are practically the only masters of this
teaching.
Again, certain disciples are advised to contemplate the sky and sometimes to con-
fine themselves to this practice only. Some lie flat on their back in the open, in order
to look at the sky with no other object in sight. This contemplation, and the ideas
which it excites, is said to lead to a peculiar trance in which the notion of personality
is forgotten, and an undescribable union with the universe is experienced.
All lamas agree regarding the usefulness of most of these strangely artful training
practices. Yet, when reading certain treatises about them or listening to oral expla-
nations given by some mystic masters, one not unfrequently detects a restrained
impatience. The teacher who instructs us seems to say: Yes, all that is necessary,
perhaps, even indispensable to the majority of novices, but as a preparatory drill
only, the goal is elsewhere. Let us make haste and finish with the preliminary pro-
cess.
The following sober method keeps closer to this goal; at any rate its working is more
easily understood.
The master orders his disciple to shut himself in tsams and to meditate – taking his
Yidam228 as object of his contemplation.
The novice dwelling in strict seclusion, concentrates his thoughts on the Yidam,
imagining him in the shape and form ascribed to him in books and images. Repeat-
ing certain mystic formulas and constructing a kyilkhor are parts of the exercise of
which the aim is to cause the Yidam to appear to his worshipper. At least, such is the
aim that the master points out to the beginner.
The pupil breaks his contemplation during the time strictly necessary to eat229 and
the very short time allowed for sleep. Often the recluse does not lie down and only
227.Wheels
228.Tutelary deity
229.Generally the recluse has only one meal a day, but drinks buttered tea several times. However, during
such periods of retreat some ascetics subsist on water and roast barley flour only.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
173
•

•••

dozes in one of those gomti which have been described in a previous chapter. (See
“A Guest of the Lamas” on page 32.)
Months and even years may elapse in that way. Occasionally the master inquires
about the progress of his pupil. At last a day comes when the novice informs him
that he has reaped the fruit of his exertion: the Yidam has appeared. As a rule, the
vision has been nebulous and lasted only a little while. The master declares that it is
an encouraging success, but not as yet a definitive result. It is desirable that the
recluse should longer enjoy the hallowed company of his protector.
The apprentice naljorpa cannot but agree, and continues his effort. A long time
again elapses. Then, the Yidam is "fixed" – if I may use that term. He dwells in the
tsams khang and the recluse sees him as always present in the middle of the
kyilkhor.
"This is most excellent," answers the master when he is informed of the fact; "but
you must seek a still greater favour. You must pursue your meditation until you are
able to touch with your head the feet of the Yidam, until he blesses you and speaks
to you."
Though the previous stages have taken long to be effected they may be considered
the easiest part of the process. The following are much more arduous to attain, and
only a small minority of novices meet with success.
These successful disciples see the Yidam taking on life. They distinctly feel the
touch of his feet when, prostrated, they lay their head on them. They feel the weight
of his hands when he blesses them. They see his eyes moving, his lips parting, he
speaks. (...) And lo! he steps out of the kyilkhor and walks in the tsams khang.
It is a perilous moment. When wrathful demi-gods or demons have been called up
in that way, they must never be allowed to escape from the kyilkhor, whose magic
walls hold them prisoners. Set free out of due time, they would revenge themselves
on the person who has compelled them to enter this prison-like consecrated circle.
However, the Yidam, though his appearance may be dreadful and his power is to be
feared, is not dangerous because the recluse has won his favour.
Consequently, he may move about as he pleases in the hermitage. Even better, he
may cross its threshold and stand in the open. Following his teacher's advice, the
novice must find out if the deity is willing to accompany him when he walks out.
This task is harder than all previous ones. Visible and tangible in the obscure her-
mitage fragrant with incense, where the psychic influences born from a prolonged
concentration of thought are working; will the Yidam's form be able to subsist in
quite different surroundings under the bright sunlight, exposed to influences which,
instead of supporting it, will act as dissolving agents?
A new elimination takes place amongst the disciples. Most Yidam refuse to follow
their devotee into the open. They remain obstinately in some dark corner and some-
times grow angry and avenge themselves for the disrespectful experiments to
which they have been submitted. Strange accidents occur to some anchorites, but
others succeed in their undertaking and wherever they go enjoy the presence of
their worshipful protector.
"You have reached the desired goal," says the guru to his exultant disciple. "I have
nothing more to teach you. You have won the favours of a protector mightier than I."
•
•
174
•
Messages Sent "On the Wind"
•••

Certain disciples thank the lama and, proud of their achievement, return to their
monastery or establish themselves in a hermitage and spend the remainder of their
life playing with their phantom.
On the contrary, others trembling in mental agony prostrate themselves at their
guru's feet and confess some awful sin. (...) Doubts have arisen in their mind which,
in spite of strenuous efforts, they have not been able to overcome. Before the Yidam
himself, even when he spoke to them or when they touched him, the thought has
arisen in them that they contemplated a mere phantasmagoria which they had
themselves created.
The master appears afflicted by this confession. The unbeliever must return to his
tsams khang and begin training all over again in order to conquer his incredulity, so
ungrateful to the Yidam who has favoured him.
Once undermined, faith seldom regains a firm footing. If the great respect which
Orientals feel for their religious teacher did not restrain them, these incredulous dis-
ciples would probably yield to the temptation of giving up the religious life, their long
training having ended in materialism. But nearly all of them hold on to it, for if they
doubt the reality of their Yidam, they never doubt their master's wisdom.
After a time the disciple repeats the same confession. It is even more positive than
the first time. There is no longer any question of doubt; he is thoroughly convinced
that the Yidam is produced by his mind and has no other existence than that which
he has lent him.
"That is exactly what it is necessary for you to realize," the master tells him. "Gods,
demons, the whole universe, are but a mirage which exists in the mind, 'springs
from it, and sinks into it’.”230
; ; ;v v v
230.A declaration continually repeated by Tibetan mystics.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
175
•

•••

Chapter VIII: Psychic Phenomena in Tibet – How
Tibetans Explain Them
In the preceding chapter I have already mentioned some incidents that may be clas-
sified as psychic phenomena. It may be useful to take up the subject again, for the
fame which Tibet enjoys in foreign countries is largely due to the belief that prodi-
gies happen there as plentifully as wild flowers grow in the fields.
Whatever certain people may think about the matter, strange events are far from
being usual in Tibet, and it is good to bear in mind that the observations which I have
condensed into a few pages are the result of researches which lasted more than ten
years.
The fascination exercised by Tibet as an abode of sages and magicians dates from
a time long back. Even before the Buddha, Indians turned with devout awe to the
Himalayas, and many were the extraordinary stories about the mysterious, cloud-
enshrouded northern country extending beyond their mighty snowy peaks.
The Chinese also seem to have been impressed by the strangeness of Tibetan
wilds. Amongst others, the legend of her great mystic philosopher Laotze relates
that, at the end of his long career, the master riding an ox started for the mysterious
land, crossed its border, and never returned. The same thing is sometimes told
about Boddhidharma and some of his Chinese disciples, followers of the Buddhist
sect of meditation (Ts'an sect).
Even nowadays one may often meet Indian pilgrims on the paths that climb towards
the passes through which one enters Tibet, dragging themselves along as in a
dream; hypnotized, it seems, by an overpowering vision. When asked the motive of
their journey most of them can only answer that they wish to die on Tibetan ground.
And too often the cold climate, the high altitude, fatigue and starvation help them to
realize their wish.
How can we explain this magnetic power in Tibet?
There is no doubt that the reputation enjoyed by the "Land of Snow" for being a
country of wizards and magicians, a ground on which miracles daily occur, is the
main cause of its attraction over the majority of its worshippers. But now one may
ask for what reason Tibet has been credited with being the chosen land of occult
lore and supernormal phenomena.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
176
•

•••

Perhaps the most obvious cause is that already mentioned, the extreme remote-
ness of the country, enclosed between formidable mountain ranges and immense
deserts.
Men compelled to abandon cherished ideals incompatible with their stern, prosaic
surroundings, are eager to transplant them to a more favourable fairyland. As a last
resource they build gardens in the heaven and superterrestrial paradises to shelter
their day dreams, but how much more readily will they seize upon the opportunity of
lodging them in an earthly country. Tibet offers that opportunity. It has all the physi-
cal features of a true wonderland. I do not think it is exaggerated to say that its land-
scapes surpass, in all respects, those imagined by the fanciful architects of gods'
and demons' worlds.
No description can convey the least idea of the solemn majesty, the serene beauty,
the awe-inspiring wildness, the entrancing charm of the finest Tibetan scenes.
Often, when tramping across these solitary heights, one feels like an intruder.
Unconsciously one slackens pace, lowers one's voice, and words of apology for
one's unwarranted boldness come to the lips, ready to be uttered at the first sight of
a legitimate superhuman master on whose ground one has trespassed.
Common Tibetan villagers and herdsmen, though born amidst such surroundings,
are strongly influenced by them. Translated by their primitive mind, their impres-
sions take the form of these fantastic demigods and spirits of a hundred kinds with
whom they have densely populated the solitudes of Tibet, and whose whimsical
demeanour is the inexhaustible theme of a rich folklore.
On the other hand, just as the Chaldean shepherds of yore observing the starry sky,
on the shore of Euphrates laid the foundation of astronomy, so Tibetan anchorites
and itinerant shamans have long pondered over the mysteries of their bewitching
country and noted the phenomena which there found a favourable ground. A
strange art had its origin in their contemplations and, many centuries ago, the magi-
cians from the northern Transhimalayan land were already known and held in high
repute in India.
Now, in spite of its remoteness, Tibet is not altogether inaccessible. This, I can well
testify. I have several times reached its southern tableland through different Hima-
layan passes, travelled for years in its eastern provinces and the northern Changth-
ang,231 and during my last journey, I crossed the whole country from its
southeastern border to Lhasa. Any robust man or woman who does not fear hard-
ships, might do the same but for the policy which closes Tibet.
It is certain that, especially since the introduction of Buddhism, numbers of Indians,
Nepalese, Chinese and other travellers have visited Tibet, seen its bewildering sites
and heard about the supernormal powers with which its dubtobs are credited.
Amongst them, a few have probably approached the lamas or Bön-pos magicians
and listened to the mystic doctrines of contemplative hermits. Their travellers' tales,
which inevitably grew and amplified as they were circulated, must have greatly con-
tributed, together with the causes I have mentioned and other less apparent ones,
to create around Tibet the glamorous atmosphere it now enjoys.
231.Chang, "north"; Thang, a large track of more or less level ground. The Changthang is the vast grassy
desert which extends between Tibet and the Chinese Turkestan.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
177
•

•••

Must we conclude that the renown of Tibet as the land in which prodigies flourish, is
entirely based on delusion? This would be as great an error as the uncritical accep-
tance of all the native tales, or of those lately conceived by the fertile brains of some
facetious Westerners.
The best way is to be guided by the rather surprising opinion of the Tibetans them-
selves regarding miraculous events. None in Tibet deny that such events may take
place, but no one regards them as miracles, according to the meaning of that term
in the West, that is to say as supernatural events.
Indeed, Tibetans do not recognize any supernatural agent. The so-called wonders,
they think, are as natural as common daily events and depend on the clever han-
dling of little-known laws and forces.
All facts which, in other countries, are considered miraculous or, in any other way,
ascribed to the arbitrary interference of beings belonging to other worlds, are con-
sidered by Tibetan adepts of the secret lore232 as psychic phenomena.
In a general way, Tibetans distinguish two categories of psychic phenomena.
1.   The phenomena which are unconsciously produced either by one or by
several individuals.
In that case, the author – or authors – of the phenomenon acting
unconsciously, it is obvious that he does not aim at a fixed result.
2.    The phenomena produced consciously, with a view of bringing about a
prescribed result. These are generally – but not always – the work of a single
person.
That "person" may be a man or may belong to any one of the six classes of sentient
beings which lamaists acknowledge as existing in our world.
Whosoever be its author, the phenomenon is produced by the same process, in
accordance with some natural laws: there is no miracle.
It may be of interest to remark here that Tibetans are staunch determinists. Each
volition, they believe, is brought about by a number of causes, of which some are
near and others extremely remote.
I shall not lay stress on that point which is outside the present subject. However, the
reader must bear in mind that, according to Tibetans, each phenomenon, con-
sciously or unconsciously generated, as well as each of our bodily or mental
actions, is the fruit of manifold combined causes.
Amongst these causes, the first and more easily discernible ones are those which
have arisen, in the mind of the doer of the action, the conscious will of doing it. To
these causes Tibetans assimilate those which, even unknown to the doer, have put
into motion some forces which have led him to perform the action. Both kinds are
styled gyu, "immediate or principal cause." Then, come the outside causes, not
originating with the doer, which may have helped the accomplishment of the action.
These are called kyen.233
232.May it be said once more, that "secret lore" is not to be understood as an esoteric Buddhist doctrine, but
as traditional erudition and methods of realizing aims that are not necessarily spiritual.
233.As an instance, the seed is the rgyu of the plant. The soil and the various substances which exist in it, the
water, air, sun, the gardener who has sown the seed, etc., etc., are rkyen (pronounced gyu and kyen).
•
•
178
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

The remote causes are often represented by their "descendants.”234
These "descendants" are the present conditions which exist as the effects of bodily
or mental actions which have been done in the past, but not, necessarily, done by
the doer of the present act himself.
So, when concentration of thoughts is mentioned here below as the direct cause of
a phenomenon, one must remember: first that, according to Tibetan mystics, this
concentration is not spontaneous, but determined; and secondly, that beside this
direct apparent cause, there exist, in the background, a number of secondary
causes which are equally necessary to bring about the phenomenon.
The secret of the psychic training, as Tibetans conceive it, consists in developing a
power of concentration of mind greatly surpassing even that of men who are, by
nature, the most gifted in this respect.
Mystic masters affirm that by the means of such concentration of mind, waves of
energy are produced which can be used in different ways. The term "wave" is mine.
I use it for clearness sake and also because, as the reader will see, Tibetan mystics
really mean some "currents" or "waves" of force. However, they merely say shugs or
tsal that is to say, "energy." That energy, they believe, is produced every time that a
physical or mental action takes place.
•
Action of the mind, of the speech and of the body, according to the Buddhist
classification.
•
The production of psychic phenomena depends upon the strength of that
energy and the direction in which it is pointed.
An object can be charged by these waves. It then becomes something resembling
our electric accumulators and may give back, in one way or another, the energy
stored in it. For instance, it will increase the vitality of one who touches it, infuse him
with courage, etc.
Practices grounded on this theory and aiming at beneficial results are current in
Tibet. Numbers of lamas prepare pills, holy water, knotted scarves, charms printed
on paper or cloth, which are supposed to impart strength and health, or to keep
away accidents, evil spirits, robbers, bullets and so on.
The lama must first purify himself by a proper diet and then concentrate his
thoughts on the object which he means to empower, in order to load it with whole-
some influences. Several weeks or months are sometimes deemed necessary for
that preparation. However, when it is only a question of charmed scarves, these are
often knotted and consecrated in a few minutes.
3.    The energy which is communicated to an object, pours into it a kind of life.
That inanimate object becomes able to move and can perform certain actions
at the command of its maker.
The ngagspas are said to resort to these practices, to hurt or kill without arousing
any suspicion that they are responsible for the casualty.
Here is an instance of the way in which the sorcerer proceeds.
234.In Tibetan rigs. As an instance: the milk is present in the butter or cheese, the seed is present in the tree
born from it. Tibetans freely use these illustrations.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
179
•

•••

Taking with him the object which is to be animated – let us say a knife destined to kill
someone – the ngagspa shuts himself in seclusion for a period that may last over
several months. During that time he sits, concentrating his thoughts on the knife in
front of him and endeavouring to transfer to the inanimated object, his will to kill the
particular individual whose death has been planned.
Various rites are often performed in connection with the ngagspa's concentration of
mind. These aim at adding to the energy which the latter is capable of generating
and transfusing into the knife. Beings deemed more powerful than the sorcerer are
either besought to co-operate willingly with him or coerced and compelled to let
their energy flow into the weapon.
These "beings" are often of a demoniacal kind, but in the case when the murder is
deemed a righteous action235 useful to the welfare of many, lofty benevolent entities
may be called in as helpers. These are always respectfully implored and no one
attempts to coerce them. Some ngagspas think it useful to bring the weapon into
touch with the man whom it is meant to kill or with objects habitually used by him.
Other adepts of the black art scoff at such a childish practice and declare that it dis-
closes utter ignorance regarding the causes which may bring about the killing or
hurting that is to appear accidental.
When the sorcerer supposes that the knife is ready to perform its work, it is placed
near the man who is to become its victim so that, almost always, he may be led to
use it. Then, as soon as he seizes it, the knife moves, gives a sudden impulse to the
hand which holds it, and the man against whom it has been prepared stabs himself.
It is said that when once the weapon has been animated in that way, it becomes
dangerous for the ngagspa who, if he lacks the knowledge and cleverness required
to guard himself, may fall its victim.
Auto-suggestion is likely to result from the protracted meditation and the elaborate
rites performed by the sorcerer while dwelling in seclusion, and it would not be sur-
prising if some accident occurred to him. Nevertheless, apart from the stories of
demons and spirits there may be a phenomenon similar to that which is said to
occur when the phantom created by a magician breaks away from its maker's con-
trol.
Certain lamas and a few Bön-pos have told me that it is a mistake to believe, in such
cases as I have just mentioned, that the knife becomes animated and kills the man.
It is the man, they said, who acts on auto-suggestion as a result of the sorcerer's
concentration of thought.
Though the ngagspa only aims at animating the knife, the man against whom the
rites are performed is closely associated in his mind with the idea of the weapon.
And so, as that man may be a fit receiver of the occult "waves" generated by the sor-
cerer – (while the knife is not) he falls unconsciously under their influence. Then,
when touching the prepared knife, the view and touch of the latter put into motion
the suggestion existing, unknown to him, in the man's mind, and he stabs himself.
235.As were the murders of harmful beings by King Gesar of Ling or the murder of the King Langdharma,
who meant to reestablish the pre-buddhistic shamanism in Tibet. Lamaists differ on that point from ortho-
dox Buddhism which expressly forbids killing.
•
•
180
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

Moreover, it is strongly believed that without any material object for transmission,
proficient adepts of the secret lore can suggest, even from afar, to men or other
beings, the idea of killing themselves in one way or another.
All agree in saying that any such attempt cannot be successful against an adept in
psychic training because such a one detects the "waves" of forces pointed at him
and is able to discriminate their nature and thrust back those which he deems harm-
ful.
4.    Without the help of any material object, the energy generated by the
concentration of thoughts can be carried to more or less distant points. There
this energy may manifest itself in various manners. For instance:
It can bring about psychic phenomena.
It can penetrate the goal ascribed to it and thus transfer the power generated
elsewhere.
Mystic masters are said to use this process during the angkur rites.
Much could be said about these rites and the spirit which pervades them. The lim-
ited space allowed in an average size volume forbids an exhaustive account of all
theories and practices of mystic Lamaism and I have reluctantly had to omit for the
present a number of interesting subjects. I shall confine myself to a few words.
Lamaist angkur, literally "empowerment," is not an "initiation," though, for lack of
other words, I have sometimes used that term in the course of the present book.
The various angkurs are not meant to reveal esoteric doctrines, as initiations were,
among the Greeks and other peoples. They have a decidedly psychic character.
The theory about them is that "energy" may be transmitted from the master – or
from some more occult store of forces – to the disciple who is able to "tap" the psy-
chic waves in transmission.
According to lamaist mystics, during the performance of the angkur rite a force is
placed within the disciple's reach. The seizing and assimilating of that force is left to
his ability.
In the course of talks I had on this subject with mystic initiates, they have defined
angkur as "a special opportunity" offered to a disciple of "empowering himself."
By the same method, mystic masters are said to be able to dispatch waves of
energy which, in case of need, cheer, refresh and invigorate, physically and men-
tally, their distant disciples.
The process is not always meant to enrich the goal to which the waves are directed.
On the contrary, sometimes when reaching that goal, these waves absorb a portion
of its energy. Then, returning with this subtly stolen spoil, they pour it into the "post"
from which they have been sent forth, and in which they are reabsorbed.
Some magicians, it is said, gain great strength or prolong their lives by incorporating
this stolen energy.
5.    Tibetan mystics also affirm that adepts well trained in concentration are
capable of visualizing the forms imagined by them and can thus create any
kind of phantom: men, deities, animals, inanimate objects, landscapes, and
so forth.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
181
•

•••

The reader must recall what has been said on this subject in reference to the Tulkus
See “A Famous Tibetan Monastery” on page 58. and the innumerable phantoms
which, according to the Dalai Lama, a Changchub semspa236 has the power to
generate.
These phantoms do not always appear as impalpable mirages, they are tangible
and endowed with all the faculties and qualities naturally pertaining to the beings or
things of which they have the appearance.
For instance, a phantom horse trots and neighs. The phantom rider who rides it can
get off his beast, speak with a traveller on the road and behave in every way like a
real person. A phantom house will shelter real travellers, and so on.
Such happenings abound in Tibetan stories and especially in the famous epic of
King Gesar of Ling. The great hero multiplies himself. He produces phantom cara-
vans with tents, hundreds of horses, lamas, merchants, servants and each of them
plays his part. In battles he creates phantom armies which kill their enemies just as
well as if they were authentic warriors.
All this appears to belong to the realm of fairy tales and one may wisely assume that
ninety-nine out of a hundred of these stories are purely mythical. Yet disconcerting
incidents occur, phenomena are witnessed which it is impossible to deny.
Explanations of them are to be found by the observer himself, if he refuses to accept
those offered by Tibetans. But often these Tibetan explanations, on account of their
vaguely scientific form, attract the inquirer and become themselves a field of inves-
tigation.
Western travellers who have approached the Tibetan border and formed a superfi-
cial idea of the common folk's superstitions will be most surprised to hear of the
strangely rationalistic and sceptical opinion of prodigies which these apparently
credulous simpletons harbour in the depth of their minds.
Two stories, which are known and famous all over Tibet, will serve to illustrate the
matter. Whether the facts related be authentic or not is of no importance to us. Our
interest hangs on the explanation given of the cause of the miracle and the spirit
which pervades the whole story.
Once upon a time, a trader was travailing with his caravan on a stormy day, and his
hat was carried away by the wind.
Tibetans believe that to pick up a hat which has fallen down in such circumstances
in the course of a journey will bring bad luck. So yielding to that superstition, the
merchant abandoned his hat.
It was a soft felt hat, with fur laps that can be worn turned up or covering the ears, as
the weather requires. Buried between the thorny shrubs where it had been violently
tossed by the wind, its shape was hardly recognizable.
A few weeks later a man passing by that place at dusk noticed an undistinguishable
form which seemed to be crouched among the thickets. He was not too brave and
hurriedly passed his way. On the morrow he told some villagers that he had seen
"something strange" at a short distance from the path. Other travellers also
remarked at that very spot, a peculiar object whose nature they could not ascertain,
236.In Sanskrit a Bodhisatva. A highly spiritually developed being nearing the perfection of a Buddha.
•
•
182
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

and spoke of it to the villagers. Then, others again and again had a look at the inno-
cent hat and called the attention of the country people to it.
Now, sun, rain and dust helped to make the hat a stiff more mysterious-looking
object. The felt had taken on a dirty yellowish-brown colour and the fur laps looked
vaguely like an animal's ears.
Traders and pilgrims stopping in the village were warned that, at the skirt of the for-
est, a "thing," neither man nor beast, remained in ambush and it was necessary to
be on the watch. Someone suggested that the "thing" must be a demon and soon
the object, anonymous till then, was promoted to the rank of a devil.
As months went by, more people cast a fearful glance at the old hat, more people
spoke about it and the whole country came to talk of the "demon" hidden at the bor-
der of the wood.
Then one day it happened that some passers-by saw the rag moving. Another day it
tried to extricate itself from the thorns that had grown around it, and finally it followed
a party of wayfarers who ran, panic-stricken, for their lives.
The hat had been animated by the many thoughts concentrated on it.
That story, which Tibetans affirm to be authentic, is given as an instance of the
power of concentration of mind, even when unconsciously effected, and not aiming
at a prescribed result.
The second story has an the appearances of having been invented by a miscreant
joker to ridicule the devotees, but it is not so. No one in Tibet finds it laughable or
irreverent. The fact related is accepted as revealing a strict truth about all cults.
Whatever it may be, the worshipped object is only possessed with the power, which
is supplied to it by the collective concentration of thoughts and the faith of its wor-
shippers.
The aged mother of a trader who went each year to India, asked her son to bring her
a relic from the Holy Land.237
The trader promised to do so, but his mind being much occupied with the cares of
his business, he forgot his promise.
The old woman felt very sad, and the next year, when her son's caravan started
again, she renewed her request for the holy relic.
Again the trader promised to bring one, and again he forgot it. The same thing hap-
pened for the third time the fonowing year. However, this time the merchant remem-
bered his promise before reaching his home and was much troubled at the idea of
once more disappointing his aged mother's eager expectation.
As he pondered over the matter, seeking a way to mend his neglect, he caught sight
of a piece of a dog's jaw lying near the road.
A sudden inspiration came to him. He broke off a tooth of the bleached jaw-bone,
wiped away the earth which covered it and wrapped it in a piece of silk. Then, hav-
ing reached his house, he offered the old bone to his mother, declaring that it was a
most precious relic, a tooth of the great Sariputra.238
237.India, the cradle of Buddhism, is the "Holy Land" of Tibetans.
238.A prominent personal disciple of the Buddha.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
183
•

•••

Overjoyed, her heart filled with veneration, the good woman placed the tooth in a
casket on the altar of the family shrine.
Each day she worshipped before it, lighting lamps and burning incense. Other dev-
otees joined in the worship and after a time rays of light shone from the dog's tooth,
promoted holy relic.
A popular Tibetan saying is born from that story:
"Mös gus yöd na
Khyi so öd tung."239
Which means "If there is veneration even a dog's tooth emits light."
Once more we see that Tibetan theories about all phenomena are always the same
at heart. All are grounded on the power of the mind and this is only logical for people
who consider the world, as we see it, to be but a subjective vision.
The power of becoming invisible at will, exhibited by numbers of magicians in the
tales of all nations, is finally ascribed, by Tibetan occultists, to the cessation of men-
tal activity.
Truly, Tibetan legends tell us about material contrivances for causing invisibility.
Among them is the dip shing which appears in so many stories. It is the fabulous
wood which a strange crow hides in its nest. The smallest fragment of it ensures
complete invisibility to the man, beast or object which holds it or near which it is
placed. But great naljorpas and dubchens need not possess any magic material
implement to make themselves invisible.
From what I have been able to understand, adepts in psychic training do not see this
prodigy in the same way as the profane. According to them, it is not a question of
juggling oneself away, but of taking care not to arouse any feeling in the sentient
beings by whom one is surrounded. By that means one's presence is not detected
or, at a lesser degree, one is scarcely noticed
by those before whose eyes one passes; one does not excite any reflection in their
mind and does not leave any impression in their memory.
The explanations which have been given to me of this matter may be roughly sum-
marized as follows.
When one walks, making a loud noise and many gestures, jostling against men and
things, one arouses many sensations in many people. Attention is roused in those
who feel these sensations and that attention is directed to the one who causes
them. If, on the contrary, one steals along noiselessly without touching anybody,
one arouses few sensations; these are not vivid, they awaken only slight attention in
those who experience them and, consequently, one is but little noticed.
Yet, however motionless and silent one may be, the work of the mind generates an
energy which spreads all around the one who produces it, and this energy is felt in
various ways by those who come into touch with it. But if one succeeds in stopping
all activity of the mind, one arouses no sensations in others and so one is not seen.
As I thought this theory too fantastic, I objected that in any case, the material body
must remain visible. The reply was as follows: At each moment, a large number of
239.Spelt: mos gus yod na, khyi so hod hphrung.
•
•
184
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

objects are within our view, yet we only notice a few of them. The others do not
make any impression on us. No "knowledge – consciousness"240 follows the visual
contact,241 we do not remember that this contact has taken place. Practically, these
objects have remained invisible to us.
However interested we may feel in the other strange accomplishments with which
Tibetan adepts of the secret lore are credited, the creation of thought forms seems
by far the most puzzling.
We have already seen in the preceding chapter how the novice is trained to build up
the form of his tutelary deity, but in that case the aim is a kind of philosophical
enlightenment. The goal is different in other cases.
In order to avoid confusion, we will first consider another kind of phenomena which
is often discussed, not only in Tibet, but in various other Eastern countries and even
in the West. Some profess to see a certain analogy between these and the creation
of thoughtforms, but, in fact, the process is not at all the same.
In nearly all countries there are people who believe in a subtle soul or spirit which,
while the body lies asleep or in a cataleptic trance, can roam about in various
places242 and perform different deeds, sometimes associating for that purpose with
a material body other than that with which it is habitually united.
Tales of witches going to the sabbat were common during the Dark Ages and inves-
tigations proved that, generally, the witch was lying unconscious in a trance all the
time. Nevertheless, when coming to her senses again, she described at length the
wonders of the infernal orgy at which she believed she had been a guest. Numbers
of hysterical women have been burnt at the stake for having such delusions.
In India, countless legends relate the strange adventures of men, demi-gods, or
demons who enter dead bodies, act in guise of the dead man and then revert to
their own frame which had meanwhile remained unconscious.
The most famous of these stories is that of Shri Sankarächarya, the celebrated
Vedantin philosopher to whom Indian Brahmins are indebted for having re-estab-
lished them in the privileged position that had been severely shaken by the rational-
ist Buddhist doctrine. His personality as it appears to us through half-legendary
biographies must have been most remarkable. Unfortunately a sort of political caste
interest seems to have dimmed his otherwise bright intelligence. It made him a
champion of baneful social theories which were in complete contradiction to the
lofty pantheism which he preached.
Sankarächarya – so runs the story – had challenged a rival philosopher named
Mandana, who was a supporter of the ritualistic creed of Karma-mimansa,243 and it
had been settled that whoever was defeated in the discussion should become his
opponent's disciple and embrace the same condition of life as his master.
240.Nampar shespa. Spelt: rnam par shespa.
241.mig gi Regpa
242.About this subject see also what is said about the "delogs" in “Tibet and the Lamas” on page 4)
243.The doctrine that salvation can only be attained through sacrifices to the deities, worship, sacraments
and ritualistic performances. Sankara held the opposite view, that is to say, salvation is the fruit of knowl-
edge.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
185
•

•••

Consequently – Mandana being a householder and Sankarächarya a sannyäsin244
– if Mandana's arguments triumphed, Sankara would have to give up his religious
garb and marry, while in the event Mandana would be compelled to renounce his
wife and home and to don the orange robe – the badge of ultimate renunciation.
It happened that Mandana was losing the controversy and Sankara was about to
claim him as a disciple, when Mandana's wife Bharati, who was a learned lady,
interfered.
The holy Scriptures, she said, declare that wife and husband are one. So, having
defeated my husband you have only defeated one-half of our being. Your victory
cannot be admitted until you defeat me also.
Sankara had no reply; the objection was grounded on orthodox beliefs. He began
another philosophic tournament. The lady, understanding that her knowledge and
controversial ability could not vie with those of her opponent, saved herself by a
clever stratagem.
Indian sacred Scriptures classify among the orthodox sciences, the art of sensual
love. Bharati put certain questions on that peculiar subject to Sankara which con-
founded the ascetic.
He excused himself for his ignorance by saying that he had been absorbed since his
youth in philosophic meditations, and, as sannyäsin, being a strict celibate, women
and all things connected with them were utterly unknown to him. However, he
deemed himself quite capable of acquiring the knowledge which he lacked. Would
not his charming adversary grant him about a month's leave to seek enlighten-
ment? He was willing to resume the controversy at the end of the fixed time.
Here Bharati must have imprudently undervalued the capacity of her opponent, or
thought that such a short time would not be enough for him to master the required
science. She acquiesced and Sankara started in quest of teachers.
Now it happened that, at about that time, a rajah named Amaruka died. Sankara,
who could not have undertaken his study in the person of an already famous
ascetic, here saw a convenient opportunity. He ordered his disciples to guard his
body in a remote spot while he transmitted his "subtle self" into the body of the
prince which was being carried to the funeral pyre. The resuscitated Amaruka was
taken back to his palace to the great joy of his several Ranees, legitimate wives and
a good number of pretty concubines.
Sankara showed himself a zealous scholar, pleasantly astonishing his spouses
who had been somewhat neglected by the late elderly rajah. The ministers and
councillors noticed, also, that since his resurrection their lord's intelligence had
astonishingly increased. This clever ruler appeared altogether most unlike the dull
rajah whom they had known for years.
And so the women of the palace and members of the State council began to sus-
pect that the spirit of some powerful siddh245a was using the body of the late Ama-
ruka. Fearing that he might leave it and return to his own proper abode, they
ordered a search to be made for an abandoned body in some remote spot and
decreed that if any were found, it should be burnt immediately.
244.An ascetic, who has entirely renounced the world.
245.A man who possesses supernormal powers.
•
•
186
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

As for Sankara, he had become so wholly engrossed in his study, that he had
entirely forgotten his personality and had no desire to reintegrate the ascetic philos-
opher's body that he had left in charge of a few disciples.
When their guru did not return at the appointed time, the disciples felt rather uneasy,
and on hearing of the search they were thoroughly terrified. They ran quickly to the
rajah's residency, gained admittance before him and sang a philosophic song which
Sankara had composed. This aroused the guru's memory. His spirit sprang out of
the rajah's body and swiftly entered his own, which had just been discovered and
was already placed on a pyre to be burned.
Having thus completely mastered his subject, he confronted Bharati once more and
astonished her by his superior knowledge. The lady had to admit she was defeated.
This tale could easily take its place among those of Boccacio. Yet, for hundreds of
years, it has been popular amongst Sankara's followers without their seeing any-
thing silly or shocking in it. However, they are apparently beginning to realize that
the story is not very creditable to the memory of their teacher, and some of them
have declared that it was invented by certain simple-minded zealots.
For us the story is valuable as a piece of information. It shows that the belief in the
passing of some subtle self from one body to another, and even in its roaming about
disembodied, was current in India. Such belief was not infrequent in Tibet, where
the "translation" of the self from one body to another one is called trong jug.246
Possibly the theories regarding trong jug have been imported from India. Milarespa,
in his autobiography, relates that his guru Marpa was not taught the secret of trong
jug by his own teacher Narota, but when already old, made a journey to India to
learn it.
It is to be noted that believers in the "translation" of an ethereal self or "double," gen-
erally depict the body from which it withdraws, as remaining inanimate. Here lies the
essential difference between that supposed phenomenon and the apparitions, vol-
untary or unconsciously created, of a tulpa247, either alike or different from its cre-
ator.
In fact, while the translation as related in Indian or Tibetan stories, may well be
regarded as a fable, the creation of tulpas seems worthy of investigation.
Phantoms, as Tibetans describe them, and those that I have myself seen do not
resemble the apparitions which are said to occur during spiritualist seances.
In Tibet, the witnesses of these phenomena have not been especially invited to
endeavour to produce them, or to meet a medium known for producing them. Con-
sequently, their minds are not prepared and intent on seeing apparitions. There is
no table upon which the company lay their hands nor any medium in trance, nor a
dark closet in which the latter is shut up. Darkness is not required, sun and open air
do not keep away the phantoms.
As I have said, some apparitions are created on purpose either by a lengthy pro-
cess resembling that described in the former chapter on the visualization of Yidam
or, in the case of proficient adepts, instantaneously or almost instantaneously.
246.Spelt grong hjug.
247.a Tulpa, spelt: sprulpa, "magic, illusory creations."
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
187
•

•••

In other cases, apparently the author of the phenomenon generates it uncon-
sciously, and is not even in the least aware of the apparition being seen by others.
In connection with this kind of visualization or thought-form creation, I may relate a
few phenomena which I have witnessed myself.
1.   A young Tibetan who was in my service went to see his family. I had granted
him three weeks' leave, after which he was to purchase a food supply, engage
porters to carry the loads across the hills, and come back with the caravan.
Most likely the fellow had a good time with his people. Two months elapsed
and still he did not return. I thought he had definitely left me.
Then I saw him one night in a dream. He arrived at my place clad in a
somewhat unusual fashion, wearing a sun hat of foreign shape. He had never
worn such a hat.
The next morning, one of my servants came to me in haste. "Wangdu has
come back," he told me.
"I have just seen him down the hill."
The coincidence was strange. I went out of my room to look at the traveller.
The place where I stood dominated a valley. I distinctly saw Wangdu. He was
dressed exactly as I had seen him in my dream.
He was alone and walking slowly up the path that wound up the hill slope.
I remarked that he had no luggage with him and the servant who was next me
answered: "Wangdu has walked ahead, the load-carriers must be following."
We both continued to observe the man. He reached a small chörten, walked
behind it and did not reappear.
The base of this chörten was a cube built in stone, less than three feet high,
and from its needle-shaped top to the ground, the small monument was no
more than seven feet high. There was no cavity in it. Moreover, the chörten
was completely isolated: there were neither houses, nor trees, nor undulations,
nor anything that could provide a hiding in the vicinity.
My servant and I believed that Wangdu was resting for a while under the shade
of the chörten. But as time went by without his reappearing, I inspected the
ground round the monument with my field-glasses, but discovered nobody.
Very much puzzled I sent two of my servants to search for the boy. I followed
their movements with the glasses but no trace was to be found of Wangdu nor
of anybody else.
That same day a little before dusk the young man appeared in the valley with
his caravan. He wore the very same dress and the foreign sun hat which I had
seen in my dream, and in the morning vision.
Without giving him or the load-carriers time to speak with my servants and
hear about the phenomenon, I immediately questioned them. From their
answers I learned that all of them had spent the previous night in a place too
far distant from my dwelling for anyone to reach the latter in the morning. It was
also clearly stated that Wangdu had continually walked with the party.
During the following weeks I was able to verify the accuracy of the men's
declarations by inquiring about the time of the caravan's departure, at the few
last stages where the porters were changed. It was proved that they had all
•
•
188
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

spoken the truth and had left the last stage together with Wangdu, as they
said.
2.    A Tibetan painter, a fervent worshipper of the wrathful deities, who took a
peculiar delight in drawing their terrible forms, came one afternoon to pay me
a visit.
I noticed behind him the somewhat nebulous shape of one of the fantastic
beings which often appeared in his paintings.
I made a startled gesture and the astonished artist took a few steps towards
me, asking what was the matter.
I noticed that the phantom did not follow him, and quickly thrusting my visitor
aside, I walked to the apparition with one arm stretched in front of me. My hand
reached the foggy form. I felt as if touching a soft object whose substance gave
way under the slight push, and the vision vanished.
The painter confessed in answer to my questions that he had been performing
a dubthab rite during the last few weeks, calling on the deity whose form I had
dimly perceived, and that very day he had worked the whole morning on a
painting of the same deity.
In fact, the Tibetan's thoughts were entirely concentrated on the deity whose
help he wished to secure for a rather mischievous undertaking.
He himself had not seen the phantom.
In these two cases, the phenomenon was produced without the conscious co-
operation of its author. Or, as a mystic lama remarked, Wangdu and the
painter could hardly be termed the authors of the phenomena. They were but
one cause – may be the principal one – amongst the various causes which
had brought them about.
3.    The third strange occurrence I have to relate belongs to the category of
phenomena which are voluntarily produced. The fact that the apparition
appeared in the likeness of the lama who caused it, must not lead us to think
that he projected a subtle double of himself. This is not the opinion of
advanced adepts in Tibetan secret lore.
According to them such phantoms are tulpas, magic formations generated by a
powerful concentration of thought. As it had been repeatedly stated in the preced-
ing chapters any forms may be visualized through that process. At that time I was
camping near Punag ritöd in Kham. One afternoon, I was with my cook in a hut
which we used as a kitchen.
The boy asked me for some provisions. I answered,
"Come with me to my tent, you can take what you need out of the boxes."
We walked out and when nearing my tent, we both saw the hermit lama seated on a
folding chair next my camp table. This did not surprise us because the lama often
came to talk with me. The cook only said
"Rinpoche is there, I must go and make tea for him at once, I will take the
provisions later on."
I replied: "All right. Make tea and bring it to us."
The man turned back and I continued to walk straight toward the lama, looking at
him all the time while he remained seated motionless.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
189
•

•••

When I was only a few steps from the tent, a flimsy veil of mist seemed to open
before it, like a curtain that is pulled aside.
And suddenly I did not see the lama any more. He had vanished.
A little later, the cook came, bringing tea. He was surprised to see me alone. As I did
not like to frighten him I said: "Rinpoche only wanted to give me a message. He had
no time to stay to tea."
I related the vision to the lama, but he only laughed at me without answering my
questions. Yet, upon another occasion he repeated the phenomenon. He utterly
disappeared as I was speaking with him in the middle of a wide bare track of land,
without tent or houses or any kind of shelter in the vicinity.
The creation of a phantom Yidam as we have seen it described in the previous
chapter, has two different objects. The higher one consists in teaching the disciples
that there are no gods or demons other than those which his mind creates. The sec-
ond aim, less enlightened, is to provide oneself with a powerful means of protection.
How does the phantom of the deity protect its creator? By appearing instead of the
latter.
It is the custom in Tibet that the lamas who are initiated to that peculiar practice "put
on" each morning the personality of their Yidam. This being done, the evil spirits
who happen to meet these lamas do not see them as men, but under the frightful
shape of the terrible deities; a sight which of course prevents them from attempting
any mischief.
Expert magicians in this art can, it is said, hide their own real appearance under any
illusory form they choose.
Among the many who, each morning, gravely take on the shape of their Yidam,
probably very few are really capable of showing themselves as such. I do not know
if they succeed in duping the demons, but they certainly do not create any illusion to
human eyes. Yet I have heard that some lamas have been seen in the appearance
of certain deities of the lamaist pantheon.
Incited by many wonderful legends regarding the power of ancient tubthobs to cre-
ate tulpas, a small number of ngagspas and lamas endeavour, in great secrecy, to
succeed in that peculiar branch of esoteric lore.
However, the practice is considered as fraught with danger for every one who has
not reached a high mental and spiritual degree of enlightenment and is not fully
aware of the nature of the psychic forces at work in the process.
Once the tulpa is endowed with enough vitality to be capable of playing the part of a
real being, it tends to free itself from its maker's control. This, say Tibetan occultists,
happens nearly mechanically, just as the child, when his body is completed and
able to live apart, leaves its mother's womb. Sometimes the phantom becomes a
rebellious son and one hears of uncanny struggles that have taken place between
magicians and their creatures, the former being severely hurt or even killed by the
latter.
Tibetan magicians also relate cases in which the tulpa is sent to fulfil a mission, but
does not come back and pursues its peregrinations as a half-conscious, danger-
ously mischievous puppet. The same thing, it is said, may happen when the maker
of the tulpa dies before having dissolved it. Yet, as a rule, the phantom either disap-
•
•
190
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

pears suddenly at the death of the magician or gradually vanishes like a body that
perishes for want of food. On the other hand, some tulpas are expressly intended to
survive their creator and are specially formed for that purpose. These may be con-
sidered as veritable Tulkus See “A Famous Tibetan Monastery” on page 58. and, in
fact, the demarcation between tulpas and Tulkus is far from being clearly drawn.
The existence of both is grounded on the same theories.
Must we credit these strange accounts of rebellious "materializations," phantoms
which have become real beings, or must we reject them all as mere fantastic tales
and wild products of imagination? – Perhaps the latter course is the wisest. I affirm
nothing. I only relate what I have heard from people whom, in other circumstances,
I had found trustworthy, but they may have deluded themselves in all sincerity.
Nevertheless, allowing for a great deal of exaggeration and sensational addition, I
could hardly deny the possibility of visualizing and animating a tulpa. Besides hav-
ing had few opportunities of seeing thought-forms, my habitual incredulity led me to
make experiments for myself, and my efforts were attended with some success. In
order to avoid being influenced by the forms of the lamaist deities, which I saw daily
around me in paintings and images, I chose for my experiment a most insignificant
character: a monk, short and fat, of an innocent and jolly type.
I shut myself in tsams and proceeded to perform the prescribed concentration of
thought and other rites. After a few months the phantom monk was formed. His form
grew gradually fixed and life-like looking. He became a kind of guest, living in my
apartment. I then broke my seclusion and started for a tour, with my servants and
tents.
The monk included himself in the party. Though I lived in the open riding on horse-
back for miles each day, the illusion persisted. I saw the fat trapa, now and then it
was not necessary for me to think of him to make him appear. The phantom per-
formed various actions of the kind that are natural to travellers and that I had not
commanded. For instance, he walked, stopped, looked around him. The illusion
was mostly visual, but sometimes I felt as if a robe was lightly rubbing against me
and once a hand seemed to touch my shoulder.
The features which I had imagined, when building my phantom, gradually under-
went a change. The fat, chubby-cheeked fellow grew leaner, his face assumed a
vaguely mocking, sly, malignant look. He became more troublesome and bold. In
brief, he escaped my control.
Once, a herdsman who brought me a present of butter saw the tulpa in my tent and
took it for a live lama.
I ought to have let the phenomenon follow its course, but the presence of that
unwanted companion began to prove trying to my nerves; it turned into a "daynight-
mare." Moreover, I was beginning to plan my journey to Lhasa and needed a quiet
brain devoid of other preoccupations, so I decided to dissolve the phantom. I suc-
ceeded, but only after six months of hard struggle. My mind-creature was tenacious
of life.
There is nothing strange in the fact that I may have created my own hallucination.
The interesting point is that in these cases of materialization, others see the
thought-forms that have been created.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
191
•

•••

Tibetans disagree in their explanations of such phenomena; some think a material
form is really brought into being, others consider the apparition as a mere case of
suggestion, the creator's thought impressing others and causing them to see what
he himself sees.
In spite of the clever efforts made by the Tibetans to find rational explanations for all
prodigies, a number remain unexplained, perhaps because they are pure inven-
tions, or perhaps for other reasons.
A Tibetan generally admits that highly advanced mystics need not die in the usual
way, but may dissolve their bodies when and where they like and leave no traces.
It is said that Reschungpa disappeared in this way and that during a special con-
templative meditation Dagmedma the wife of Lama Marpa ended her life by incor-
porating herself in her husband.
But these are all personalities of long-past centuries: it is more interesting to hear
about an occurrence of recent date. And the interest still increases when the prod-
igy, instead of taking place in some lonely hermitage, happened before hundreds of
witnesses.
I may say at once that I was not amongst the latter and that my information is
derived from the account of men who affirmed that they saw the wonder. My only
connection with the miraculous event is that I personally knew the lama who is
believed to have vanished in a mysterious way.
The latter, styled Kyongbu rimpoche, was one of the spiritual teachers and religious
advisers of the Tashi Lama. When I visited Shigatze in 1916 he was already an old
man and lived as a hermit, some miles away from that town, near the bank of the
Yesru Tsangpo.248 The mother of the Tashi Lama held him in high reverence and
when I was her guest I heard several extraordinary stories about that venerable
lama.
It was reported that as years went by, the size of the learned ascetic gradually
decreased. This according to Tibetans, is a sign of great spiritual achievement and
legends relate how the bodies of some dubtobs who had been tall men, became
reduced to minute proportions and finally disappeared.
At that time, the new temple sheltering the huge image of the coming Buddha Mai-
treya was near completion and a consecration ceremony was being talked of. The
Tashi Lama wished his old spiritual adviser to perform the consecration rite, but the
latter declined, saying that he would have passed away before the temple could be
finished.
To this the Tashi Lama replied – it is said – by beseeching the hermit to delay his
death till he had blessed the new building.
Though such a request may astonish the reader, it is in accord with Tibetan ideas
regarding the power which high mystics possess, of choosing the time of their
death.
The hermit promised to perform the consecration.
248.Brahmaputra
•
•
192
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

Then, about one year after my visit to Shigatze, the temple being ready and a day
appointed for the rabnes249 solemnity, the Tashi Lama sent a beautiful sedan-chair
and an escort to Kyongbu Rinpoche to bring him to Tashilumpo's gompa.
The men of the escort saw the lama sitting in the chair. The latter was closed and
the porters started.
Now, thousands of people had gathered at Tashilumpo250 for the religious festival of
inauguration. To their utmost astonishment they saw the lama coming alone and on
foot. Silently he crossed the temple threshold, walked straight towards the giant
image of Maitreya until his body touched it, and then gradually became incorpo-
rated with it.
Some time later the sedan-chair with the escort arrived. Attendants opened its door
(...) the chair was empty.
Many believe that the lama has never been seen again.
The occurrence was odd enough to hold my attention, but my interest was deep-
ened by the fact that I had been acquainted with its hero and the initial circum-
stances that led up to the prodigy, that is to say with the request of the Tashi Lama
regarding the consecration of the temple; and further because the place where the
wonder is said to have happened, was familiar to me.
I burned with the desire of going to Shigatze, to inquire about the lama's last days,
and discover his tomb, if he was really dead. But when I heard of the bizarre miracle
I was at Lhasa in disguise, and neither Yongden nor I could have kept up our incog-
nito in Shigatze, where we both had a number of acquaintances. To be unmasked
meant to be immediately escorted over the border and I intended, after my stay at
Lhasa, to visit Samye monastery, and several others, in Southern Tibet. Also to tour
the historical ground of the Yarlung province. This compelled me to renounce any
attempt at investigation.
Yet, before we left Tibet, Yongden managed to put some discreet questions about
the Shigatze wonder to a few men who seemed capable of holding somewhat
enlightened views on the subject.
Unfortunately, the event was already several years old. Great changes had taken
place in Tsang.251
Moreover, the political atmosphere was not favourable to Tsang. Men of rank had
become exaggeratedly reserved about the least thing which could be interpreted as
exalting the exiled Tashi Lama and those who were near to him. Nor did they dare
increase the prestige of the Maitreya temple whose erection – according to the pub-
lic rumour – had aroused unfriendly and jealous feelings at the Lhasa Court.
We gathered the following opinions:
1.   The lama had created a phantom of himself which appeared to have entered
the sedan-chair, and then acted as has been told in the temple of Maitreya.
249.Abbreviation of rabtu nespa, spelt: rabtu gnaspa. To consecrate new buildings, images, etc.
250.The large monastery next Shigatze.
251.Tsang, the vast territory of which Shigatze is the capital.) since that time and more than one prodigy had
been related in connection with the Tashi Lama's flight to China. (See, My Journey to Lhasa.
•
•
With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet Author's Preface
193
•

•••

This phantom had vanished, as its master wished, when touching the image,
while the lama may have all the time remained in his hermitage.
2.    Or Kyongbu Rinpoche had been able to produce, from afar, a collective
hallucination.
3.    Some suggested that the lama was already dead when the miracle took place,
but had left behind him a kind of phantom of his creation, which he sent to
Tashilumpo.
4.    I also remembered that a disciple of Kyongbu Rinpoche had told me that, by
the means of certain kinds of concentration of mind, a phenomenon may be
prepared in connection with a peculiar event which is to take place in the
future. Once success is obtained with the concentration, the process goes on
mechanically, without further co-operation of the man who has projected the
energy required to bring about the phenomenon. It was even said that this
man is, in most cases, completely incapable of preventing the phenomenon
which he had planned to take place at the appointed time. The energy
generated, which has shaped itself in a certain way, is now beyond his
control.
Much more could be said regarding psychic phenomena in Tibet, but the account of
a single inquirer cannot be very complete, especially under the difficult conditions in
which researches must be pursued in that country.
I earnestly wish that my account may awaken in some scientists, more qualified
than myself for such work, the desire to undertake serious investigations of the phe-
nomena which I have briefly mentioned in the present book.
Psychic research may be guided by the same spirit as any scientific study. The dis-
coveries which can be made in that field have nothing of supernatural, nothing
which may justify the superstitious beliefs and ramblings in which some have
indulged regarding the matter. On the contrary, such research may help to elucidate
the mechanism of so-called miracles, and once explained, the miracle is no more a
miracle.
; ; ;
•
•
194
•
How can we explain this magnetic power
•••

Document Outline

- With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet

- Contents
- Introduction
- Author's Preface
- Chapter I: Tibet and the Lamas
- Chapter II: A Guest of the Lamas

- Chapter III: A Famous Tibetan Monastery

- The Miraculous Tree of Tsong Khapa

- Living Buddha

- Chapter IV: Dealing with Ghosts and Demons

- The Lugubrious Communion
- The Corpse Who Dances
- The Enchanted Dagger

- Practices to acquire Fearlessness - Challenging Demoniacal Beings

- The Dreadful Mystic Banquet

- Chapter V: Disciples of Yore and their Contemporary Emulators

- Chapter VI: Psychic Sports

- The Lung-gom-pas Runners

- The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire up in the Snows

- Messages Sent "On the Wind"

- Chapter VII: Mystic Theories and Spiritual Training

- Chapter VIII: Psychic Phenomena in Tibet - How Tibetans Explain Them

- How can we explain this magnetic power in Tibet?

Table of Contents

- With Mystics and Magicians in Tibet

- Contents
- Introduction
- Author's Preface
- Chapter I: Tibet and the Lamas
- Chapter II: A Guest of the Lamas

- Chapter III: A Famous Tibetan Monastery

- The Miraculous Tree of Tsong Khapa

- Living Buddha

- Chapter IV: Dealing with Ghosts and Demons

- The Lugubrious Communion
- The Corpse Who Dances
- The Enchanted Dagger

- Practices to acquire Fearlessness - Challenging Demoniacal Beings

- The Dreadful Mystic Banquet

- Chapter V: Disciples of Yore and their Contemporary Emulators

- Chapter VI: Psychic Sports

- The Lung-gom-pas Runners

- The Art of Warming Oneself without Fire up in the Snows

- Messages Sent "On the Wind"

- Chapter VII: Mystic Theories and Spiritual Training

- Chapter VIII: Psychic Phenomena in Tibet - How Tibetans Explain Them

- How can we explain this magnetic power in Tibet?